Online Programmer Manual TDS5000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes

Online Programmer Manual  TDS5000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes
Online Programmer Manual
TDS5000 Series
Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes
Adapted from the TDS5000 Series Oscilloscope Online Programmer Guide
PHP0190, Version 2.00 (August 6, 2002)
Copyright and Version Information
Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software
products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by
United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013,
or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer
SoftwareRestricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and
pending. Information in this documentation supercedes that in all
previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges
reserved.
Tektronix, Inc. P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077
TEKTRONIX, TEK, and TEKPROBE are registered trademarks of
Tektronix, Inc.
FrameScan is a trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
TDS5000 Series Programmer Online Guide
PHP0190, Version 2.00 (August 6, 2002)
2
Copyright and Version Information
Getting Started
2
13
Introduction ....................................................................................................13
Setting Up Remote Communications.............................................................14
Documentation...............................................................................................17
Command Syntax
18
Syntax Overview ............................................................................................18
Command and Query Structure .....................................................................18
Clearing the Instrument..................................................................................20
Command Entry .............................................................................................20
Constructed Mnemonics ................................................................................23
Argument Types.............................................................................................24
Command Groups
27
Acquisition Command Group .........................................................................27
Alias Command Group...................................................................................27
Calibration Command Group .........................................................................29
Cursor Command Group................................................................................30
Diagnostics Command Group........................................................................31
Display Control Command Group..................................................................32
File System Command Group .......................................................................34
Hard Copy Command Group .........................................................................35
Histogram Command Group ..........................................................................35
Horizontal Command Group ..........................................................................36
Math Command Group ..................................................................................37
Measurement Command Group ....................................................................39
Miscellaneous Command Group ...................................................................41
Save and Recall Command Group ................................................................42
Status and Error Command Group ................................................................43
Trigger Command Group ...............................................................................43
Vertical Command Group ..............................................................................48
Waveform Transfer Command Group ...........................................................50
Zoom Command Group .................................................................................55
Status and Events
56
Registers ........................................................................................................56
Queues...........................................................................................................60
Event Handling Sequence .............................................................................61
Synchronization Methods...............................................................................62
Messages.......................................................................................................67
Programming Examples
74
Overview ........................................................................................................74
Compiling the Example GPIB Programs........................................................75
Compiling and Linking Example Visual C++ Programs .................................75
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
77
*CAL?.............................................................................................................77
*CLS...............................................................................................................78
*DDT ..............................................................................................................78
*ESE...............................................................................................................79
*ESR? ............................................................................................................80
3
*IDN?..............................................................................................................80
*LRN?.............................................................................................................81
*OPC ..............................................................................................................85
*OPT? ............................................................................................................87
*PSC ..............................................................................................................87
*PUD ..............................................................................................................88
*RCL...............................................................................................................89
*RST...............................................................................................................89
*SAV...............................................................................................................90
*SDS ..............................................................................................................91
*SRE ..............................................................................................................91
*STB?.............................................................................................................92
*TRG ..............................................................................................................93
*TST? .............................................................................................................93
*WAI ...............................................................................................................93
ACQuire:MODe..............................................................................................94
ACQuire:NUMACq? .......................................................................................96
ACQuire:NUMAVg .........................................................................................96
ACQuire:NUMEnv..........................................................................................97
ACQuire:REPEt .............................................................................................98
ACQuire:STATE.............................................................................................99
ACQuire:STOPAfter.....................................................................................100
ACQuire? .....................................................................................................101
ALLEV? ........................................................................................................101
ALIas ............................................................................................................102
ALIas:CATalog?...........................................................................................103
ALIas:DEFIne...............................................................................................103
ALIas:DELEte ..............................................................................................104
ALIas:DELEte:ALL .......................................................................................104
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe ...................................................................................105
ALIas:STATE ...............................................................................................105
AUTOSet......................................................................................................106
AUXout?.......................................................................................................107
AUXout:SOUrce...........................................................................................108
BELI .............................................................................................................108
BUSY? .........................................................................................................109
CAL? ............................................................................................................110
CALibrate:FACtory.......................................................................................111
CALibrate:FACtory:ABOrt ............................................................................111
CALibrate:FACtory:CONTInue ....................................................................112
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:DUE?................................................................113
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs.............................................................114
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs..............................................................115
CALibrate:FACtory:PREVious .....................................................................116
CALibrate:FACtory:STARt ...........................................................................116
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus.........................................................................117
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTATus ...............................................................118
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTIMulus .............................................................119
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>? .................................................................120
CALibrate:RESults? .....................................................................................120
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?.............................................................................121
CH<x>? ........................................................................................................122
CH<x>:BANdwidth .......................................................................................122
CH<x>:COUPling.........................................................................................123
CH<x>:DESKew ..........................................................................................125
CH<x>:INVERT............................................................................................125
4
CH<x>:LABEL:NAMe...................................................................................126
CH<x>:LABEL:XPOS...................................................................................127
CH<x>:LABEL:YPOS...................................................................................128
CH<x>:OFFSet ............................................................................................129
CH<x>:POSition...........................................................................................130
CH<x>:PRObe? ...........................................................................................131
CH<x>:PROBECal?.....................................................................................132
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN? .................................................................................132
CH<x>:PRObe:ID? ......................................................................................133
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe? ............................................................................133
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?..................................................................134
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance? .......................................................................134
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? .................................................................................134
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTatten ....................................................................135
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten ...............................................................136
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits ....................................................................137
CH<x>:SCAle...............................................................................................138
CH<x>:TERmination ....................................................................................139
CMDBatch....................................................................................................140
CURSor?......................................................................................................140
CURSor:FUNCtion.......................................................................................141
CURSor:HBArs? ..........................................................................................142
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? ..............................................................................142
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> ....................................................................143
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? ................................................................................143
CURSor:MODe ............................................................................................144
CURSor:PAIred............................................................................................144
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA? ..........................................................................145
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS<x>? ........................................................................146
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x> ...................................................................146
CURSor:PAIred:UNIts?................................................................................147
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?...........................................................................147
CURSor:SOUrce..........................................................................................148
CURSor:SPLit ..............................................................................................149
CURSor:SPLit:HDELTA?.............................................................................149
CURSor:SPLit:HPOS<x>?...........................................................................150
CURSor:SPLit:POSITION<x>......................................................................150
CURSor:SPLit:SOURCE2............................................................................151
CURSor:SPLit:UNIts ....................................................................................152
CURSor:SPLit:VDELTA? .............................................................................152
CURSor:STATE ...........................................................................................153
CURSor:VBArs ............................................................................................153
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? ..............................................................................154
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> ....................................................................155
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts ..................................................................................155
CURVe .........................................................................................................156
DATa ............................................................................................................158
DATa:DESTination.......................................................................................158
DATa:ENCdg ...............................................................................................159
DATa:SOUrce ..............................................................................................161
DATa:STARt ................................................................................................162
DATa:STOP .................................................................................................163
DATe ............................................................................................................164
DELEte:SETUp ............................................................................................165
DELEte:WAVEform......................................................................................165
DESE ...........................................................................................................166
5
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT ................................................................................167
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP ...............................................................................168
DIAg:EXECUTE ...........................................................................................169
DIAg:ITEM? .................................................................................................169
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?...............................................................................170
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe? ......................................................................................171
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? ..................................................................................172
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? ..............................................................................173
DIAg:LEVEL .................................................................................................174
DIAg:LOOPS?..............................................................................................175
DIAg:NAMe? ................................................................................................175
DIAg:NAMe:AREA? .....................................................................................176
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS? ................................................................................177
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?......................................................................................178
DIAg:NUMITEMS?.......................................................................................178
DIAg:RESULts? ...........................................................................................179
DIAg:RESULts:VERBose?...........................................................................180
DIAg:SELect:ALL .........................................................................................180
DIAg:SELect:AREA......................................................................................181
DIAg:SELect:LAST ......................................................................................182
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS.................................................................................183
DIAg:SELect:TEST ......................................................................................184
DIAg:STATE ................................................................................................185
DIAg:STOP ..................................................................................................186
DISplay?.......................................................................................................186
DISplay:CLOCk............................................................................................187
DISplay:COLOr? ..........................................................................................187
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte..............................................................................188
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr .....................................................................189
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr ........................................................................190
DISplay:FILTer .............................................................................................191
DISplay:FORMat..........................................................................................191
DISplay:GRATicule ......................................................................................193
DISplay:INTENSITy? ...................................................................................194
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright.................................................................195
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform ..................................................................196
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER.........................................................197
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY .............................................198
DISplay:PERSistence ..................................................................................199
DISplay:STYle..............................................................................................200
DISplay:TRIGBar .........................................................................................201
DISplay:VARPersist .....................................................................................202
EVENT? .......................................................................................................202
EVMsg?........................................................................................................203
EVQty?.........................................................................................................203
FACtory ........................................................................................................204
FASTAcq?....................................................................................................205
FASTAcq:STATE .........................................................................................205
FILESystem? ...............................................................................................206
FILESystem:COPy.......................................................................................206
FILESystem:CWD........................................................................................207
FILESystem:DELEte ....................................................................................208
FILESystem:DIR? ........................................................................................209
FILESystem:MKDir ......................................................................................209
FILESystem:PRInt .......................................................................................210
FILESystem:READFile.................................................................................211
6
FILESystem:REName..................................................................................212
FILESystem:RMDir ......................................................................................212
FILESystem:WRITEFile ...............................................................................213
HARDCopy ..................................................................................................214
HARDCopy:FILEName ................................................................................215
HARDCopy:PORT .......................................................................................216
HEADer ........................................................................................................217
HDR .............................................................................................................218
HIStogram?..................................................................................................219
HIStogram:Box.............................................................................................219
HIStogram:BOXPcnt ....................................................................................220
HIStogram:COUNt .......................................................................................222
HIStogram:DISplay ......................................................................................222
HIStogram:FUNCtion ...................................................................................223
HIStogram:MODe ........................................................................................224
HIStogram:SIZe ...........................................................................................225
HIStogram:SOUrce ......................................................................................226
HIStogram:STATE .......................................................................................227
HORizontal?.................................................................................................228
HORizontal:DIVisions? ................................................................................228
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt ..................................................................229
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAME .........................................................230
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth ..................................................................231
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm> <NR1>......231
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODE .........................................232
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm> <NR1> .....233
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce .........................................................234
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm> ...............................................236
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE ..................................................................237
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:<wfm>?......................................238
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen:<wfm>?............................239
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>?.................................240
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAME:<wfm>? ...............................241
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF?.................................................241
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SELECTED:<wfm>? .........................242
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk ..................................................................243
HORizontal:MAIn? .......................................................................................244
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe................................................................244
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition ............................................................245
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe ..................................................................246
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio? ................................................................247
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition ........................................................................247
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate ..................................................................248
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle ............................................................................250
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts ...............................................................................250
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing ..................................................................251
HORizontal:POSition ...................................................................................252
HORizontal:RECOrdlength ..........................................................................253
HORizontal:RESOlution...............................................................................253
HORizontal:ROLL ........................................................................................254
HORizontal:SCAle .......................................................................................255
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition ....................................................................256
ID?................................................................................................................256
LOCk ............................................................................................................257
MATH<x>? ...................................................................................................258
MATH<x>:DEFIne........................................................................................258
7
MATH<x>:LABEL:NAMe..............................................................................260
MATH<x>:LABEL:XPOS..............................................................................260
MATH<x>:LABEL:YPOS..............................................................................261
MATH<x>:NUMAVg.....................................................................................262
MATH<x>:SPECTral?..................................................................................263
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER ....................................................................263
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS .................................................................264
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH .............................................................265
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk..........................................................................266
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG...........................................................................267
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE ......................................................................268
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel ...................................................................269
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset.......................................................270
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw ......................................................................271
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN .........................................................................272
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress ..................................................................273
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap ...................................................................274
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow .....................................................................275
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition .....................................................................277
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle..........................................................................278
MEASUrement? ...........................................................................................279
MEASUrement:GATing................................................................................280
MEASUrement:IMMed? ...............................................................................281
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? ...................................................................282
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction....................................................282
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1]......................................................283
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2........................................................284
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1] ............................................................285
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 ..............................................................286
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe .......................................................................287
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? .....................................................................290
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? ...................................................................290
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?..........................................................................291
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? .............................................................291
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? ..............................................................292
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction...............................................292
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1].................................................293
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2...................................................294
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum? ........................................................295
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? ..............................................................295
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum? .........................................................295
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] .......................................................296
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 .........................................................297
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE ...............................................................298
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?............................................................299
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe..................................................................299
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?................................................................304
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?..............................................................304
MEASUrement:METHod..............................................................................305
MEASUrement:REFLevel? ..........................................................................306
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH ..................................................306
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW ...................................................307
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID ....................................................308
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 ..................................................309
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod.............................................................309
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH ..................................................310
8
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW ...................................................311
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] ................................................312
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 ..................................................313
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt..............................................................313
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe ...............................................................314
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting.........................................................315
NEWpass .....................................................................................................315
PASSWord...................................................................................................316
RECAll:SETUp.............................................................................................317
RECAll:WAVEform.......................................................................................318
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition .....................................................................319
REF<x>:LABel? ...........................................................................................320
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe ..................................................................................320
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS ..................................................................................321
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS ..................................................................................322
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition.........................................................................323
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle.............................................................................324
REM .............................................................................................................325
ROSc:SOUrce..............................................................................................325
ROSc:STate? ...............................................................................................326
SAVe:SETUp ...............................................................................................327
SAVe:WAVEform .........................................................................................328
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat.....................................................................329
SELect?........................................................................................................330
SELect:<wfm>..............................................................................................331
SELect:CONTRol <wfm> .............................................................................332
SETUp:NAMe ..............................................................................................333
SET? ............................................................................................................333
TEKSecure...................................................................................................338
TEST ............................................................................................................338
TEST:RESults?............................................................................................339
TEST:RESults:VERBose? ...........................................................................340
TEST:STOP .................................................................................................340
TIMe .............................................................................................................341
TRIGger .......................................................................................................341
TRIGger:A ....................................................................................................343
TRIGger:A:EDGE?.......................................................................................344
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling........................................................................345
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe ............................................................................346
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce...........................................................................347
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?...................................................................................348
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal? .....................................................................348
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY ...............................................................................349
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe............................................................................350
TRIGger:A:LEVel .........................................................................................350
TRIGger:A:LOGIc? ......................................................................................351
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss.............................................................................352
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion........................................................................353
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut? ............................................................................354
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> ..................................................................355
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern? ........................................................................356
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2........................................................356
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4........................................................357
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn...............................................................358
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit.............................................359
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit ...........................................360
9
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold? .......................................................................361
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk? ..........................................................361
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE.................................................362
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce ..............................................363
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold .........................................363
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?.............................................................364
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce.................................................365
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold............................................366
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime......................................................367
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime.........................................................367
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?..........................................................................368
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2 .........................................................369
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 .........................................................370
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn ................................................................371
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold? ...................................................................372
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> .........................................................372
TRIGger:A:MODe ........................................................................................373
TRIGger:A:PULse? ......................................................................................374
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss ............................................................................375
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch? ..........................................................................376
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity .............................................................376
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF ...............................................................377
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth .................................................................378
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT? ...........................................................................379
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc? ...............................................................379
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut? ......................................................380
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> ...........................................380
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> ..................................381
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity..............................................................382
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?........................................................383
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh ...............................................383
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH................................................384
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW.................................................385
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn .................................................................385
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth..................................................................386
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce ..........................................................................387
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut? ......................................................................388
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity .........................................................388
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe ...............................................................389
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?...................................................................390
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime ................................................390
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity......................................................391
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?................................................392
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh .......................................393
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH........................................393
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW ........................................394
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn .........................................................395
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth? ...........................................................................396
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit ...........................................................396
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit ............................................................397
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity..............................................................398
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn .................................................................398
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow? .......................................................................399
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?............................................................400
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut?..................................................400
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> .......................................401
10
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh............................................402
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> ...............................402
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH ............................................403
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW .............................................404
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold? ....................................................404
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe ...............................................................405
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn..............................................................406
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow WIDth ...............................................................407
TRIGger:A:TYPe..........................................................................................407
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?.......................................................................................408
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom? .......................................................................409
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat ..........................................................409
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN..............................................................410
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD..............................................................................411
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD ...............................................................412
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE................................................................................413
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity..........................................................................414
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN..............................................................................414
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce ...........................................................................415
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard .......................................................................416
TRIGger:B ....................................................................................................417
TRIGger:B:BY ..............................................................................................418
TRIGger:B:EDGE?.......................................................................................419
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling........................................................................420
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe ............................................................................420
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce...........................................................................421
TRIGger:B:EVENTS? ..................................................................................422
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt........................................................................422
TRIGger:B:LEVel .........................................................................................423
TRIGger:B:STATE .......................................................................................424
TRIGger:B:TIMe...........................................................................................425
TRIGger:B:TYPe..........................................................................................426
TRIGger:STATE?.........................................................................................426
UNLock ........................................................................................................427
VERBose......................................................................................................428
WAVFrm?.....................................................................................................429
WFMInpre? ..................................................................................................430
WFMInpre:ENCdg........................................................................................431
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt ......................................................................................432
WFMInpre:BYT_Or ......................................................................................432
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr ......................................................................................433
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr........................................................................................434
WFMInpre:NR_FR? .....................................................................................435
WFMInpre:NR_Pt.........................................................................................435
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt ......................................................................................436
WFMInpre:PT_Off........................................................................................437
WFMInpre:WFId...........................................................................................438
WFMInpre:XINcr ..........................................................................................438
WFMInpre:XZEro .........................................................................................439
WFMInpre:XUNit..........................................................................................440
WFMInpre:YMUlt .........................................................................................440
WFMInpre:YOFf...........................................................................................441
WFMInpre:YUNit..........................................................................................442
WFMInpre:YZEro .........................................................................................442
WFMOutpre? ...............................................................................................443
WFMOutpre:ENCdg.....................................................................................444
11
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr .....................................................................................445
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt ...................................................................................445
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or ...................................................................................446
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr....................................................................................447
WFMOutpre:NR_FR? ..................................................................................448
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?....................................................................................448
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?..................................................................................449
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? ...................................................................................449
WFMOutpre:PT_OR? ..................................................................................450
WFMOutpre:WFId?......................................................................................450
WFMOutpre:XINcr? .....................................................................................452
WFMOutpre:XZEro? ....................................................................................452
WFMOutpre:XUNit? .....................................................................................453
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?.....................................................................................453
WFMOutpre:YOFf? ......................................................................................454
WFMOutpre:YUNit? .....................................................................................454
WFMOutpre:YZEro? ....................................................................................455
WFMpre:NR_FR? ........................................................................................455
ZOOm ..........................................................................................................456
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT ..............................................................................457
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk.............................................................................458
ZOOm:MODe...............................................................................................459
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition............................................................460
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle................................................................460
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition ...............................................................461
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle ...................................................................462
Miscellaneous
463
Character Chart ...........................................................................................463
Reserved Words ..........................................................................................464
Factory Default Setup Values ......................................................................466
GPIB Interface Specifications ......................................................................474
12
Getting Started
Introduction
This online programmer guide provides you with the information
required to use GPIB commands for remotely controlling your
instrument. With this information, you can write computer
programs that will perform functions such as setting the frontpanel controls, taking measurements, performing statistical
calculations, and exporting data for use in other programs, such
as spreadsheets.
Besides the traditional GPIB electronic interface (referred to as
the physical GPIB interface), your instrument is provided with a
TekVISA GPIB-compatible interface (referred to as the virtual
GPIB interface). This is a software Application Programming
Interface (API) which enables you to communicate with the
instrument in a variety of ways, including via the internet. With
the following two exceptions, these interfaces are completely
independent:
•
HEADER. Command headers enabled or disabled on one
interface are correspondingly enabled or disabled on the
other interface. Refer to the command descriptions for more
detailed information.
•
VERBOSE. Verbosity enabled or disabled on one interface
is correspondingly enabled or disabled on the other interface.
Refer to the command description for more detailed
information.
Refer to Documentation for information on related manuals and
documents.
The programmer guide is divided into the following major topics
(books):
•
Getting Started. This topic introduces you to the online
help and provides basic information about setting up your
instrument for remote control.
•
Command Syntax. This topic provides an overview of the
command syntax that you will use to communicate with the
instrument and other general information about commands,
such as how commands and queries are constructed, how to
enter commands, constructed mnemonics, and argument
types.
•
Command Groups. This topic contains all the commands
listed in functional groups. Each group consists of an
overview of the commands in that group and a table that lists
all the commands and queries for that group. You can click a
command in the listing to display a detailed description of
the command.
13
•
Status and Events. This topic discusses the status and event
reporting system for the GPIB interfaces. This system
informs you of certain significant events that occur within
the instrument. Topics that are discussed include registers,
queues, event handling sequences, synchronization methods,
and messages that the instrument may return, including error
messages.
•
Miscellaneous. This topic contains miscellaneous
information, such as a list of reserved words, a table of the
factory initialization (default) settings, and GPIB interface
specifications that may be helpful when using GPIB
commands to remotely control the instrument.
Setting Up Remote Communications
Before setting up the instrument for remote communications
using the electronic (physical) GPIB interface, you should
familiarize yourself with the following GPIB requirements:
•
A unique device address must be assigned to each device on
the bus. No two devices can share the same device address.
•
No more than 15 devices can be connected to any one line.
•
One device should be connected for every 6 feet (2 meters)
of cable used.
•
No more than 65 feet (20 meters) of cable should be used to
connect devices to a bus.
•
At least two-thirds of the devices on the network should be
powered on while using the network.
•
Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear
configuration. Do not use loop or parallel configurations.
Connecting to the Instrument
Your instrument has a 24-pin GPIB connector on its rear (side)
panel. This connector has a D-type shell and conforms to IEEE
Std 488.11987. Attach an IEEE Std 488.11987 GPIB cable
to this connector and to your controller as shown in the
following figure.
14
If necessary, the GPIB connectors can be stacked as shown in the
figure below.
Setting the GPIB Address
To function correctly, your instrument must have a unique
device address. The default settings for the GPIB configuration
are:
•
GPIB Address
1
•
GPIB Mode
GPIB Talk/Listen
15
To change either of the GPIB settings, do the following:
1. Select GPIB Configuration… from the Utilities menu.
2.
16
Click the Configuration Talk/Listen button.
Change the GPIB Address to a unique address.
4. Click the Close button.
3.
The instrument is now set up for bidirectional communication
with your controller.
Documentation
In addition to this TDS5000 Series Oscilloscope Online
Programmer Guide, the following documentation is available for
this instrument. (Unless noted as an optional accessory, the
documentation is included with your instrument.)
TDS5000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes User
Manual. The user manual has information about
installing and operating the instrument. It also provides
concepts and theories about using the instrument that are
not covered in the online help.
TDS5000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Reference
Manual. The quick reference guide provides basic information on
connecting a signal to the instrument and displaying the results.
TDS5000 Series Online Help. This is an online help system that
is integrated with the User Interface application that ships with
this product.
Oscilloscope Analysis and Connectivity Made Easy. A book that
explores some options for getting data from your instrument into
any one of several available analysis tools.
Performance Verification Procedure. A performance verification
procedure is available as a printable PDF file on the TDS5000
Series Product Software CD-ROM. This procedure is also
included in the optional service manual.
TekVISA Programmer Manual. This manual is available as a
printable PDF file on the TDS5000 Series Product Software CDROM. The manual describes TekVISA, the Tektronix
implementation of the VISA Application Programming Interface
(API). TekVISA is industry-compliant software for writing
interoperable instrument drivers in a variety of Application
Development Environments (ADEs).
Other Included Documentation. Your instrument comes with a
graphical packing list . Also, installation booklets are included in
the TDS5000 Series Product Software and TDS5000 Series
Operating System Restore Software CD-ROM packages.
TDS5000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service
Manual. A service manual is available as an optional accessory.
The service manual includes procedures to service the instrument
to module levels. The manual also includes performance
verification procedures so that you can verify performance to the
advertised specifications.
17
Command Syntax
Syntax Overview
You can control the operations and functions of the instrument
through the GPIB interface using commands and queries. The
related topics listed below describe the syntax of these
commands and queries. The topics also describe the conventions
that the instrument uses to process them. See the Command
Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the
commands by command group, or use the index to locate a
specific command.
Backus-Naur Form Notation
This documentation describes the commands and queries using
Backus-Naur Form (BNF) notation. Refer to the following table
for the symbols that are used.
S ym b o l s f o r B a c k u s - N a u r F o r m
S ym b o l
Meaning
<>
Defined element
::=
Is defined as
|
Exclusive OR
{}
Group; one element is required
[]
Optional; can be omitted
...
Previous element(s) may be repeated
()
Comment
Command and Query Structure
Overview
Commands consist of set commands and query commands
(usually called commands and queries). Commands modify
instrument settings or tell the instrument to perform a specific
action. Queries cause the instrument to return data and status
information.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The
query form of the command differs from the set form by its
question mark on the end. For example, the set command
ACQuire:MODe has a query form ACQuire:MODe?. Not all
commands have both a set and a query form. Some commands
have set only and some have query only.
18
Messages
A command message is a command or query name followed by
any information the instrument needs to execute the command or
query. Command messages may contain five element types,
defined in the following table.
Com m a n d M e s s a g e El em e nt s
Sym bol
M e a n i ng
<Header>
This is the basic command name. If the
header ends with a question mark, the
command is a query. The header may begin
with a colon (:) character. If the command is
concatenated with other commands, the
beginning colon is required. Never use the
beginning colon with command headers
beginning with a star (*).
<Mnemonic>
This is a header subfunction. Some
command headers have only one mnemonic.
If a command header has multiple
mnemonics, a colon (:) character always
separates them from each other.
<Argument>
This is a quantity, quality, restriction, or limit
associated with the header. Some
commands have no arguments while others
have multiple arguments. A <space>
separates arguments from the header. A
<comma> separates arguments from each
other.
<Comma>
A single comma is used between arguments
of multiple-argument commands. Optionally,
there may be white space characters before
and after the comma.
<Space>
A white space character is used between a
command header and the related argument.
Optionally, a white space may consist of
multiple white space characters.
Commands
Commands cause the instrument to perform a specific function
or change one of the settings. Commands have the structure:
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argument>]
...]
A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged
in a hierarchical or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base
or root of the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or
branch off the previous one. Commands at a higher level in the
tree may affect those at a lower level. The leading colon (:)
always returns you to the base of the command tree.
19
Queries
Queries cause the instrument to return status or setting
information. Queries have the structure:
•
[:]<Header>?
•
[:]<Header>?[<Space><Argument>[<Comma><Argume
nt>]...]
You can specify a query command at any level within the
command tree unless otherwise noted. These branch queries
return information about all the mnemonics below the specified
branch or level. For example, HIStogram:STATistics:STDdev?
returns the standard deviation of the histogram, while
HIStogram:STATistics? returns all the histogram statistics, and
HIStogram? returns all the histogram parameters.
Headers
You can control whether the instrument returns headers as part
of the query response. Use the HEADer command to control this
feature. If header is on, the query response returns command
headers, then formats itself as a valid set command. When
header is off, the response includes only the values. This may
make it easier to parse and extract the information from the
response. The table below shows the difference in responses.
Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses
Query
Header Off
Header On
TIME?
"14:30:00"
:TIME "14:30:00"
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
100
:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100
Clearing the Instrument
You can clear the Output Queue and reset the instrument to
accept a new command or query by using the selected Device
Clear (DCL) GPIB function. Refer to your GPIB library
documentation for further details about the selected Device Clear
operation.
Command Entry
Rules
The following rules apply when entering commands:
20
•
You can enter commands in upper or lower case.
•
You can precede any command with white space characters.
White space characters include any combination of the
ASCII control characters 00 through 09 and 0B through 20
hexadecimal (0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
•
The instrument ignores commands consisting of any
combination of white space characters and line feeds.
Abbreviating
You can abbreviate many instrument commands. Each command
in this documentation shows the abbreviations in capitals. For
example, you can enter the command ACQuire:NUMAvg simply
as ACQ:NUMA or acq:numa.
Abbreviation rules may change over time as new instrument
models are introduced. Thus, for the most robust code, use the
full spelling.
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers
included as part of query responses, you can further control
whether the returned headers are abbreviated or are full-length
with the VERBose command.
Concatenating
You can concatenate any combination of set commands and
queries using a semicolon (;). The instrument executes
concatenated commands in the order received.
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow
these rules:
1. Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by
the beginning colon on all commands except the first one.
For example, the commands TRIGger:MODe NORMal and
ACQuire:NUMAVg 10, can be concatenated into the
following single command:
TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
2. If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only
the last mnemonic, you can abbreviate the second command
and eliminate the beginning colon. For example, you can
concatenate the commands ACQuire:MODe ENVelope and
ACQuire:NUMAVg 10 into a single command:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope; NUMAVg 10
The longer version works equally well:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
3. Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*OPC
Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star
command was not there so the commands, ACQuire:MODe
ENVelope;*OPC;NUMAVg 10 will set the acquisition mode
to envelope and set the number of acquisitions for averaging
to 10.
21
When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the
queries are concatenated into a single response message. For
example, if the display background color is white and the
display foreground color is black, the concatenated query
DISplay:COLor:BACKGround?;FOREGround? will return
the following.
If the header is on:
:DISPLAY:COLOR:BACKGROUND
7;:DISPLAY:COLOR:FOREGROUND 0
If the header is off:
7;0
5. Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same
message. For example,
ACQuire:MODe SAMple;NUMAVg?;STATE?
is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample.
The message then queries the number of acquisitions for
averaging and the acquisition state. Concatenated commands
and queries are executed in the order received.
Here are some invalid concatenations:
4.
•
DISPlay:STYle:NORMal;ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
(no colon before ACQuire)
•
DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1 1;:CURSor2 5
(extra colon before CURSor2; use
DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1 1:CURSor2 5 instead)
•
DISPlay:STYle:NORMal;:*OPC
(colon before a star (*) command)
•
DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1 1;COLor:CURSor2 5
(levels of the mnemonics are different; either remove the
second use of COLor or place :DISPlay: in front of
COLor:CURSor2 5)
Terminating
This documentation uses <EOM> (End of message) to represent
a message terminator.
End of Message Terminator
Symbol
Meaning
<EOM>
Message terminator
The end-of-message terminator may be the END message (EOI
asserted concurrently with the last data byte), the ASCII code for
line feed (LF) sent as the last data byte, or both. The instrument
always terminates messages with LF and EOI. It allows white
space before the terminator. For example, it allows CR LF.
22
Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics.
For example, a channel mnemonic can be CH1, CH2, CH3, or
CH4 for four-channel instruments or CH1 or CH2 for twochannel instruments. You use these mnemonics in the command
just as you do any other mnemonic. For example, there is a
CH1:POSition command, and there is also a CH2:POSition
command. In the command descriptions, this list of choices is
abbreviated as CH<x>.
Cursor Position Mnemonics
When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which
cursor of the pair to use.
Cursor Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
CURSOR<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
POSITION<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
HPOS<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
Math Specifier Mnemonics
Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a
mnemonic in the header.
Math Specifier Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
MATH<x>
A math waveform specifier; <x> is 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for twochannel instruments.
Measurement Specifier Mnemonics
Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a
mnemonic in the header. Up to eight automated measurements
may be displayed on a four-channel instrument or four
automated measurements on a two-channel instrument..
Measurement Specifier Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
MEAS<x>
A measurement specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 4 for twochannel instruments.
23
Channel Mnemonics
Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the
header.
Channel Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
CH<x>
A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 4 for fourchannel instruments and 1 through 2 for twochannel instruments.
Reference Waveform Mnemonics
Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a
mnemonic in the header.
R e f e r e n c e W a ve f o r m M n e m o n i c s
Symbol
Meaning
REF<x>
A reference waveform specifier; <x> is 1 through 4
for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for twochannel instruments.
Argument Types
Numeric
Many instrument commands require numeric arguments. The
syntax shows the format that the instrument returns in response
to a query. This is also the preferred format when sending the
command to the instrument though any of the formats will be
accepted. This documentation represents these arguments as
follows:
Numeric Arguments
Symbol
Meaning
<NR1>
Signed integer value
<NR2>
Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3>
Floating point value with an exponent
Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid
setting, either by rounding or truncating, when an invalid number
is input unless otherwise noted in the command description.
24
Quoted String
Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted
string, which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by
a single quote (') or double quote ("). The following is an
example of a quoted string: "This is a quoted string". This
documentation represents these arguments as follows:
Quoted String Argument
Symbol
Meaning
<QString>
Quoted string of ASCII text
A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7-bit
ASCII character set. Follow these rules when you use quoted
strings:
1. Use the same type of quote character to open and close the
string. For example: "this is a valid string".
2. You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you
follow the previous rule. For example, "this is an 'acceptable'
string".
3. You can include a quote character within a string by
repeating the quote. For example: "here is a "" mark".
4. Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
5. If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted
string with the END message before the closing delimiter.
6. A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string
does not terminate the string, but is treated as just another
character in the string.
7. The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a
query is 1000 characters.
Here are some invalid strings:
•
"Invalid string argument' (quotes are not of the same type)
•
"test<EOI>" (termination character is embedded in the
string)
25
Block
Several instrument commands use a block argument form (see
the following table).
Block Arguments
Symbol
Meaning
<NZDig>
A nonzero digit character in the range of 1–9
<Dig>
A digit character, in the range of 0–9
<DChar>
A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00
through FF (0 through 255 decimal)
<Block>
A block of data bytes defined as:
<Block> ::=
{#<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]
|#0[<DChar>...]<terminator>}
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow.
Taken together, the <NZDig> and <Dig> elements form a
decimal integer that specifies how many <DChar> elements
follow.
26
Command Groups
Acquisition Command Group
Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up
the modes and functions that control how the instrument acquires
the signals you input to the channels and processes them into
waveforms.
Using these commands for acquiring waveforms, you can do the
following:
•
Start and stop acquisitions.
•
Control whether each waveform is simply acquired,
averaged, or enveloped over successive acquisitions of that
waveform.
•
Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions.
•
Determine the action the system takes upon completing an
acquisition, such as saving all waveforms and taking a
measurement when the acquisition is stopped.
•
Control acquisition of acquired channel waveforms.
•
Set acquisition parameters.
Command
Description
ACQuire?
ACQuire:MODe
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Returns acquisition parameters
Sets or returns acquisition mode
Returns the number of
acquisitions that have occurred
Sets or returns number of
acquisitions for an averaged
waveform
Sets or returns number of
acquisitions for envelope
waveform
Enables, disables, or returns
state of repetitive signal
acquisition mode
Starts, stops, or returns
acquisition state
Sets or returns whether the
acquisition is continuous or single
sequence
Returns the Fast Acquisition state
Enables, disables, or returns
state of Fast Acquisition mode
ACQuire:NUMAVg
ACQuire:NUMEnv
ACQuire:REPEt
ACQuire:STATE
ACQuire:STOPAfter
FASTAcq?
FASTAcq:STATE
Alias Command Group
Alias commands allow you to define new commands as a
sequence of standard commands. You may find this useful when
27
repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain tasks
like setting up measurements.
Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to
substitute parameters into alias bodies. The alias mechanism
obeys the following rules:
•
The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE 488.2 message
unit, which may not appear in a message preceded by a
colon, comma, or a command or query program header.
•
The alias name may not appear in a message followed by
program date, a colon, comma, or question mark.
•
An alias name must be distinct from any keyword or
keyword short form.
•
An alias name cannot be redefined without first being
deleted using one of the alias deletion functions.
•
Alias names do not appear in response messages.
•
The Alias commands are defined in Tektronix Standard
Codes and Formats. Deviations between that standard and
what is specified here will be considered TDS5000 series
errors unless specifically noted in the command description
in this document.
Command
Description
ALIas
ALIAS:CATalog?
Sets or returns the alias state
Returns a list of the currently
defined alias labels
Assigns a sequence of program
messages to an alias label
Removes a specified alias
Deletes all existing aliases
Removes a specified alias
Sets or returns the alias state
ALIas:DEFIne
ALIas:DELEte
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
ALIas:STATE
28
Calibration Command Group
The calibration commands provide information about the current
state of calibration for the mainframe and all resident sampling
head channels.
Command
*CAL?
CAL?
CALibrate:FACtory
CALibrate:FACtory:AB
Ort
CALibrate:FACtory:CO
NTinue
CALibrate:FACtory:NO
Tify:DUE?
CALibrate:FACtory:NO
Tify:HOURs
CALibrate:FACtory:NO
Tify:YEARs
CALIbrate:FACtory:PRE
Vious
CALibrate:FACtory:STA
Rt
CALibrate:FACtory:STA
Tus?
CALibrate:FACtory:STE
PSTATus?
CALibrate:FACtory:STE
PSTIMulus?
CALibrate:PRObestate:C
H<x>
CALibrate:RESults?
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Description
Instructs the scope to perform
self-calibration
Returns the internal and factory
calibration status and the
calibration due date
Start the factory calibration
Stop the factory calibration
without changing the cal file
Do the next step in the
calibration procedure
Return whether the factory
calibration is due
Set or return the number of hours
until the user is notified that the
instrument is due for factory
calibration
Set or return the number of years
until the user is notified that the
instrument is due for factory
calibration
Backup to the previous
step/group but don’t go until a
CONTINUE command is sent
Start the factory calibration
Return the factory calibration
status
Return the status of the current
calibration step
Return the required stimulus for
this calibration step
Returns the calibration status fo
the attached probe
Returns the status of all
calibration subsystems without
performing an SPC operation
Returns the results of the last
SPC operation
29
Cursor Command Group
Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the
cursor display and readout. You can use these commands to
control the setups for cursor 1 and cursor 2, such as waveform
source, cursor position, and cursor color.
You can also use the commands to select one of the following
cursor functions:
•
Off. Shuts off the display of all cursors.
•
Vertical Bars. Displays vertical bar cursors, which provide
traditional horizontal unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1),
Cursor 2 (bar2), the delta between them, and 1/delta (results
in frequency when the horizontal unit is time).
•
Horizontal Bars. Displays horizontal bar cursors, which
provide traditional vertical unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1),
Cursor 2 (bar2), and the delta between them.
•
Paired Cursors. Displays measurement of horizontal (time)
and vertical (voltage) difference between paired cursors;
voltage at the vertical position of the specified paired cursor;
horizontal position of the specified paired cursor; and
measurement units for the paired cursors.
•
Split Cursors. Displays measurement of horizontal (time)
and vertical (voltage) difference between split cursors;
voltage at the vertical position of the specified split cursor;
horizontal position of the specified split cursor; and
measurement units for the split cursors.
•
Command
CURSor?
CURSor:FUNCtion
CURSor:HBArs?
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
CURSor:MODe
CURSor:PAIred
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?
CURSor PAIred:HPOS<x>?
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>
CURSor:PAIred:UNIts?
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?
30
Description
Returns all cursor settings
Sets or returns cursor type
Returns hbar cursor settings
Returns hbars vertical difference
Sets or returns hbar cursor<x> vertical
position
Returns hbar cursor units
Sets or returns whether cursors move
in unison or separately
Sets or returns active paired cursor
positions
Returns vertical difference between
two paired cursors
Returns the voltage at the vertical
position of the specified paired cursor
Sets or returns the horizontal position
of the specified paired cursor
Returns the units for the paired cursors
Returns the vbar difference between
paired cursors
CURSor:SOUrce
CURSor:SPLit
CURSor:SPLit:HDELTA?
CURSor:SPLit:HPOS<x>?
CURSor:SPLit:POSITION<x>
CURSor:SPLit:SOURCE2
CURSor:SPLit:UNIts
CURSor:SPLit:VDELTA?
CURSor:STATE
CURSor:VBArs
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
Sets or returns the source for cursors
Sets the split cursors positions
Or returns the units, position, and
second source of the split cursors
Returns the vertical difference between
cursors 1 and 2
Returns the vertical position of cursor 1
or 2
Sets or returns the horizontal position
of the vbar markers for cursor 1 or 2
Sets or returns the source waveforms
for split cursor 2
Sets or returns the amplitude units of
the split cursors
Returns the horizontal difference
between cursors 1 and 2
Turns cursors on or off
Or returns their state
Sets or returns the position of the
vertical bar cursor
Returns difference between vbar
cursors
Sets or returns vbar and paired
cursor<x> positions
Returns the units for the vbar cursors
Diagnostics Command Group
The calibration commands provide information about the current
state of calibration for the mainframe and all resident sampling
head channels.
Command
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP
DIAg:EXECUTE
DIAg:ITEM?
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES
?
DIAg:ITEM:NAME?
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?
DIA:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
DIAg:LEVEL
DIAg:LOOPS?
DIAg:NAMe?
Description
Enables or disables halting on
first diagnostic failure
Enables or disables looping of
diagnostics
Executes currently selected set
of diagnostics
Returns all data associated with
a selected menu item
Returns the total number of
failures that occurred
Returns the name of the selected
menu item
Returns the result of the last test
executed on this item
Returns the number of subitems
associated with this item
Sets the current level of
diagnostic test hierarchy
Returns the number of times the
diagnostics were completed
during the last execution
Returns the subsystem name,
dt t
f th
t
31
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
DIAg:NUMITEMS?
DIAg:RESults?
DIAg:RESults:VERBose
?
DIAg:SELect:ALL
DIAg:SELect:AREA
DIAg:SELect:LAST
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
DIAg:SELect:TEST
DIAg:STATE
DIAg:STOP
TEST
TEST:RESults?
TEST:RESults:VERBose
?
TEST:STOP
area and test name of the current
diagnostic test
Returns the selected area of the
current diagnostic test
Returns the subsystem of the
current diagnostic test
Returns the name of the current
diagnostic test
Returns the number of items on
the currently selected level of
test hierarchy
Returns a brief pass or fail status
of the last test execution
Returns a more explanatory
message about the results of the
last diagnostic execution
Selects all available diagnostics
Selects one of the available
diagnostic areas
Sets the last item of a group of
items from the same level of test
hierarchy
Selects one of the available
diagnostic subsystems
Selects one of the available
diagnostic tests
Sets the instrument operating
state
Terminate the execution of
diagnostics
Selects and executes any item at
any level of the test hierarchy
Returns a brief pass or fail status
of the last test execution
Returns a more explanatory
message about the results of the
last test execution
Terminates the execution of the
test
Display Control Command Group
Use the commands in the Display Control Command Group to
change the graticule style, the displayed intensities, and to set the
characteristics of the waveform display.
You can set the following: display of date and time; cursor,
histogram, mask, and measurement readouts; measurement
annotations, and the mode in which waveforms are displayed.
Use the commands to set the style that best displays your
waveforms and graticule display properties. Note that the mode
you choose globally affects all displayed waveforms.
32
Command
Description
DISplay?
DISplay:CLOCk
Returns current display settings
Sets or returns the display of the
date/time stamp
Returns color group settings
Sets or returns the color to be
used for math traces
Sets or returns the palette to be
used for trace display
Sets or returns the color to be
used for reference traces
Sets or returns the type of
interpolation to use for the display
Sets or returns the display format
Sets or returns the type of
graticule that is displayed
Returns the waveform saturation
level, autobright state and
screensaver settings
Sets or returns whether
automatic adjustment of
waveform intensity is enabled
Sets or returns automatic display
protection features
Sets or returns the display
protection timeout state
Sets or returns the intensity
saturation of the waveforms
Sets or returns display
persistence setting
Sets or returns data display style
Sets or returns the display of the
trigger level indicator bar(s)
Sets or returns the persistence
decay time
DISplay:COLOr?
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOR
DISplay:COLOr:PALETTE
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOR
DISplay:FILTer
DISplay:FORMat
DISplay:GRAticule
DISplay:INTENSITy?
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBRIGHT
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
DELAY
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
DISplay:PERSistence
DISplay:STYLE
DISplay:TRIGBar
DISplay:VARPersist
33
File System Command Group
Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help
you use the built-in hard disk drive and floppy disk drive. You
can use the commands to do the following:
•
List the contents of the default directory
•
Create and delete directories
• Create, copy, read, rename, or delete a file
When using these commands, keep the following points in mind:
•
File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes:
"C:\MYDIR\TEK00001.SET"
•
File names follow the MSDOS format:
[DRIVE:][\PATH\]filename
•
Path separators may be either forward slashes (/) or back
slashes (\)
NOTE: Using back slash as a path separator may produce
some unexpected results, depending on how your GPIB
controller application treats escaped characters. Many
applications recognize the sequence of back slash followed
by an alphabetic character as an escaped character, and, as
such, interpret that alphabetic character as a control
character. For example, the sequence "\n" may be interpreted
as a newline character; "\t" may be interpreted as a tab
character. To ensure that this interpretation does not occur,
you can use double back slashes. For example,
"C:\\testfile.txt".
•
Some FILESystem commands may fail because a file has
read-only attributes. You will not be able to delete or replace
such files until this attribute is removed. Refer to the
operating system help on file properties for further
information.
Command
Description
FILESystem?
FILESystem:COPy
FILESystem:CWD
Returns the file system state
Copies one or more files to a new file
Sets or returns the current working directory for
FILESystem GPIB commands.
Deletes a named file or directory
Returns a list of directory contents
Makes a new directory
Prints a named file to the named port
Copies the named file to the GPIB port
Assigns a new name to an existing file
Deletes the named directory
Copies the GPIB port block data to a named
file
FILESystem:DELEte
FILESystem:DIR?
FILESystem:MKDir
FILESystem:PRInt
FILESystem:READFile
FILESystem:REName
FILESystem:RMDir
FILESystem:WRITEFile
34
Hard Copy Command Group
Hard copy commands enable you to make hard copies of data
files or send the data to a specified file. In addition, these
commands provide you with information about (and the ability
to set) file path settings.
Command
Description
HARDCopy
Sends a screen copy to the selected port
Or returns the selected port and file path
Sets or returns the hardcopy file path
Sets or returns whether the data will be sent to a
file or printed on the next hardcopy
HARDCopy:FILEName
HARDCopy:PORT
Histogram Command Group
You must have Option 2A, Advanced Analysis, installed to
access the commands in this group. Histogram commands let
you select the type of histogram, what part of the waveform
should go into the histogram, and histogram statistics. Use
commands from this group to do the following:
•
Create a histogram of vertical or horizontal values for a
channel, math or reference waveform
•
Adjust the limits of the waveform area from which the
histogram data is obtained
•
Clear histogram count and restart
Command
Description
HIStogram?
HIStogram:BOX
Return all histogram parameters
Sets or returns the left, top, right, and bottom
positions of the histogram box, in source
waveform coordinates
Sets or returns same as HIStogram:BOX, but in
percentage coordinates, with 0,0 upper left and
100,100 lower right
Clears histogram count source data and
restarts counting
Sets or returns whether histogram data is
displayed and what display type to use
Returns the current histogram type
Sets the type of histogram to create
Sets type of histogram to create or turns
histograms off
Or returns the current histogram type or that
histogram display is disabled
Sets or returns the width (or height) of the
histogram on the screen in divisions
Sets or returns which source waveform will be
compared against the histogram box when the
histogram testing is enabled
Sets or returns whether histogram calculations
are enabled
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
HIStogram:COUNt
HIStogram:DISplay
HIStogram:FUNCTION?
HIStogram:FUNCtion
HIStogram:MODe
HIStogram:SIZe
HIStogram:SOUrce
HIStogram:STATE
35
Horizontal Command Group
Horizontal commands control the time bases of the instrument.
You can set the time per division (or time per point) of the main
time base. You can use the Horizontal commands to do the
following:
•
Set the scale, horizontal position and reference, and units of
the time base
•
Get the screen resolution, time of first point and time of last
point, or get all the horizontal settings
• Enable or disable the display of the time base
You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal
commands. This provides program compatibility with earlier
models of Tektronix instruments.
Command
Description
HORizontal?
Returns all learnable settings for
the horizontal commands
Returns the number of graticule
divisions over which the waveform
is displayed
Sets or returns FastFrame frame
count
Sets or returns the horizontal
record length to the number of
sample points per frame
Sets or returns the start frame
number on the specified waveform
for the FastFrames’ multiple
frames feature
Sets or returns the multiple frames
mode for the FastFrames’ multiple
frames feature
Sets or returns the number of
frames on the specified waveform
for the FastFrames’ multiple
frames feature
Sets or returns the FastFrame
reference frame number
Sets or returns the FastFrame
Reference waveform source
Sets or returns the FastFrame
Selected frame number on the
specified waveform
Sets or returns the state of the
FastFrame acquisition
Returns the frame number and
time stamp for each frame
between requested frames within
the specified waveform
Returns the relative trigger for the
delta time between the specified
frames
Returns the relative time between
the triggers of the FastFrame
Selected and the FastFrame
Reference, within the specified
f
HORizontal:DIVisions?
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth
HORizontal:FASTframe:
MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart::<:wfm>
<NR1>
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes
:MODE
HORizontal:FASTframe:
MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm>
<NR1>
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:Source
HORizontal:FASTframe:
SELECTED:<wfm>
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp
:All:<wfm>?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
BETWeen:<wfm>?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
DELTa:<wfm>?
36
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
FRAME:<wfm>?
HORizontal:FASTframe:
TIMEStamp:REF?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
SELECTED:<wfm>?
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk
HORizontal:MAIn?
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing
HORizontal:POSition
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
HORizontal:RESOlution
HORizontal:ROLL
HORizontal:SCAle
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
waveform
Returns the absolute trigger date
and time for the specified frame
and waveform.
Returns the absolute trigger date
and time for FastFrame reference
Returns the absolute trigger date
and time for FastFrame Selected,
within the specified waveform
Sets or returns the state of the
FastFrame tracking feature
Returns the time per division of the
main time base
Sets or returns the main time base
position when Horizontal Delay
Mode is turned off
Sets or returns the main time base
trigger delay mode
Sets or returns the main time base
trigger delay time
Sets or returns the waveform
horizontal position on the display
Sets the horizontal sample rate to
the desired number of samples per
second
Or returns the current horizontal
sample rate
Sets time per division for the main
time base
Or returns the main time base
horizontal scale
Sets or returns the units for the
horizontal main time base
Sets or returns the units string for
the horizontal main time base
trigger delay
Sets or returns the waveform's
horizontal position on the display
Sets the horizontal record length to
the number of data points in each
frame
Or returns the current horizontal
record length
Sets the horizontal record length to
the number of data points in each
frame and simultaneously adjusts
the sample rate to maintain a
constant time/division
Or returns the current horizontal
record length
Sets or returns the horizontal roll
mode
Sets or returns the time per
division for the main time base
Sets or returns the position of the
horizontal trigger
Math Command Group
Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and
define math waveforms. You can define and display up to four
math waveforms simultaneously in four-channel instruments and
37
up to two math waveforms in two-channel instrurments. Use the
available math functions to define your math waveform.
The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the
math expression. If you change these sources, the math
waveforms you previously defined will be affected.
Using the standard math functions, you can create simple
waveform expressions, such as Ch 1 + Ch 2, which creates a
math waveform that is the algebraic sum of the signal source of
channel 1 and channel 2. Standard math expressions must fit the
following defined equations:
•
<operand><operation><operand>
where <operand> is one of Ch<x> or Ref<x> and
<operation> is one of +, -, *, or /
•
<operation><operand>
where <operand> is one of Ch<x> or Ref<x> and
<operation> is one of SpectralMag or SpectralPhase
If you have Option 2A, Advanced Analysis, installed in your
instrument, you can create complex expressions consisting of
100 plus characters and comprising many sources, functions, and
operands.
For information about constructing mathematical expressions,
see Creating and Using Math Waveforms in the user manual for
this instrument.
The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons:
You can turn off the channel, stop the waveform (via Run/Stop
from the Horiz/Acq menu), or stop the trigger (via Run/Stop
from the Trig menu). When you turn off the channel, math
continues and data is acquired but not displayed. When you stop
either the waveform or the trigger, the math no longer calculates
but the last math calculation performed is displayed.
When a live waveform update or reference waveform is altered,
math waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also
updated to reflect the changes. Also, sources must exist but do
not need to be displayed to be used in and to update math
waveforms.
Command
Description
MATH<x>?
MATH<x>:DEFine
Returns the specified math waveform settings
Sets or returns the math<x> waveform
definition for the specified waveform
Sets or returns the label string used for
annotating the displayed math waveform
Sets or returns the X screen offset where the
math waveform label is displayed
Sets or returns the Y screen offset where the
math waveform label is displayed
Sets or returns the acquisition number at
which the averaging algorithm will begin
exponential averaging
Returns the specified math waveform spectral
setups
MATH<x>:LABEL:NAMe
MATH<x>:LABEL:XPOS
MATH<x>:LABEL:YPOS
MATH<x>:NUMavg
MATH<x>:SPECTral?
38
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVEL
MATH<x>:SPECTral
REFLEVELOffset
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
setups
Sets or returns the center frequency of the
spectral analyzer output data span
Sets or returns the position of the center of
the gate
Sets or returns the gate width input to the
spectral analyzer
Sets or returns the state of the spectral
locking for the specified math waveform
Sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag
function in the specified math string
Sets or returns the units of the SpectralPhase
function in the specified math string
Sets or returns the vertical position of the
output data from the spectral analyzer
Sets or returns the spectral reference level
offset used for calculating the dB value
Sets or returns the resolution bandwidth of the
spectral analyzer
Sets the top of the span to a value that is
closest to the specified value
Or returns the specified math waveform's
current span value
Sets or returns the phase suppression
threshold
Enables, disables, or returns the state of the
phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output
data
Sets or returns the window function used to
multiply the input data to the spectral analyzer
Sets or returns the specified math waveform
vertical position
Sets or returns the specified math waveform
vertical scale (per div)
Measurement Command Group
Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to
control the automated measurement system.
Up to eight automated measurements can be displayed on the
screen. In the commands, these measurement readouts are named
MEAS<x>, where <x> can be 1 through 8.
In addition to the eight displayed measurements, the
measurement commands let you specify an additional
measurement, IMMed. The immediate measurement has no
front-panel equivalent. Immediate measurements are never
displayed. Because they are computed only when needed,
immediate measurements slow the waveform update rate less
than displayed measurements.
Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements, use the
VALue? query to obtain measurement results.
Measurement commands can set and query measurement
parameters. You can assign some parameters, such as waveform
sources, differently for each measurement. Other parameters,
such as reference levels, have only one value, which applies to
all measurements.
39
Command
Description
MEASUrement?
Returns all measurement
parameters
Sets or returns the
measurement gating
Returns all immediate
measurement setup parameters
Returns information about the
immediate delay measurement
Sets or returns the search
direction to use for immediate
delay measurements
Sets or returns the slope of the
edge used for immediate delay
"from" waveform measurements
Sets or returns the slope of the
edge used for immediate delay
"to" waveform measurements
Sets or returns the "from"
source for all single channel
immediate measurements
Sets or returns the source to
measure “to” for phase or delay
immediate measurements
Sets or returns the type of the
immediate measurement
Returns the units of the
immediate measurement
Returns the value of the
immediate measurement
Returns the number of values
accumulated since the last
statistical reset
Returns the maximum value
found since the last statistical
reset
Returns the mean value
accumulated since the last
statistical reset
Returns the minimum value
found since the last statistical
reset
Returns the standard deviation
of values accumulated since the
last statistical reset
Returns all measurement
parameters for the displayed
measurement
Returns the delay measurement
parameters for specified
measurement
Sets or returns the search
direction to use for delay
measurements
Sets or returns the slope of the
edge to use for delay "from"
waveform measurements
Sets or returns the slope of the
edge to use for delay "to"
waveform measurements
Sets or returns the channel from
which measurements are taken
Sets or returns the source to
measure “to” for phase or delay
measurements
MEASUrement:GATING
MEASUrement:IMMed?
MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay?
MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay:DIREction
MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay:EDGE[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay:EDGE2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
40
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
MEASUrement:METHod
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METhod
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
Sets or returns whether the
specified measurement slot is
computed and displayed
Sets or returns the
measurement<x> type
Returns measurement<x> units
Returns the value of
measurement<x>
Sets or returns the method used
for calculating reference levels
Returns reference level
parameters
Sets or returns the top
reference level for rise time
Sets or returns the low
reference level for rise time
Sets or returns the mid
reference level for
measurements
Sets or returns the mid
reference level for delay "to"
measurements
Sets or returns the method for
assigning high and low
reference levels
Sets or returns the top
reference percent level for rise
time
Sets or returns the low
reference percent level for rise
time
Sets or returns the mid
reference percent level for
waveform measurements
Sets or returns the mid
reference percent level for
second waveform
measurements
Clears existing measurement
statistics from memory
Turns management statistics on
or off and sets which pair of
statistical accumulations is
displayed
Or returns which pair of
statistical accumulations is
displayed
Sets or returns the 'time
constant' for mean and standard
deviation statistical
accumulations
Miscellaneous Command Group
Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories.
Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2-1987
devices on the GPIB bus. The 488.2-1987 standard defines these
commands. The common commands begin with an asterisk (*)
character.
Command
Description
*DDT
Sets or returns the commands that will be executed by
the group execute trigger
41
*IDN?
*LRN?
*TRG
*TST?
AUTOSet
AUXout?
AUXout:SOUrce
BELI
CMDBatch
DATe
HDR
HEADer
ID?
LOCK
NEWpass
PASSWord
REM
ROSc:SOUrce
ROSc:STate?
SET?
TEKSecure
TIMe
UNLock
VERBose
the group execute trigger
Returns the instrument identification code
Returns a listing of instrument settings
Performs the group execute trigger (GET)
Tests the GPIB interface and returns status
Sets the vertical, horizontal and trigger controls to
provide a stable display of the selected waveform
Returns the auxiliary out setup
Sets or returns the trigger source at the BNC
connection
In previous TDS models, this command sounded the
audio indicator. Provided for backward compatibility.
Turns command batching on or off
Or returns the state of command batching
Sets or returns the date that the instrument can
display
Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State
Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State
Returns identifying information about the instrument
and its firmware
Sets or returns the front panel lock state
Changes the password for user protected data
Provides access for changing user protected data
Specifies a comment, which is ignored by the
instrument
Sets or returns the source for the 10 MHz timebase
Returns the state of the 10 MHz timebase
Returns a listing of instrument settings
Initializes both waveform and setup memories
Sets or returns the time displayed by the instrument
Unlocks front panel
Sets or returns verbose state
Save and Recall Command Group
Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to
store and retrieve internal waveforms and settings. When you
save a setup, you save all the settings of the instrument. When
you recall a setup, the instrument restores itself to the state that it
was in when you originally saved that setting.
Command
Description
*RCL
Restores the state of the instrument from
a copy of the setting stored in memory
Stores the current instrument state to a
specified memory location
Changes the specified setup to reference
the factory setup instead of the user setup
Removes stored setups from memory and
initializes the location with the factory
default setups
Deletes (one or all of) the stored
reference waveforms from memory
Resets the instrument to factory default
settings
Recalls saved instrument settings
*SAV
*SDS
DELEte:SETUp
DELEte:WAVEform
FACtory
RECAll:SETup
42
RECAll:WAVEform
SAVe:SETup
SAVe:WAVEform
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
SETUp:NAMe
Recalls a stored waveform to a reference
location
Saves the current front-panel setup to a
specified memory location or file
Saves a waveform to one of four
reference memory locations or a mass
storage file
Sets or returns the format for saved
waveforms
Sets or returns the user-defined setup
label
Status and Error Command Group
Use the commands in the Status and Error command Group to
determine the status of the instrument and control events.
Several commands and queries used with the instrument are
common to all devices on the GPIB bus. The IEEE Std 488.21987 defines these commands and queries. The common
commands begin with an asterisk (*) character.
Command
Description
*CLS
*ESE
Clears status
Sets or returns the bits in the Event Status Enable
Register
Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status
Register
Generates the operation complete message in the
standard event status register when all pending
operations are finished
Or returns “1 when all current operations are finished
Returns a list of options installed in the instrument
Sets or returns the power on status flag
Sets or returns a string of protected user data
Resets the instrument to factory default settings
Sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable
Register
Returns the contents of the Status Byte Register
Prevents the instrument from executing further
commands until all pending operations finish
Returns all events and their messages
Returns instrument status
Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status
Enable Register
Returns event code from the event queue
Returns event code, message from the event queue
Return number of events in the event queue
*ESR?
*OPC
*OPT?
*PSC
*PUD
*RST
*SRE
*STB?
*WAI
ALLEv?
BUSY?
DESE
EVENT?
EVMsg?
EVQty?
Trigger Command Group
Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all
aspects of triggering for the instrument.
There are two triggers: A and B. Where appropriate, the
command set has parallel constructions for each trigger.
43
You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering
lets you display a waveform at or near the point where the signal
passes through a voltage level of your choosing.
You can also set A triggers to pulse, logic or video modes. With
pulse triggering, the instrument triggers whenever it detects a
pulse of a certain width or height. Logic triggering lets you
logically combine the signals on one or more channels. The
instrument then triggers when it detects a certain combination of
signal levels. Video triggering enables you to trigger on the most
common Standard Definition, High Definition, and custom video
standards. You can trigger on all fields, all lines, or individual
video lines.
Command
Description
TRIGger
Forces a trigger event to
occur
Or returns current trigger
parameters for the instrument
Sets A trigger level to 50%
Or returns current A trigger
parameters
Returns the source, coupling
and source for the A edge
trigger
Sets or returns the type of
coupling for the A edge
trigger
Sets or returns the slope for
the A edge trigger
Sets or returns the source for
the A edge trigger
Returns the A trigger holdoff
parameters
Returns the holdoff time
actually used by the A trigger
Sets or returns the type of
holdoff for the A trigger
Sets or returns the A trigger
holdoff time
Sets or returns the level for
the A trigger
Returns all of the A trigger
logic parameters
Sets or returns the type of A
trigger logic
Sets or returns the logical
combination of the input
channels for the A logic
trigger
Returns the A logic trigger
input for channels 1-3.
Specifies or returns the input
settings for the specified logic
trigger channel
Returns the conditions for
generating an A logic pattern
trigger
Sets or returns the A logic
trigger input for channel 2
Sets or returns the A logic
trigger input for channel 4
TRIGger:A
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
TRIGger:A:LEVel
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
44
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
:LEssLimit
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
:MORELimit?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
:MORELimit
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk
:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk
:THReshold
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa
:THReshold
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:MODe
trigger input for channel 4
Sets or returns the condition
for generating the A logic
pattern trigger
Sets or returns the maximum
time that the selected pattern
may be true and still
generate an A logic pattern
trigger
Returns the minimum time
that the selected pattern may
be true and still generate an
A logic pattern trigger
Sets the minimum time that
the selected pattern may be
true and still generate an A
logic pattern trigger
Returns clock edge polarity,
voltage threshold and source;
data voltage threshold and
source; and setup/hold times
for violation triggering
Returns clock edge polarity,
voltage threshold and source
input for setup/hold triggering
Sets or returns the clock
edge polarity for setup and
hold triggering
Sets or returns the clock
source for the A logic trigger
setup and hold input
Sets or returns the clock
voltage threshold for setup
and hold trigger
Returns the voltage threshold
and data source for the
setup/hold trigger
Sets or returns the data
source for the setup and hold
trigger
Sets or returns the data
voltage threshold for setup
and hold trigger
Sets or returns the hold time
for the setup and hold
violation triggering
Sets or returns the setup time
for setup and hold violation
triggering
Returns the data input and
trigger criteria for the A logic
trigger
Sets or returns the slope for
channel 2 of the A logic state
trigger
Sets or returns the slope for
channel 4 of the A logic state
trigger
Sets or returns the condition
for generating an A logic
state trigger
Returns the threshold voltage
for all channels in A logic
trigger
Sets or returns the A logic
trigger threshold voltage for
the specified channel
Sets or returns the A trigger
mode
45
TRIGger:A:PULse?
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT?
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc?
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut?
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut
:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold
:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOURce
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DeltaTime
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity
46
Returns the A pulse trigger
parameters
Sets or returns the type of
pulse on which to trigger
Returns the current A glitch
pulse trigger parameters
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse glitch trigger
Sets or returns the
acceptance or rejection of
pulse glitch trigger, based on
width.
Sets or returns the width of
the A pulse glitch trigger
Returns the current A runt
pulse trigger parameters
Returns the current A runt
pulse trigger logic
parameters
Returns the current A runt
pulse trigger logic input
parameters
Sets or returns the input
setting for the logic condition
with runt for channel 1
through channel 4
Sets or returns logic
threshold channels with runt
for channel 1 through
channel 4
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse runt trigger
Returns the upper and lower
thresholds for the A pulse
runt trigger
Sets the upper and lower
switching thresholds for the A
pulse runt trigger
Sets or returns the upper limit
for the A pulse runt trigger
Sets or returns the lower limit
for the A pulse runt trigger
Sets or returns the type of
pulse width the trigger
checks for when it uncovers
a runt
Sets or returns the minimum
width for A pulse runt trigger
Sets or returns the source for
the A pulse trigger
Returns the parameters for
the A pulse timeout trigger
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse timeout trigger
Sets or returns the pulse
timeout trigger time
Returns the delta time,
polarity, and both upper and
lower threshold limits for the
transition time trigger
Sets or returns the delta time
used in calculating the
transition value
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse transition
trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
TRIGger:A:PULse;TRANsition:THReshold
:BOTh
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold
:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold
:LOW
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow?
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut?
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut
:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc
:THReshold:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:Threshold?
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:
:THReshold:BOTh
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:
:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:
:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDth
TRIGger:A:TYPe
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
Returns the upper and lower
threshold limits for the
transition time trigger
Sets the upper and lower
thresholds for the pulse
transition trigger
Sets or returns the upper
transition trigger threshold
Sets or returns the lower
transition trigger threshold
Sets or returns the
relationship of delta time to
transitioning signal
Returns the trigger A pulse
width parameters
Sets or returns the upper limit
for the A pulse width trigger
Sets or returns the lower limit
for the A pulse width trigger
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse width trigger
Sets or returns the criteria for
width specification of pulse
width trigger events
Returns the current A window
pulse trigger parameters
Returns the current A window
pulse trigger logic
parameters
Returns the current A window
pulse trigger logic input
parameters
Sets or returns input setting
for logic condition with
window for channel 1 through
channel 4
Sets or returns logic
threshold channels with
widow for channel 1 through
channel 4
Returns the upper and lower
thresholds for the A pulse
window trigger.
Sets both window thresholds
Sets or returns high window
threshold
Sets or returns low window
threshold
Sets or returns type of
window trigger
Sets or returns condition for
use of window violation
Sets or returns minimum
width of violation
Sets or returns the type of A
trigger
Returns the video
parameters for the A trigger
Returns the custom video
parameters for the A trigger
Sets or returns the video
scan format when the video
standard is set to Custom
Sets or returns the video
scan rate
47
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLDOff:FIELD
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOURCE
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
TRIGger:B?
TRIGger:B
TRIGger:B:BY
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
TRIGger:B:LEVel
TRIGger:B:STATE
TRIGger:B:TIMe
TRIGger:B:TYPe
TRIGger:STATE?
Sets or returns the video field
trigger
Sets or returns the trigger
holdoff in video field units
Sets or returns the trigger
delay as a number of video
lines
Sets or returns the polarity of
the video trigger
Sets or returns the video
scan rate
Sets or returns the video
trigger source
Sets or returns the video
standard
Returns the B trigger
parameters
Sets the B trigger level to
50%
Or returns the B trigger
parameters
Sets or returns B trigger time
or event qualifiers
Returns B trigger edge type
parameters
Sets or returns the type of B
trigger coupling
Sets or returns the B edge
trigger slope
Sets or returns the B edge
trigger source
Returns the current B trigger
events parameter
Sets or returns the number of
events that must occur
before the B trigger occurs
Sets or returns the level for
the B trigger
Sets or returns the state of
the B trigger
Sets or returns the B trigger
delay time
Sets or returns the type of B
trigger
Returns the current state of
the triggering system
Vertical Command Group
Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control
the vertical setup of all live (channel) waveforms for acquisition
and to control the display of channel, reference, and math
waveforms. This group contains commands to set up vertical
parameters for electrical or optical signals, depending on the
sampling module in use.
The SELect:<wfm> command also selects the waveform that
many commands in other command groups use.
48
You may replace VOLts with SCAle in the vertical commands.
This provides program compatibility with earlier models of
Tektronix instruments.
Command
Description
CH<x>?
Returns vertical parameters for the
specified channel
Sets or returns the bandwidth of the
specified channel
Sets or returns the coupling for the
specified channel
Sets or returns the deskew time for the
specified channel
Sets or returns the invert function for the
specified channel to on or off.
Defines or returns the label for the
channel waveform
Sets or returns the X display coordinate
for the channel waveform label
Sets or returns the Y display coordinate
for the channel waveform label
Sets or returns the channel offset
Sets or returns the channel vertical
position
Returns the gain, resistance, units, and
ID of the probe that is attached to the
specified channel
Returns the probe calibration status
Returns the gain of the probe that is
attached to the specified channel
Returns the type and serial number of
the probe that is attached to the
specified channel
Returns the type of probe that is
attached to the specified channel
Returns the serial number of the probe
that is attached to the specified channel
Returns the resistance of the probe that
is attached to the specified channel
Returns the units of the probe that is
attached to the specified channel
Sets the attenuation value for the
specified channel to the specified scale
factor
Or returns the user-specified attenuation
Sets the attenuation value for the
specified channel to the specified value,
in decibels
Or returns the user-specified
attenuation, in decibels
Sets the unit of measurement for the
external attenuator of the specified
channel
Or returns the user-specified unit of
measurement for the external attenuator
Sets or returns the vertical scale of the
specified channel
Sets channel input termination
Sets or returns the vertical position for
math display
Sets or returns the vertical scale (per
div) for math display
CH<x>:BANdwidth
CH<x>:COUPling
CH<x>:DESKew
CH<x>:INVERT
CH<x>:LABEL:NAMe
CH<x>:LABEL:XPOS
CH<x>:LABEL:YPOS
CH<x>:OFFSet
CH<x>:POSition
CH<x>:PRObe?
CH<x>:PROBECal?
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
CH<x>:PRObe:UNITS?
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTatten
CH<x>PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten
CH<x>PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
CH<x>:SCAle
CH<x>:TERmination
MATH<x>:POSition
MATH<x>:SCAle
49
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition
REF<x>:LABel?
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
SELect?
SELect<wfm>
SELect:CONTRol?
SELect:CONTRol <wfm>
div) for math display
Sets or returns the horizontal position of
the specified reference waveform in
percent of the waveform that is
displayed to the right of the center
vertical graticule
Returns a branch query containing the
waveform label name and the
coordinates at which the label is
displayed
Sets or returns the label of the
designated waveform
Sets or returns the position of the
reference waveform label on the X axis
Sets or returns the position of the
reference waveform label on the Y axis
Sets or returns the vertical position of
the specified reference waveform
Sets or returns the reference waveform
vertical scale in vertical units/div
Returns information on which
waveforms are on or off and which
waveform is selected.
Turns on the specified waveform
Or returns whether the specified channel
is on or off
Returns the waveform and timebase
selected for front-panel control
Sets the waveform controlled by the
front panel
Waveform Transfer Command Group
Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group
to transfer waveform data points to and from the instrument.
Waveform data points are a collection of values that define a
waveform. One data value usually represents one data point in
the waveform record. When working with envelope waveforms,
each data value is either the minimum or maximum of a
min/max pair.
Before you transfer waveform data, you must specify the data
format, record length, and waveform source.
Data Formats
Acquired waveform data uses eight or more bits to represent
each data point. The number of bits used depends on the
acquisition mode specified when you acquired the data. Data
acquired in SAMple or ENVelope mode uses eight bits per
waveform data point. Data acquired in AVERage mode uses up
to 14 bits per point.
The instrument can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or
binary format. You specify the format with the DATa:ENCdg
command. The instrument uses signed, 4 byte integers and
floating point values; it does not support unsigned floating point
values.
50
ASCII data is represented by signed integer or floating point
values. An example ASCII waveform data string may look like
this:
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,
-109,-107,-106,-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,-80
Use ASCII to obtain more readable and easier to format output
than binary. However, ASCII may require more bytes to send the
same values than it does with binary. This may reduce
transmission speeds.
Binary data can be represented by signed integer or floating
point values. The range of the values depends on the byte width
specified. When the byte width is one, signed integer data ranges
from -128 to 127, and positive integer values range from 0 to
255. When the byte width is two, the values range from -32768
to 32767. When a MATH (or REF that came with a MATH) is
used, 32 bit floating point values are used that are four bytes in
width.
The defined binary formats specify the order in which the bytes
are transferred. The following are the four binary formats:
•
RIBinary specifies signed integer data-point representation
with the most significant byte transferred first.
•
SRIBinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order
is swapped, meaning that the least significant byte is
transferred first. This format is useful when transferring data
to PCs.
•
RFBinary specifies floating point data-point representation
with the most significant byte transferred first.
•
SRFBinary is the same as RFBinary except that the byte
order is swapped, meaning that the least significant byte is
transferred first. This format is useful when transferring data
to PCs.
Waveform Data and Record Lengths
You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You
can transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer the
entire record. You can use the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP
commands to specify the first and last data points of the
waveform record.
When transferring data into the instrument, you must first
specify the record length of the destination waveform record.
You do this with the WFMInopre:NR_Pt command. Next,
specify the first data point within the waveform record. For
example, when you set DATa:STARt to 1, data points will be
stored starting with the first point in the record. The instrument
will ignore the value set by DATa:STOP when reading in data. It
will stop reading data when there is no more data to read or
when it has reached the specified record length.
51
When transferring data from the instrument, you must specify
the first and last data points in the waveform record. Setting
DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to the record length will
always return the entire waveform.
Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation
The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the waveform source
when transferring a waveform from the instrument. You can only
transfer one waveform at a time. Waveforms sent to the
instrument are always stored in one of the four reference
memory locations. Use the DATa:DESTination command to
specify a reference memory location.
Waveform Preamble
Each waveform that you transfer has an associated waveform
preamble that contains information such as the horizontal scale,
the vertical scale, and other settings in effect when the waveform
was created. Refer to the individual WFMInpre and WFMOutpre
commands for more information.
Scaling Waveform Data
Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can
convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using
information from the waveform preamble.
Transferring Waveform Data from the Instrument
You can transfer waveforms from the instrument to an external
controller using the following sequence:
1. Select the waveform source(s) using DATa:SOUrce.
2. Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
3. Specify the number of bytes per data point using
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr.
Note: MATH waveforms (and REF waveforms that came
from a MATH) are always set to four bytes.
4. Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to
transfer using DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.
5. Transfer waveform preamble information using
WFMOutpre?.
6. Transfer waveform data from the instrument using CURVe?.
Transferring Waveform Data to the Instrument
Specify waveform reference memory using
DATa:DESTination.
2. Set WFMInpre:NR_Pt to equal the number of data points to
be sent.
3. Specify the waveform data format using WFMInpre:ENCdg.
4. Specify the number of bytes per data point using
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr.
1.
52
Specify first data point in the waveform record using
DATa:STARt.
6. Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMInpre.
Note: FastAcq waveforms cannot be returned to the instrument
via the CURVe command.
5.
Command
Description
CURVe
The command format transfers waveform
data to the instrument (reference memory
location specified by DATa:DESTination)
The query format transfers waveform data
from instrument specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command
Sets the format and location of the waveform
data that is transferred with the CURVe?
Command
Or returns the format and location of the
waveform data that is transferred with the
CURVe? command
Sets or returns the reference memory location
for storing waveform data sent to the
instrument
Sets or returns the format of outgoing
waveform data
Sets or returns the location of waveform data
transferred from the instrument
Sets or returns the starting point in waveform
transfer
Sets or returns the ending data point in
waveform transfer
Returns a branch query containing waveform
data in either binary or ASCII format,
waveform formatting data, and the location of
the waveform data source
Returns the waveform formatting specification
to be applied to the next incoming CURVE
command data
Sets or returns the number of bits per binary
waveform point
Sets or returns the format of binary data for
the incoming waveform
Sets or returns the binary field data width for
the first ordered waveform
Sets or returns the byte order of waveform
points
Sets or returns the type of encoding for
incoming waveform data
Returns one frame, indicating the number of
frames in the transmitted waveform record
Returns the number of points in the
transmitted waveform record
Sets the number of points in the transmitted
waveform record
Sets or returns the point format of incoming
waveform data
Sets or returns the trigger point within the
incoming waveform data
Provided to allow a waveform extracted from
the instrument to be more easily sent back
Returns the horizontal sampling interval
between incoming waveform points
Sets the horizontal sampling interval between
incoming waveform points
DATa
DATa:DESTination
DATa:ENCdg
DATa:SOUrce
DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
WAVFrm?
WFMInpre?
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
WFMInpre:ENCdg
WFMInpre:NR_FR?
WFMInpre:NR_Pt?
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
WFMinpre:PT_OFF
WFMinpre:WFID
WFMInpre:XINcr?
WFMInpre:XINcr
53
WFMInpre:XUNit
WFMInpre:XZEro
WFMInpre:YMUlt
WFMInpre:YOFf
WFMInpre:YUNit
WFMInpre:YZEro
WFMOutpre?
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
WFMOutpre:PT_OFF?
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
WFMOutpre:WFId?
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
WFMpre:NR_FR?
54
incoming waveform points
Sets or returns the horizontal units of the
incoming waveform
Sets or returns the (sub-sample) time
between the trigger sample and the
occurrence of the actual incoming waveform
trigger
Sets or returns the vertical scale factor, per
digitizing level, of the incoming waveform
points
Sets or returns the vertical position of the
incoming waveform in digitizing levels
Sets or returns the vertical units of the
incoming waveform
Sets or returns the offset of the incoming
waveform
Returns the waveform formatting data for the
waveform specified by the DATA:SOURCE
command
Sets or returns the number of bits per
waveform point that outgoing waveforms
contain
Sets or returns the format of binary data for
the waveform
Sets or returns the data width for the
waveform
Sets or returns the byte order of waveform
points
Sets or returns the type of encoding for
outgoing waveforms
Returns the number of frames for the
DATa:SOUrce waveform transmitted in
response to a CURVe? query
Returns the number of points for the
waveform transmitted in response to a
CURVe? query
Returns the point format for the waveform
Returns the trigger point relative to
DATA:START for the waveform
Returns whether the source waveform is DPO
Returns a string describing the acquisition
parameters for the waveform
Returns the horizontal sampling interval
Returns the horizontal units for the waveform
Returns the (sub-sample) time between the
trigger sample and the occurrence of the
actual waveform trigger
Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing
level for the waveform
Returns the vertical offset in digitizing levels
for the waveform
Returns the vertical units for the waveform
Returns the vertical offset for the waveform
Returns the number of frames for the
waveform transmitted in response to a
CURVe? query
Zoom Command Group
Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform
display horizontally and vertically without changing the time
base or vertical settings.
Command
Description
ZOOm
Sets the zoom transforms to default
values for either live traces or all
traces
Or returns the current vertical and
horizontal positioning and scaling of
the display
Sets or returns the sizes of the
acquisition and zoom windows when
Zoom is selected.
Sets or returns the waveforms that
the horizontal zoom parameters
affect
Turns zoom mode on or off
Or returns the current zoom mode
Sets or returns the zoom horizontal
position of the specified waveform
Sets or returns the zoom horizontal
scale factor of the specified
waveform
Sets or returns the zoom vertical
position of the specified waveform
Sets or returns the zoom vertical
scale of the specified waveform
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT
ZOOm:HORIzontal:LOCK
ZOOm:MODE
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORIzontal:POSition
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORIzontal:SCAle
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle
55
Status and Events
The instrument provides a status and event reporting system for
the GPIB interfaces. This system informs you of certain
significant events that occur within the instrument.
The instrument status handling system consists of five 8-bit
registers and two queues for each interface. The remaining Status
subtopics describe these registers and components. They also
explain how the event handling system operates.
Registers
Overview
The registers in the event handling system fall into two
functional groups:
•
Status Registers contain information about the status of the
instrument. They include the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR).
•
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events
are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue.
They include the Device Event Status Enable Register
(DESER), the Event Status Enable Register (ESER), and the
Service Request Enable Register (SRER).
Status
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte
Register (SBR) record certain types of events that may occur
while the instrument is in use. IEEE Std 488.2-1987 defines
these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event,
such as an execution error or message available. When an event
of a given type occurs, the instrument sets the bit that represents
that type of event to a value of one. (You can disable bits so that
they ignore events and remain at zero. See Enable Registers).
Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have
occurred.
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) - The SESR
records eight types of events that can occur within the
instrument. Use the *ESR? query to read the SESR register.
Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the
register can accumulate information about new events.
Note: TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of
several events, including some front panel actions.
56
S t a n d a r d E ve n t S t a t u s R e g i s t e r ( S E S R )
7
PON
6
URQ
5
CME
4
EXE
3
DDE
2
QYE
1
RQC
0
OPC
SESR Bi t Funct i ons
Bi t
Funct i on
7
(MSB)
PON
Power On. Shows that the oscilloscope
was powered on. On completion, the
diagnostic tests also set this bit.
6
URQ
User Request. Indicates that an
application event has occurred. *See
note.
5
CME
Command Error. Shows that an error
occurred while the oscilloscope was
parsing a command or query.
4
EXE
Execution Error. Shows that an error
occurred while the oscilloscope was
executing a command or query.
3
DDE
Device Error. Shows that a device error
occurred.
2
QYE
Query Error. Shows that either an attempt
was made to read the Output Queue
when no data was present or pending, or
that data in the Output Queue was lost.
1
RQC
Request Control. This is not used.
0
(LSB)
OPC
Operation Complete. Shows that the
operation is complete. This bit is set when
all pending operations complete following
an *OPC command.
The Status Byte Register (SBR) - Records whether output is
available in the Output Queue, whether the instrument requests
service, and whether the SESR has recorded any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the
SBR. The bits in the SBR are set and cleared depending on the
contents of the SESR, the Event Status Enable Register (ESER),
and the Output Queue. When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the
SBR, bit 6 is the RQS bit. When you use the *STB? query to
obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS bit. Reading the SBR does not
clear the bits.
S t a t u s B yt e R e g i s t e r ( S B R )
7
----
6
RQS
6
MSS
5
ESB
4
MAV
3
----
2
----
1
----
0
----
57
SBR Bit Functions
Bit
Function
7 (MSB)
-------
Not used.
6
RQS
Request Service. Obtained from a serial
poll. Shows that the oscilloscope
requests service from the GPIB
controller.
6
MSS
Master Status Summary. Obtained from
*STB? query. Summarizes the ESB and
MAV bits in the SBR.
5
ESB
Event Status Bit. Shows that status is
enabled and present in the SESR.
4
MAV
Message Available. Shows that output is
available in the Output Queue.
3
-------
Not used.
2
-------
Not used.
1–0
-------
Not used.
Enable
DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are
reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each
Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register (the DESER
also acts as a filter to the Event Queue) and can prevent
information from being recorded in the register or queue.
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status
Register it controls. In order for an event to be reported to a bit
in the Status Register, the corresponding bit in the Enable
Register must be set to one. If the bit in the Enable Register is set
to zero, the event is not recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The
Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are
described below.
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) - This
register controls which types of events are reported to the SESR
and the Event Queue. The bits in the DESER correspond to those
in the SESR.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the
DESER. Use the DESE? query to read the DESER.
D e vi c e E v e n t S t a t u s E n a b l e R e g i s t e r ( D E S E R )
7
PON
6
URQ
5
CME
4
EXE
3
DDE
2
QYE
1
RQC
0
OPC
The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) - This register
controls which types of events are summarized by the Event
Status Bit (ESB) in the SBR. Use the *ESE command to set the
bits in the ESER. Use the *ESE? query to read it.
58
E ve n t S t a t u s E n a b l e R e g i s t e r ( E S E R )
7
PON
6
URQ
5
CME
4
EXE
3
DDE
2
QYE
1
RQC
0
OPC
The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) - This register
controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and
are summarized by the Master Status Summary (MSS) bit.
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query
to read the register. The RQS bit remains set to one until either
the Status Byte Register is read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit
changes back to a zero.
S e r vi c e R e q u e s t E n a b l e R e g i s t e r ( S R E R )
7
------
6
------
5
ESB
4
MAV
3
------
2
------
1
------
0
------
*PSC Command
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at
power-on. Sending *PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on
as follows:
•
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
•
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
• SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values
in nonvolatile memory through a power cycle.
Note: To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a
Service Request, send *PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE
commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER, and use the
*SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER. Subsequent poweron cycles will generate a Service Request.
59
Queues
Overview
The instrument status and event reporting system contains two
queues: the Output Queue and the Event Queue.
Output Queue
The instrument stores query responses in the Output Queue and
empties this queue each time it receives a new command or
query message after an <EOM>. The controller must read a
query response before it sends the next command (or query) or it
will lose responses to earlier queries.
Caution: When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a
second query, the instrument normally clears the first response
and outputs the second while reporting a Query Error (QYE bit
in the ESER) to indicate the lost response. A fast controller,
however, may receive a part or all of the first response as well.
To avoid this situation, the controller should always read the
response immediately after sending any terminated query
message or send a DCL (Device Clear) before sending the
second query.
Event Queue
The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events.
If more than 32 events stack up in the Event Queue, the 32nd
event is replaced by event code 350, "Queue Overflow."
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns
only the event number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns
the event number and a text description of the event), or with the
ALLEV? query (which returns all the event numbers along with
a description of the event). Reading an event removes it from the
queue.
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the
*ESR? query to read the summary of the event from the SESR.
This makes the events summarized by the *ESR? read available
to the EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by
previous *ESR? reads but not read from the Event Queue.
Events that follow an *ESR? read are put in the Event Queue but
are not available until *ESR? is used again.
60
Event Handling Sequence
The figure below shows how to use the status and event handling
system. In the explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses
refer to numbers in the figure.
When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that
type of event is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that
event type is set to 1), the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to
one, and the event is recorded in the Event Queue (2). If the
corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled (3), then the ESB
bit in the SBR is set to one (4).
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the
SBR is set to one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in
the SRER is enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one
and a service request is generated (7).
61
Synchronization Methods
Overview
Although most GPIB commands are completed almost
immediately after being received by the instrument, some
commands start a process that requires more time. For example,
once a single sequence acquisition command is executed,
depending upon the applied signals and trigger settings, it may
be a few seconds before the acquisition is complete. Rather than
remain idle while the operation is in process, the instrument will
continue processing other commands. This means that some
operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent.
Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an
earlier operation. A first operation must complete before the next
one gets processed. The instrument status and event reporting
system provides ways to do this.
For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a
single-sequence waveform and then taking a measurement on the
acquired waveform. You could use the following command
sequence to do this:
/** Set up conditional acquisition **/
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/** Acquire waveform data **/
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/** Set up the measurement parameters **/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT: IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/** Take amplitude measurement **/
MEASUREMENT: MEAS1:VALUE?
The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing
time. It may not finish before the instrument takes an amplitude
measurement (see the following figure). This can result in an
incorrect amplitude value.
62
To ensure the instrument completes waveform acquisition before
taking the measurement on the acquired data, you can
synchronize the program.
You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the
instrument with your application program: *WAI, BUSY?,
*OPC, and *OPC?
*WAI
The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands
that generate an OPC message. No commands after the *WAI
are processed before the OPC message(s) are generated
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for
synchronization looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement*/
*/
*WAI
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
63
The controller can continue to write commands to the input
buffer of the instrument, but the commands will not be processed
by the instrument until all OPC operations in process are
complete. If the input buffer becomes full, the controller will be
unable to write more commands to the buffer. This can cause a
time-out.
BUSY?
The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the instrument
is busy processing a command that has an extended processing
time such as single-sequence acquisition.
The same command sequence, using the BUSY? query for
synchronization, looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement
*/
While BUSY? keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than
using the *WAI command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid
time-outs caused by writing too many commands to the input
buffer. The controller is still tied up though, and the repeated
BUSY? query will result in more bus traffic.
*OPC
If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC
command sets the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR) when an operation is complete. You achieve
synchronization by using this command with either a serial poll
or service request handler.
64
Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable
Register (ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands.
When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard
Event Status Register (SESR) will be enabled and the Event
Status Bit (ESB) in the Status Byte Register will be enabled.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for
synchronization with serial polling looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 0
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement.
*/
*OPC
While serial poll = 0, keep looping
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on
BUSY?.
65
Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device
Event Status Enable Register (DESER) and the Event Status
Enable Register (ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands.
You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in
the Service Request Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE
command. When the operation is complete, a Service Request
will be generated.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for
synchronization looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Enable the status registers */
DESE 1
*ESE 1
*SRE 32
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking
the measurement
*/
*OPC
The program can now do different tasks such as talk to
other devices. The SRQ, when it comes, interrupts those
tasks and returns control to this task.
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated
programming.
*OPC?
The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an
operation that generates an OPC message is complete. A time
66
out could occur if you try to read the output queue before there is
any data in it.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for
synchronization looks like this:
/* Set up conditional acquisition */
ACQUIRE:STATE OFF
SELECT:CH1 ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500
ACQUIRE:MODE SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/* Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE ON
/* Set up the measurement parameters */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the
measurement
*/
*OPC?
Wait for read from Output Queue.
/* Take amplitude measurement */
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or
loops. However, you must set the controller time-out for longer
than the acquisition operation.
Messages
Overview
The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the
programming interface messages the instrument generates in
response to commands and queries.
For most messages, a secondary message from the instrument
gives more detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of
the message. This message is part of the message string and is
separated from the main message by a semicolon.
67
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a
specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in
the DESER. Thus, each message is associated with a specific
SESR bit. In the message tables, the associated SESR bit is
specified in the table title, with exceptions noted with the error
message text.
No Events
The following table shows the messages when the system has no
events or status to report. These have no associated SESR bit.
N o E ve n t M e s s a g e s
Code
Message
0
No events to report; queue empty
1
No events to report; new events pending *ESR?
Command Errors
The following table shows the command error messages
generated by improper syntax. Check that the command is
properly formed and that it follows the rules in the section on
command Syntax.
68
Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5)
Code
Message
100
Command error
101
Invalid character
102
Syntax error
103
Invalid separator
104
Data type error
105
GET not allowed
108
Parameter not allowed
109
Missing parameter
110
Command header error
111
Header separator error
112
Program mnemonic too long
113
Undefined header
114
Header suffix out of range
120
Numeric data error
121
Invalid character in number
123
Exponent too large
124
Too many digits
128
Numeric data not allowed
130
Suffix error
131
Invalid suffix
134
Suffix too long
138
Suffix not allowed
140
Character data error
141
Invalid character data
144
Character data too long
148
Character data not allowed
150
String data error
151
Invalid string data
158
String data not allowed
160
Block data error
161
Invalid block data
168
Block data not allowed
170
Command expression error
171
Invalid expression
178
Expression data not allowed
Execution Errors
The following table lists the execution errors that are detected
during execution of a command.
69
Execution Error Messages (EXE Bit 4)
70
Code
Message
200
Execution error
201
Invalid while in local
202
Settings lost due to RTL
210
Trigger error
211
Trigger ignored
212
Arm ignored
219
Trigger delay not available
220
Parameter error
221
Settings conflict
222
Data out of range
223
Too much data
224
Illegal parameter value
225
Out of memory
230
Data corrupt or stale
240
Hardware error
241
Hardware missing
244
Invalid parameter selected
250
Mass storage error
251
Missing mass storage
252
Missing media
253
Corrupt media
254
Media full
255
Directory full
256
File name not found
257
File name error
258
Media Protected
260
Execution expression error
261
Math error in expression
2200
Measurement error, Measurement
system error
2201
Measurement error, Zero period
2202
Measurement error, No period found
2203
Measurement error, No period,
second waveform
2204
Measurement error, Low signal
amplitude
2205
Measurement error, Low amplitude,
second waveform
2206
Measurement error, Invalid gate
2207
Measurement error, Measurement
overflow
2208
Measurement error, Waveform does
not cross Mid Ref
2209
Measurement error, No second Mid
Ref crossing
2210
Measurement error, No Mid Ref
crossing, second waveform
2211
Measurement error, No backwards
Mid Ref crossing
2212
Measurement error, No negative
crossing
2213
Measurement error, No positive
crossing
2214
Measurement error, No crossing
2215
Measurement error, No crossing,
second waveform
2216
Measurement error, No crossing,
target waveform
2217
Measurement error, Constant
waveform
2218
Measurement error, Unused
2219
Measurement error, No valid edge No arm sample
2220
Measurement error, No valid edge No arm cross
2221
Measurement error, No valid edge No trigger cross
2222
Measurement error, No valid edge No second cross
2223
Measurement error, Waveform
mismatch
2225
Measurement error, No waveform to
measure
2226
Measurement error, Null Waveform
2227
Measurement error, Positive and
Negative Clipping
2228
Measurement error, Positive
Clipping
2229
Measurement error, Negative
Clipping
2230
Measurement error, High Ref < Low
Ref
2231
Measurement error, no statistics
available
2241
Waveform request is invalid
2243
This meas cannot be performed on
this type of wfm
2244
Source wfm is not active
2248
This ref cannot be activated
2249
Reference deletion error, Waveform
in use for math
71
2250
Reference error, Waveform
reference file is invalid
2251
Reference error, Waveform
preamble does not match actual
2252
Reference error, Source wfm is not
valid
2253
Reference error, Too many points
received
2254
Reference error, Too few points
received
2259
File too big
2261
Calibration error, wait for the
warmup interval to expire before
invoking SPC
2400
Not enough memory available
2401
This channel cannot be activated
2402
Math/Meas/Histo have circular
definition
2410
Empty math string
2411
Syntax error in math string
2412
Semantic error in math string
2413
Math expression is too complex
2420
Histogram cannot be performed on
this type of wfm
Device Errors
The following table lists the device errors that can occur during
instrument operation. These errors may indicate that the
instrument needs repair.
D e vi c e E r r o r M e s s a g e s ( D D E B i t 3 )
Code
Message
300
Device-specific error
310
System error
311
Memory error
312
PUD memory lost
313
Calibration memory lost
314
Save/recall memory lost
315
Configuration memory lost
350
Queue overflow (does not set DDE bit)
System Events
The following table lists the system event messages. These
messages are generated whenever certain system conditions
occur.
72
S ys t e m E ve n t M e s s a g e s
Code
Message
400
Query event
401
Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402
Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403
User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404
Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405
Request control
410
Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420
Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430
Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response
(QYE bit 2 set)
Execution Warnings
The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt
the flow of command execution. These notify you that you may
get unexpected results.
Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)
Code
Message
540
Measurement warning
541
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543
Measurement warning, Low resolution
544
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545
Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax
546
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548
Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549
Measurement warning, Clipping negative
551
FASTAcq mode is active - deactivate to use math
Internal Warnings
The following table shows internal errors that indicate an
internal fault in the instrument.
Internal Warning Messages
Code
Message
600
Internal warning
630
Internal warning, 50 Ω overload
73
Programming Examples
Overview
Three example programs, which demonstrate methods that you
can use to control the instrument through the General Purpose
Interface Bus (GPIB), are included on your TDS5000 Series
Product Software CD. These example programs are installed as
part of the GPIB Programmer installation, which includes the
TDS5000 Series Oscilloscope Programmer Online Guide.
To install the "GPIB Programmer", perform the following
procedure:
1. Insert the TDS5000 Series Product Software CD in your CD
drive.
2. Open the folder named GPIB Programmer.
3. Double-click Setup.exe.
4. Follow the Install Wizard directions.
An Examples directory will be created with the path name
C:\Program Files\TekScope\Programmer\Examples
Within the Examples directory are two subdirectories, Source
and Programs.
Source contains the source files, written in Microsoft Visual
C++, Version 6.0, which is required to build executable files for
each of the following example programs:
•
Meas.c -- This example program demonstrates how to
perform a periodic amplitude measurement on CH 1 of your
instrument.
•
GetWfm.c -- This example program demonstrates how to
acquire and output the CH 1 waveform in a 500-point
RIBANARY format. The program then queries the
instrument to get the waveform preamble information,
formats the binary waveform data as ASCII values, and,
finally, writes out a report of the waveform preamble and
ASCII data points to a file named WFM_DATA.PRN.
•
Tl.c -- This example program demonstrates how to use a
general talker/listener program to allow the user to send
commands and queries to the instrument and display the
responses.
A README file in the Source directory has the latest
documentation.
Programs contains compiled, executable files for each of the
example programs in the Source directory (see above).
The programs run on a PC-compatible system equipped with a
National Instruments GPIB board and associated drivers.
74
Compiling the Example GPIB Programs
The example GPIB programs make the following assumptions:
•
The GPIB controller board is "GPIB0" (board 0). If you have
more than one GPIB controller in your workstation, and you
want to user a GPIB controller other than board 0, you must
edit the source files accordingly.
•
The instrument is connected to the GPIB controller (see
above) and is set to address 1 (DEV1). If you want to use
another address, then you must edit the source files
accordingly.
Each program requires adding the following source files to the
associated VC++ project (which you will create):
•
GPIBERR.C
•
GPIBREAD.C
•
GPIBWAIT.C
• GPIBWRIT.C
In additon to the above source files, you will also need to add the
following files provided by National Instruments:
•
decl-32.h
•
gpib-32.obj
Compiling and Linking Example Visual C++ Programs
To make an executable for any of the example programs in the
Source directory, perform the following steps:
++
1. Install Microsoft Visual C , Version 6.0.
2. Install the National Instruments GPIB board and drivers.
3. Copy the following source files from your National
Instruments GPIB drivers directory to this directory
("Examples\Source"):
•
decl-32.h
• gpib-32.obj
Create a new "Win32 Console Application" project in Visual
C++ located in this directory ("Examples\Source"). For
example, if you want to build the Talker/Listener
application, select this directory for the location, and enter a
suitable name for the project, such as TL.
5. Add the following Visual C++ source files to the project:
4.
•
..\GPIBERR.C
•
..\GPIBREAD
75
•
6.
..\GPIBWAIT.C
• ..\GPIBWRIT.C
Add the following source files provided by National
Instruments to the project:
•
..\decl-32.h
• ..gpib-32.obj
7. Add the appropriate program main source file to the project (
see Overview for a list of the three source files).
8. Build and test the project.
9. To build another of the example projects, repeat steps 4
through 8.
76
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*CAL?
Description
This query-only command instructs the digitizing oscilloscope to
perform a signal path compensation and return its calibration
status. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Calibration from the Utilities menu and then clicking the
Calibrate button.
Note: The self-calibration can take several minutes to respond.
No other commands will be executed until calibration is
complete.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Syntax
*CAL?
Returns
•
0
<NR1>
Means the calibration did not complete successfully.
•
1 (or any non zero value)
<NR1>
Means the calibration completed without errors.
Example
*CAL?
This query might return
1
to indicate that the calibration was successful
77
*CLS
Description
This command (no query form) clears the following:
•
Event Queue
•
Standard Event Status Register
• Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit)
If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the
Output Queue and MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also
cleared. MAV indicates that information is in the output queue.
The device clear (DCL) GPIB control message will clear the
output queue and thus MAV. *CLS does not clear the output
queue or MAV.
*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by
an *OPC. This will happen if a single sequence acquisition
operation is still being processed when the *CLS command is
executed.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax
*CLS
Example
*CLS
This command clears the instrument status data structures.
*DDT
Description
This command allows you to specify a command or a list of
commands that are executed when the instrument receives a
*TRG command or the GET GPIB interface message. Define
Device Trigger (*DDT) is a special alias that the *TRG
command uses.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
ALIas, *TRG
Syntax 1
*DDT {<Block>|<Qstring>}
78
Syntax 2
*DDT?
Arguments
•
<Block>
This is a complete sequence of program messages. The
messages can contain only valid commands that must be
separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for
concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or
equal to 80 characters. The format of this argument is always
returned as a query.
•
<QString>
This is a complete sequence of program messages. The
messages can contain only valid commands that must be
separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for
concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or
equal to 80 characters.
Example
*DDT #OACQUIRE:STATE RUN
This command specifies that the acquisition system will be
started each time a *TRG command is sent.
*ESE
Description
This command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status
Enable Register (ESER). The ESER prevents events from being
reported to the Status Byte Register (STB). For a more detailed
discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax 1
*ESE <NR1>
Syntax 2
*ESE?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this
value, which ranges from 0 through 255.
The power-on default for the ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If
*PSC is 0, the ESER maintains the previous power cycle
value through the current power cycle.
79
Note: Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values
allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue
and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte
Register. Use the DESE command to set the DESER.
Example 1
*ESE 209
This command sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables
the PON, URQ, EXE, and OPC bits.
Example 2
*ESE?
This query form of this command returns 186, showing that the
ESER contains the binary value 10111010.
*ESR?
Description
This query-only command returns the contents of the Standard
Event Status Register (SESR). *ESR? also clears the SESR
(since reading the SESR clears it). For a more detailed
discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE,
*STB?
Syntax
*ESR?
Example
*ESR?
This query might return 213, showing that the SESR contains
the binary value 11010101.
*IDN?
Description
This query-only command returns the instrument identification
code.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
ID?
Syntax
IDN?
80
Example
*IDN?
This query might return :TEKTRONIX,TDS5104,CF:91.1CT
FV:01.00.912, indicating the instrument model number,
configured number, and firmware version number.
*LRN?
Description
This query-only command returns the commands that list the
instrument settings (except for configuration information for the
calibration values), allowing you to record or "learn" the current
instrument settings. You can use these commands to return the
instrument to the state it was in when you made the *LRN?
query. This command is identical to the SET? Command.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
SET?
Syntax
*LRN?
Example
*LRN?
This query might return the following response:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE
SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET
1;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB1:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB2:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:WINDOW:HEIGHT 236;WIDTH
640;:APPLICATION:SCOPEAPP:STATE RUNNING;WINDOW
FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE
NOTRUNNING;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE
FALLING;:CMDBATCH 1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK
NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE
1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE
NORMAL;MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR
DEFAULT;:DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE
FULL;INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 75.0000;AUTOBRIGHT
1;SCREENSAVER 1;SCREENSAVERDELAY
28800;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE
VECTORS;TRIGBAR SHORT;TRIGT 1;VARPERSIST
500.0000E-3;:HARDCOPY:FILENAME "untitled";PORT
FILE;:DIAG:LEVEL
SUBSYS;:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
INTERNAL;:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL
0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME 1.5000E6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION
AND;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3
1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH;CH2 X;CH3
X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
81
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE
RISE;THRESHOLD 1.2000;SOURCE
CH2;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.2000;SOURCE
CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E9;SETTIME 3.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN
TRUE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE
CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF
ACCEPT;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE
INSIDE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E9;LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4
HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4
1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2
HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4
HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4
1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH
2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME
2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
FASTERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT
2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN
WITHIN;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY
STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED;SCAN
RATE1;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS;HOLDOFF:FIELD
0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;POLARITY
NORMAL;SCAN RATE1;SOURCE CH1;STANDARD
NTSC;:TRIGGER:B:STATE 0;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL
0.0000;BY EVENTS;EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE
RISE;COUPLING DC;:TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E9;EVENTS:COUNT 2;:MATH1:DEFINE " ";NUMAVG
2;VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000;POSITION
0.0000;:MATH1:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
65;:MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000;GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6;REFLEVEL
20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3;SPAN
600.0000E+6;CENTER 325.0000E+6;RESBW
1.0000E+6;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 35.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0;:MATH2:DEFINE " ";NUMAVG
2;VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000;POSITION
0.0000;:MATH2:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
80;:MATH2:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000;GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6;REFLEVEL
20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3;SPAN
600.0000E+6;CENTER 325.0000E+6;RESBW
1.0000E+6;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 35.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0;:MATH3:DEFINE " ";NUMAVG
2;VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000;POSITION
0.0000;:MATH3:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
95;:MATH3:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000;GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6;REFLEVEL
82
20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3;SPAN
600.0000E+6;CENTER 325.0000E+6;RESBW
1.0000E+6;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 35.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0;:MATH4:DEFINE " ";NUMAVG
2;VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000;POSITION
0.0000;:MATH4:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
110;:MATH4:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000;GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6;REFLEVEL
20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3;SPAN
600.0000E+6;CENTER 325.0000E+6;RESBW
1.0000E+6;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 35.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0;:HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT
30.0000,25.1000,70.0000,75.2000;DISPLAY
LINEAR;STATE 0;FUNCTION HORIZONTAL;SIZE
2.0000;SOURCE CH1;:CH1:BANDWIDTH
1.0000E+9;COUPLING DC;DESKEW 0.0000;OFFSET
0.0000;INVERT 0;POSITION 0.0000;SCALE 100.0000E3;TERMINATION 1.0000E+6;PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN
1.0000;EXTUNITS "None";:CH1:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS
5;YPOS 5;:CH2:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9;COUPLING
DC;DESKEW 0.0000;OFFSET 0.0000;INVERT 0;POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 100.0000E-3;TERMINATION
1.0000E+6;PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000;EXTUNITS
"None";:CH2:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
20;:CH3:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9;COUPLING DC;DESKEW
0.0000;OFFSET 0.0000;INVERT 0;POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 100.0000E-3;TERMINATION
1.0000E+6;PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000;EXTUNITS
"None";:CH3:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
35;:CH4:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9;COUPLING DC;DESKEW
0.0000;OFFSET 0.0000;INVERT 0;POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 100.0000E-3;TERMINATION
1.0000E+6;PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000;EXTUNITS
"None";:CH4:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
50;:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH1 0;MATH2
0;MATH3 0;MATH4 0;REF1 0;REF2 0;REF3 0;REF4
0;CONTROL CH1;:CURSOR:STATE 0;FUNCTION
VBARS;MODE INDEPENDENT;SOURCE CH1;VBARS:UNITS
SECONDS;POSITION1 -1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E6;:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 300.0000E-3;POSITION2
-300.0000E-3;:CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1 -1.6000E6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6;:CURSOR:SPLIT:POSITION1 1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6;SOURCE2 CH1;UNITS
BASE;:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 0;POSITION
50.0000;TIME 0.0000;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE
400.0000E-9;POSITION 50.0000;SAMPLERATE
1.2500E+9;:HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
5000;RESOLUTION 5000;ROLL
AUTO;:MEASUREMENT:GATING OFF;METHOD
HISTOGRAM;IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED;SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:STATE 0;TYPE
83
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS6:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS7:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS8:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1
0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2
50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE
OFF;WEIGHTING 32;:ZOOM:MODE 0;GRATICULE:SPLIT
FIFTYFIFTY;:ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK
ALL;:ZOOM:CH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE
2;:ZOOM:CH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:CH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:CH2:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:CH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:CH3:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:CH4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:CH4:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:MATH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:MATH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:MATH2:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:MATH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:MATH3:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:MATH4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:MATH4:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:REF2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:REF3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:REF3:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:REF4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:REF4:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 1.0000;:REF1:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS
5;YPOS 125;:REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-3;:REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;:REF2:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
140;:REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-3;:REF2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;:REF3:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
155;:REF3:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-3;:REF3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;:REF4:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
170;:REF4:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
84
1.0000E-3;:REF4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;:DATA:DESTINATION REF1;ENCDG
RIBINARY;SOURCE CH1;START 1;STOP 500
*OPC
Description
This command generates the operation complete message in the
Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when all pending
commands that generate an OPC message are complete. The
*OPC? query places the ASCII character "1" into the output
queue when all such OPC commands are complete. The *OPC?
response is not available to read until all pending operations
finish. For a complete discussion of the use of these registers and
the output queue, see Registers and Queues.
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of
the instrument with your application program. For more
information, see Synchronization Methods.
85
Com ma nds th at ge ne ra te a n O P C M es s ag e
Operation
Command
Single sequence
acquisition
ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN or
ACQuire:STATE 1
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence).
Hardcopy
operation
HARDCopy STArt
Calibration step
Refer to the optional TDS5000 Series Digital
Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service Manual
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
BUSY?, *WAI
Syntax 1
*OPC
Syntax 2
*OPC?
Example 1
*OPC
Upon completion of all pending OPC operations, this command
generates the operation complete message in the SESR.
Example 2
*OPC?
This query might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC
operations are finished.
86
*OPT?
Description
This query-only command returns a list of the options installed
in your instrument.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*OPT?
Example
*OPT?
This query might return
:3M:16 Meg Max 4M/CH
*PSC
Description
This command sets and queries the power-on status flag that
controls the automatic power-on handling of the DESER, SRER,
and ESER registers. When *PSC is true, the DESER register is
set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at
power-on. When *PSC is false, the current values in the DESER,
SRER, and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory
when power is shut off and are restored at power-on.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST, *SRE
Syntax 1
*PSC <NR1>
Syntax 2
*PSC?
87
Argument
•
<NR1>
A 0 sets the power-on status clear flag to false, disables the
power-on clear and allows the instrument to possibly assert
SRQ after power-on; any other value sets the power-on
status clear flag to true, enabling the power-on status clear
and prevents any SRQ assertion after power on.
Example 1
*PSC 0
This command sets the power-on status clear flag to false.
Example 2
*PSC?
The query form of this command might return 1 to indicate that
the power-on status clear flag is set to true.
*PUD
Description
This command sets or queries a string of Protected User Data.
This data is protected by the PASSWord command. You can
modify it only by first entering the correct password. This
password is not necessary to query the data.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
PASSWord
Syntax 1
*PUD {<Block>|<String>}
Syntax 2
*PUD?
Argument
•
<Block>
This is a block containing up to 100 characters.
•
<String>
This is a string containing up to 100 characters.
Example 1
*PUD #229This instrument belongs to me
This command stores the string "This oscilloscope belongs to
me" in the user protected data area.
88
Example 2
*PUD?
This query might return #221Property of Company X
*RCL
Description
This command (no query form) restores the state of the
instrument from a copy of the settings stored in memory (The
settings are stored using the *SAV command). If 'factory' is
referenced (by specifying '0'), the factory default values will be
restored. This command is equivalent to RECAll:SETUp and
performs the same function as selecting Instrument Setup from
the File menu and then choosing the Recall Setups tab.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST,
*SAV, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
*RCL <NR1>
Argument
•
<NR1>
This specifies a setup storage location value ranging from 0
through 10. Using an out-of-range value causes an execution
error.
Example
*RCL 3
This command restores the instrument from a copy of the
settings stored in memory location 3.
*RST
Description
This command (no query form) resets the instrument to the
factory default settings. The *RST command does not alter the
following:
•
The state of the IEEE Std 488.1-1987 interface
•
The selected IEEE Std 488.1-1987 address of the instrument
•
Calibration data that affect device specifications
•
The Output Queue
•
The Service Request Enable Register setting
89
•
The Power-on status clear flag setting
•
Alias definitions
•
Stored settings
• The *PUD? Response
This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP
button on the front panel.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
FACtory, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
*RST
Argument
None
Example
*RST
This command resets the instrument settings to factory defaults.
*SAV
Description
This command (no query form) stores the state of the instrument
to a specified memory location. You can later use the *RCL
command to restore the instrument to this saved state. This is
equivalent to selecting Instrument Setup from the File menu and
then choosing the Save Setups tab.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
*SAV <NR1>
Argument
•
<NR1>
This specifies a location in which to save the state of the
instrument. Location values range from 1 through 10. Using
an out-of-range location value causes an execution error.
Any settings that have been stored previously at this location
will be overwritten.
90
Example
*SAV 2
This command saves the current instrument state in memory
location 2.
*SDS
Description
This command (no query form) changes the specified setup to
reference the factory setup instead of the specific user setup slot.
The content of the setup slot is unchanged, but the data will no
longer be accessible to you. This command is equivalent to
selecting Instrument Setups from the File menu, choosing the
Delete Setups tab, and then clicking the Default button.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
DELEte:SETUp
Syntax
*SDS <NRf>
Argument
•
<NR1>
This specifies a user setup location to delete. Setup storage
location values range from 1 through 10; using an out-ofrange value causes an error.
Example
*SDS 2
This command changes setup slot 2 to reference the factory
setup.
*SRE
Description
The *SRE (Service Request Enable) command sets and queries
the bits in the Service Request Enable Register. For more
information, refer to Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory,
*STB?
Syntax 1
*SRE <NR1>
91
Syntax 2
*SRE?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary
bits of the SRER are set according to this value. Using an
out-of-range value causes an execution error. The power-on
default for SRER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER
maintains the previous power cycle value through the current
power cycle.
Example 1
*SRE 48
This command sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000.
Example 2
*SRE?
This query might return 32, showing that the bits in the SRER
have the binary value of 00100000.
*STB?
Description
The *STB? (Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the
Status Byte Register (SBR) using the Master Summary Status
(MSS) bit. For more information, refer to Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory,
*SRE?
Syntax
*STB?
Returns
<NR1>
Example
*STB?
This query might return 96, showing that the SBR contains the
binary value 01100000.
92
*TRG
Description
This command (no query form) performs the group execute
trigger on commands defined by *DDT.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
*DDT
Syntax
*TRG
Example
*TRG
This command immediately executes all commands that have
been defined by *DDT.
*TST?
Description
This query-only command tests (self-test) the GPIB interface and
returns a 0.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*TST?
Example
*TST?
This query always returns 0.
*WAI
Description
The *WAI (Wait) command (no query form) prevents the
instrument from executing further commands or queries until all
pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete.
This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the
instrument with your application program. For more information,
refer to Synchronization Methods.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
BUSY?, *OPC
93
Syntax
*WAI
Example
*WAI
This command prevents the instrument from executing any
further commands or queries until all pending commands that
generate an OPC message are complete.
ACQuire:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries the acquisition mode of the
instrument. This affects all live waveforms. This command is
equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition from the
Horiz/Acq menu, and then choosing the desired mode from the
Acquisition Mode group box.
Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from
acquisition intervals. Each acquisition interval represents a time
duration set by the horizontal scale (time per division). The
instrument sampling system always samples at the maximum
rate and so an acquisition interval may include more than one
sample.
The acquisition mode (which you set using this ACQuire:MODe
command) determines how the final value of the acquisition
interval is generated from the many data samples.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:NUMenv, CURVe?
Syntax 1
ACQuire:MODe{SAMple|PEAKdetect|HIRes|AVErage|ENV
elope}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:MODe?
Arguments
•
SAMple
Specifies that the displayed data point value is the first
sampled value that is taken during the acquisition interval. In
sample mode, all waveform data has 8 bits of precision. You
can request 16 bit data with a CURVe? query but the lowerorder 8 bits of data will be zero. SAMple is the default mode.
94
•
PEAKdetect
Specifies the display of high-low range of the samples taken
from a single waveform acquisition. The high-low range is
displayed as a vertical column that extends from the highest
to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval.
PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or
narrow spikes.
•
HIRes
Specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed data point value
is the average of all the samples taken during the acquisition
interval. This is a form of averaging, where the average
comes from a single waveform acquisition. The number of
samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the
number of data values that compose the average.
•
AVErage
Specifies averaging mode, in which the resulting waveform
shows an average of SAMple data points from several
separate waveform acquisitions. The instrument processes
the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired
waveform, creating a running exponential average of the
input signal. The number of waveform acquisitions that go
into making up the average waveform is set or queried using
the ACQuire:NUMAVg command.
•
ENVelope
Specifies envelope mode, where the resulting waveform
shows the PEAKdetect range of data points from several
separate waveform acquisitions. The number of waveform
acquisitions that go into making up the envelope waveform
is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMENv command.
Example 1
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope
Sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that is an
envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions.
Example 2
ACQuire:MODe?
This command might return :ACQuire:MODe AVERAGE,
indicating that the displayed waveform is the average of the
specified number of waveform acquisitions.
95
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of waveform
acquisitions that have occurred since starting acquisition with the
ACQuire:STATE RUN command. This value is reset to zero
when any acquisition, horizontal, or vertical arguments that
affect the waveform are changed. The maximum number of
The instrument stops
acquisitions that can be counted is
counting when this number is reached. This is the same value
that displays in the upper center of the screen when the
acquisition system is stopped.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:STATE
Syntax
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Example
ACQuire:NUMACq?
This command might return :ACQUIRE:NUMACQ 350,
indicating that 350 acquisitions have occurred since executing an
ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Description
This command sets or queries the number of waveform
acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform. Use the
ACQuire:MODe command to enable the Average mode. Sending
this command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition
Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu, selecting the Acquisition tab,
and choosing Average from the Acquisition Mode group box.
Then enter the desired number of waveforms that will be used to
make up an averaged waveform in the # of Wfms box.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:MODe
Syntax 1
ACQuire:NUMAVg <NRf>
Syntax 2
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
96
Arguments
•
NRf
This is the number of waveform acquisitions to average.
Example 1
ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
This command specifies that 10 waveform averages will be
performed before exponential averaging starts.
Example 2
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
This command might return :ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 75, indicating
that there are 75 acquisitions specified for averaging.
ACQuire:NUMEnv
Description
This command sets or queries the number of waveform
acquisitions that make up an envelope waveform. Sending this
command is equivalent to setting the # of Wfms in the
Acquisition Setup menu when Envelope Acquisition mode is
selected.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax 1
ACQuire:NUMEnv {<NRf> | INFInite}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:NUMEnv?
Arguments
•
NRf
This is the number of waveform acquisitions to be
enveloped.
Example 1
ACQuire:NUMenv 10
This command specifies that an enveloped waveform will show
the result of combining 10 separately acquired waveforms.
Example 2
ACQuire:NUMenv?
This command might return :ACQUIRE:NUMENV 0, indicating
that acquisitions are acquired infinitely for enveloped
waveforms.
97
ACQuire:REPEt
Description
This command sets or queries whether repetitive mode is on or
off. This is equivalent to setting Equivalent Time Auto/Off in the
Acquisition control window. When the instrument is in real-time
operation, this setting has no effect.
The ACQuire:REPet command specifies the behavior of the
acquisition system during equivalent-time operation. When
repetitive mode is on, the acquisition system will continue to
acquire waveform data until the waveform record is filled with
acquired data. When repetitive mode is off, horizontal scale and
record length settings will be restricted to those settings that will
be achievable with real-time acquisition.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax 1
ACQuire:REPEt
{OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:REPEt?
Arguments
•
OFF
This argument disables repetitive mode.
•
ON
This argument enables repetitive mode.
•
NR1
A 0 disables repetitive mode; any other value enables
repetitive mode.
Example 1
ACQUIRE:REPEt
1
This command enables repetitive mode.
Example 2
ACQuire:REPEt?
This query might return :ACQUIRE:REPET
repetitive mode is disabled.
98
OFF,
indicating that
ACQuire:STATE
Description
This command starts or stops acquisitions. When state is set to
ON or RUN, a new acquisition will be started. If the last
acquisition was a single acquisition sequence, a new single
sequence acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition was
continuous, a new continuous acquisition will be started.
If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence
acquisition (for example, averaging or enveloping), the
acquisition sequence is restarted, and any accumulated data is
discarded. Also, the instrument resets the number of acquisitions.
If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode, a reset
occurs and acquired data continues to acquire.
Sending this command is equivalent to pressing the front-panel
RUN/STOP button.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:STOPAfter,
Syntax 1
ACQuire:STATE{OFF|ON|RUN|STOP|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:STATE?
Arguments
•
OFF
This argument stops acquisitions.
•
STOP
This argument stops acquisitions.
•
ON
This argument starts acquisitions.
•
RUN
This argument starts acquisitions.
•
NR1
0 stops acquisitions; any other value starts acquisitions.
Example 1
ACQuire:STATE RUN
This command starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets
the count of the number of acquisitions.
99
Example 2
ACQuire:STATE?
This query might return :ACQUIRE:STATE
the acquisition is stopped.
0, indicating that
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Description
This command sets or queries whether the instrument continually
acquires acquisitions or acquires a single sequence. This
command is equivalent to pressing SINGLE from the front
panel.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:STATE, ACQuire:REPEt
Syntax 1
ACQuire:STOPAfter
{RUNSTop|SEQuence}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:STOPAfter?
Arguments
•
RUNSTop
Specifies that the instrument will continually acquire data, if
ACQuire:STATE is turned on.
•
SEQuence
Specifies that the next acquisition will be a single-sequence
acquisition.
Example 1
ACQuire:STOPAfter RUNSTOP
This command sets the instrument to continually acquire data.
Example 2
ACQuire:STOPAfter?
This query might return
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
This indicates that the next acquisition the instrument makes will
be of the single-sequence type.
100
ACQuire?
Description
This query-only command returns the following current
acquisition parameters:
•
Stop after
•
Acquisition state
•
Mode
•
Number of envelopes
•
Number of averages
•
Repetitive signals
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:NUMACq, ACQuire:NUMAVg,
ACQuire:NUMenv, ACQuire:REPEt, ACQuire:STATE,
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Syntax
ACQuire?
Example
ACQuire?
This query might return the following string for the current
acquisition parameters:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE
SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET ON
ALLEV?
Description
This query-only command prompts the instrument to return all
events and their messages (delimited by commas), and removes
the returned events from the Event Queue. Use the *ESR? query
to enable the events to be returned. This command is similar to
repeatedly sending *EVMsg? queries to the instrument.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*ESR?, *EVMsg?
Syntax
ALLev?
101
Example
ALLev?
This query might return :ALLEV 2225,"Measurement
error, No waveform to measure; "420,"Query
UNTERMINATED;"
ALIas
Description
This command sets or queries the state of alias functionality.
Group
Alias
Related Commands
ALIas:STATE
Syntax 1
ALIas {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ALIas?
Arguments
•
OFF
This turns Alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when
ALIas:STATE is off, a command error (102) will be
generated.
•
ON
This turns Alias expansion on. When a defined alias is
received, the specified command sequence is substituted for
the alias and executed.
•
NR1
A 0 disables Alias mode; any other value enables Alias
mode.
Example 1
ALIas ON
This command turns the alias feature on. When a defined alias is
received, the specified command sequence is substituted for the
alias and executed.
Example 2
ALIas?
This query might return :ALIAS:STATE 1, indicating that the
alias feature is on.
102
ALIas:CATalog?
Description
This query-only command returns a list of the currently defined
alias labels, separated by commas. If no aliases are defined, the
query returns the string "".
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:CATalog?
Example
ALIas:CATalog?
This query might return the string :ALIAS:CATALOG
"SETUP1","TESTMENU1","DEFAULT", showing that there are
three aliases named SETUP1, TESTMENU1, and DEFAULT.
ALIas:DEFIne
Description
This command assigns a sequence of program messages to an
alias label. These messages are then substituted for the alias
whenever it is received as a command or query, provided that
ALIas:STATE has been turned on. The query form of this
command returns the definitions of a selected alias.
Note: Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an
error. To give a new alias the name of an existing alias, the
existing alias must first be deleted.
Group
Alias
Related Commands
ALIas:STATE
Syntax 1
ALIas:DEFIne <Qstring><,>{<Qstring>|<Block>}
Syntax 2
ALIas:DEFIne?
Arguments
•
The first <Qstring> is the alias label.
This label cannot be a command name. Labels must start
with a letter and can contain only letters, numbers, and
underscores; other characters are not allowed. The label must
be less than or equal to 12 characters.
103
•
The second <Qstring> or <Block> is a complete sequence
of program messages.
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be
separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for
concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or
equal to 256 characters.
Example 1
ALIas:DEFIne "ST1",":RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET
EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON"
This command defines an alias named "ST1" that sets up the
instrument.
Example 2
ALIas:DEFIne? "ST1"
This command returns :ALIAS:DEFINE "ST1",#246
:RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON
ALIas:DELEte
Description
This command removes a specified alias and is identical to
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe. An error message is generated if the
named alias does not exist.
Group
Alias
Related Commands
*ESR?, ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte <Qstring>
Argument
•
<Qstring>
This is the name of the alias to be removed. Using
ALIas:DELEte without specifying an alias causes an
execution error. <Qstring> must be a previously defined
value.
Example
ALIas:DELEte "SETUP1"
This command deletes the alias named SETUP1.
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Description
This command deletes all existing aliases.
104
Group
Alias
Related Commands
ALIas:DELEte, ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Example
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
This command deletes all existing aliases.
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
Description
This command removes a specified alias. An error message is
generated if the named alias does not exist. This command is
identical to ALIas:DELEte.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe <Qstring>
Argument
•
<Qstring>
This is the name of the alias to remove. Using
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe without specifying an alias causes an
exception error. <Qstring> must be a previously defined
alias.
Example
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe "STARTUP"
This command deletes the alias named STARTUP.
ALIas:STATE
Description
This command turns aliases on or off and is identical to the
ALIas command. The query form of this command returns the
state of the aliases.
Group
Alias
Syntax 1
ALIas:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ALIas:STATE?
105
Arguments
•
OFF
This turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when
ALIas:STATE is OFF, the instrument generates a command
error (102).
•
ON
This turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is
received, the specified command sequence is substituted for
the alias and executed.
•
<NR1>
A 0 turns off aliases; any other value turns on aliases.
Example 1
ALIas:STATE OFF
This command turns off the alias feature.
Example 2
ALIas:STATE?
This query might return
:ALIAS:STATE ON
This indicates that alias expansion is currently turned on.
AUTOSet
Description
This command (no query format) sets the vertical, horizontal,
and trigger controls of the instrument to automatically acquire
and display the selected waveform. (To autoset a video
waveform, the video trigger must be set to video standard, not
custom.) This is equivalent to pressing the front-panel
AUTOSET button. For a detailed description of autoset
functionality, see Autoset in the index of the online help for your
instrument.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Command
DISplay:GRATicule
Syntax
AUTOSet {EXECute|UNDo|VIDeo|VLines|VFields}
Arguments
•
EXECute
This argument autosets the displayed waveform; this is
equivalent to pressing the front-panel AUTOSET button. If
the display is set to a PAL, MV, or IRE graticule, this
argument forces the graticule display to full mode (frame,
106
grid, and cross hair).
•
UNDo
This argument returns the instrument to the setting prior to
executing an autoset.
•
VIDeo
This autosets the displayed waveform.
•
VLines
This autosets the displayed waveform.
•
VFields
This autosets the displayed waveform.
Example
AUTOSet VFields
This command sets the instrument to trigger on all video fields.
AUXout?
Description
This query-only command returns the auxiliary output setup.
This query command is equivalent to selecting AUX OUT
Configuration from the Utilities menu and then viewing the
current settings.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
AUXout:SOUrce
Syntax
AUXout?
Example
AUXout?
This query might return
:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE RISING
This indicates that the source at the BNC connector is set to the
A trigger and that the polarity is set to the rising edge of the
trigger output signal.
AUXout:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the trigger source at the BNC
connection. This command is equivalent to selecting AUX OUT
Configuration from the Utilities menu and then selecting the
desired Configuration setting.
107
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
AUXout?
Syntax 1
AUXout:SOUrce {ATRIGger|BTRIGger}
Syntax 2
AUXout:SOUrce?
Arguments
•
ATRIGger
This sets the source at the BNC connector to the main
trigger.
•
BTRIGger
This sets the source at the BNC connector to the delayed
trigger.
Example
AUXout:SOUrce?
This query might return
:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER
This indicates that the source at the BNC connector is set to the
A trigger.
BELI
Description
This command was previously used to beep an audio indicator
and is provided for backward compatibility.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
BEL1
Example
BEL1
This command is accepted but does nothing.
BUSY?
Description
This query-only command returns the status of the instrument.
This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the
instrument with your application program.
108
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*OPC, *WAI
Syntax
BUSY?
Returns
<NR1>
If 0 is returned, it means that the instrument is not busy
processing a command whose execution time is extensive. If 1 is
returned, it means that the instrument is busy processing one of
the commands listed in the table below.
Commands that Affect BUSY? Response
Operation
Command
Single sequence
acquisition
ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN or
ACQuire:STATE 1
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence).
Hardcopy
operation
HARDCopy STArt
Calibration step
Refer to the optional TDS5000 Series Digital
Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service Manual
Example
BUSY?
This query might return
:BUSY 1
This indicates that the instrument is currently busy.
109
CAL?
Description
This query-only command instructs the digitizing oscilloscope to
return the internal and factory calibration status and the
calibration due status.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:RESults_SPC?
Syntax
CAL?
Example
CAL?
This query might return
*CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS
PASS;:CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS
PASS;NOTIFY:HOURS 2000;YEARS 1.0E0;DUE 0
This indicates that the internal and factory calibration status and
the calibration due status.
110
CALibrate:FACtory
Description
This command starts the factory calibration. This command
functions the same as the CALibrate:FACtory:STARt command.
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory
Example
CALIBRATE:FACTORY
Starts the factory calibration.
CALibrate:FACtory:ABOrt
Description
This command stops the factory calibration, resets to the
initialization step, and exits without changing the calibration
data.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:FACtory:STARt
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:ABOrt
Example
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:ABORT
Stops the factory calibration.
111
CALibrate:FACtory:CONTInue
Description
This command does the next step in the calibration procedure.
The calibration step number is incremented on completion of this
step, independent of the step pass/fail status. Follow this
command with CALibrate:FACtory:STEPstatus? to determine
execution status. Use CALibrate:FACtory:PREVious, followed
by CALibrate:FACtory:CONTinue, to repeat a factory
calibration step that failed.
If the current step is the last step and the calibration succeeds,
new calibration data and pass status is saved to non-volatile
memory and the oscilloscope returns to normal operation in the
same state it was in before beginning factory calibration.
If the current step is the last step and any factory calibration step
has failed, without a successful pass for repeated steps, a fail
status will be saved to non-volatile memory. Factory calibration
data will not be saved to non-volatile memory if the factory
status is FAIL.
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:CONTInue
Example
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:CONTINUE
Causes the instrument to execute the next step in the calibration
procedure.
112
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:DUE?
Description
This command returns whether the factory calibration is due.
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:DUE?
Returns
•
0
<NR1>
Means the osclloscope is not due for factory calibration.
•
1
<NR1>
Means the oscilloscope is due for factory calibration.
Example
CALIBRATE:FACTORYLNOTIFY:DUE?
Might return:
:CALIBRATE:FACTORY:NOTIFY:DUE 0
This sgnifies that factory calibration is not due.
113
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs
Description
This command sets or return the number of hours until the user is
notified that the instrument is due for factory calibration.
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:HOURs {INFInite|<NR1>}
Argument
•
INFInite
Set to whatever the specified maximum is for the instrument.
•
<NR1>
Set to an integer value.
Example 1
CALIBRATE:FACTORYLNOTIFY:HOURS 1500
Sets the calibration notification time to 1,500 hours.
Example 2
CALIBRATE:FACTORYLNOTIFY:HOURS?
might return
:CALIBRATE:FACTORY:NOTIFY:HOURS 2000
This signifies that the calibration due notifier will be displayed
2000 hours after the last calibration.
114
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs
Description
This command sets or returns the number of years until the user
is notified that the instrument is due for factory calibration.
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:NOTIfy:YEARs {INFInite|<NR3>}
Argument
•
INFInite
Set to whatever the specified maximum is for the instrument.
•
<NR3>
Set to a floating point value.
Example 1
CALIBRATE:FACTORYLNOTIFY:YEARS 1.5e0
Sets the calibration notification time to 1.5 years.
Example 2
CALIBRATE:FACTORYLNOTIFY:YEARS?
might return
:CALIBRATE:FACTORY:NOTIFY:YEARS 1.5e0
This indicates that calibration due notifier will be displayed 1.5
years after the last calibration.
115
CALibrate:FACtory:PREVious
Description
This command backs up the calibration steps one step so that the
next CALibrate:FACtory:CONTInue command will repeat the
factory calibration step that just finished. Repeated
CALibrate:FACtory:PREVious commands can back up as many
calibration steps as desired, at least until step one is reached. The
appropriate notifier, with signal source information, is displayed
after the factory calibration step is adjusted.
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:PREVious
Example
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:PREVIOUS
Backs up the calibration steps one step.
CALibrate:FACtory:STARt
Description
This command starts the factory calibration. The factory
calibration process consists of a series of steps. Do not send any
other commands that change the state of the oscilloscope until
the calibration process is complete.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:FACtory:ABOrt
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:STARt
Example
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:START
Starts the factory calibration.
116
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus
Description
This command returns the factory calibration status.
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:STATus
Returns
•
FAIL
The factory caibration failed
•
PASS
The factory calibration passed
•
UNCAL
The factory calibration has not been run
Example
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS
Might return
:CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STATUS PASS
This indicates the factory calibration passed.
117
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTATus
Description
This command returns the status of the current calibration step.
It returns pass during oscilloscope power on without regard to
actual calibration status. It returns pass or fail for the factory
calibration step that most recently executed when factory
calibration is in progress. Use this query to sychronize
programmed factory calibration steps.
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTATus
Returns
•
FAIL
The factory caibration failed
•
PASS
The factory calibration passed
Example
CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STEPSTATUS
Might return
:CALIBRATE:FACTORY:STEPSTATUS FAIL
This indicates the last oscilloscope calibration step did not pass.
118
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTIMulus
Description
This command returns the required stimulus for this calibration
step
Group
Calibration
Syntax
CALibrate:FACtory:STEPSTIMulus
Returns
Using the format: <Volts>, <Freq>, <Chan>, <Term>, <Token>
•
Volts
<NR3>
A floating point number representing DC volts if the value
for <Freq> is 0 or representing Vpeak-to-peak if the value for
<Freq> is non-zero.
Note: If the box sends back that the frequency is 4 then apply the
WaveTek 9500 deskew function on all 4 channels at 1 megahertz
•
Freq
<NR1>
The frequency in Hz of the applied waveform. 0 means the
applied voltage is DC.
•
Chan
<NR1>
The channel.
•
Term
<NR1>
The ohms of termination. For example,
8.0E-03, 0, 1, 50, C01
means apply 800 mV DC to Channel 1 with 50 ohm
termination. If the query is sent before FACTORY CAL has
been initialized, the returned string will be:
0.0, 0, 0, 0, R01
•
Token
A unique string identifying the step to be done next.
119
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>?
Description
This query-only command returns the status of a probe
calibration for the probe of a given channel, which can be Pass
(0), Initialized, (1), Fail (-1), or Running (2). This command is
equivalent to selecting Probe Cal from the Vertical menu.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Syntax
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>?
Example
CALibrate:PROBESTATE:CH1?
This query returns the status of the probe calibration for the
probe of a given channel.
A query might return
:CALIBRATE:PROBESTATE:CH1 0
This indicates that the probe calibration passed.
CALibrate:RESults?
Description
This query-only command returns the status of all the calibration
subsystems, without performing an SPC operation. The results
returned do not include the calibration status of attached probes.
The CALibration:RESults? Query is intended to support
GO/NoGO testing of the oscilloscope calibration readiness: all
returned results should indicate Pass status if the oscilloscope is
"fit for duty". It is quite common, however, to use uncalibrated
probes (particularly when the oscilloscope inputs are connected
into a test system with coax cables). Not including the probe cal
results prompts the instrument to perform a simple "every
returned status field must be Pass" test.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration
from the Utilities menu and then viewing the contents of the
Status field.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
*CAL?
120
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults?
Example
CALibrate:RESults?
This query returns the status of all the calibration subsystems.
The query might return
:CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Description
This query-only command returns the results of the last SPC
operation. However, this query does not cause an SPC to be run.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration
from the Utilities menu.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
*CAL?
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Arguments
None.
Example
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
This query returns the results of the last SPC operation.
121
CH<x>?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical parameters for the
specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x
can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is similar
to selecting Vertical Setup from the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>?
Example
CH1?
This query might return the following vertical parameters for
channel 1:
:CH1:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+09; COUPLING DC;DESKEW
0.0000E+00;OFFSET 0.0000E+00;POSITION
0.0000E+00
;SCALE 5.0000E-01;TERMINATION
1.0000E+06;PROBCAL INIT;
PROBE:GAIN 1.0000E+00;RESISTANCE
1.0000E+06;UNITS "V"
;ID:TYPE "1X";SERNUMBER
"N/A";:CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN
1.0000E+00;EXTUNITS "None";:CH1:LABEL:NAME
"";XPOS 5
;YPOS 5
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Description
This command sets or queries the selectable low-pass bandwidth
limit filter of the specified channel. The channel is specified by
x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This is
equivalent to selecting Bandwidth from the Vertical menu.
The query form of this command always returns the maximum
bandwidth of the channel.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:BANdwidth {TWEnty|ONEfifty|FULl|<NR3>}
122
Syntax 2
CH<x>:BANdwidth?
Arguments
•
TWEnty
This sets the upper bandwidth limit to 20 MHz.
•
ONEfifty
This sets the upper bandwidth limit to 150 MHz.
•
FIVe
This argument sets the upper bandwidth limit to 500 MHz.
•
FULl
This disables any optional bandwidth limiting. The specified
channel operates at its maximum attainable bandwidth.
•
<NR3>
This argument is a double-precision ASCII string. The
instrument rounds this value to an available bandwidth using
geometric rounding and then uses this value set the upper
bandwidth.
Example 1
CH1:BANdwidth TWEnty
This command sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz.
Example 2
CH2:BANdwidth?
For TDS5052 and TDS5054 instruments, this query might return
:CH2:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+06
This indicates that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2.
For TDS5104 instruments, this query might return
:CH2:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+09
This indicates that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2.
CH<x>:COUPling
Description
This command sets or queries the input attenuator coupling
setting for the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.
The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Coupling from the Vertical
menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:COUPling {AC|DC|GND}
123
Syntax 2
CH<x>:COUPling?
Arguments
•
AC
This sets the specified channel to AC coupling.
•
DC
This sets the specified channel to DC coupling.
•
GND
This sets the specified channel to ground. Only a flat,
ground-level waveform will be displayed.
Example 1
CH2:COUPling GND
This command sets channel 2 to ground.
Example 2
CH3:COUPling?
This query might return
:CH3:COUPling DC
This indicates that channel 3 is set to DC coupling.
124
CH<x>:DESKew
Description
This command sets or queries the deskew time for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Deskew from the Vertical Setup menu.
You can adjust the deskew time to add an independent, channelbased delay time to the delay (set by the horizontal position
control and common to all channels) from the common trigger
point to first sample taken for each channel. This lets you
compensate individual channels for different delays introduced
by their individual input hook ups.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:DESKew <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:DESKew?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the deskew time for this channel, ranging from -25 ns
to +25 ns with a resolution of 1 ps. Out-of-range values are
clipped.
Example 1
CH4:DESKew 5.0E-9
This command sets the deskew time for channel 4 to 5 ns.
Example 2
CH2:DESKew?
This query might return
:CH2:DESKEW 2.0000E-09
This indicates that the deskew time for channel 2 is set to 2 ns.
CH<x>:INVERT
Description
This command sets or queries the invert function for the
specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x
can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. When on, the invert
function inverts the waveform for the specified channel. This
command is equivalent to selecting On or Off for the Invert
function in the Vertical Setup control window.
125
Note: This command inverts the waveform for display purposes
only. The instrument does not use an inverted waveform for
triggers or trigger logic inputs.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:INVERT {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
CH<x>:INVERT?
Argument
•
OFF
This argument turns off the invert function for the specified
channel.
•
ON
This argument turns on the invert function for the specified
channel.
•
<NR1>
A 0 turns off the invert function; any other value turns on the
invert function.
Example 1
CH4:INVERT ON
This command inverts the waveform on channel 4.
Example 2
CH2:INVERT?
This query might return
:CH2:INVERT 0
This indicates that the invert function for channel 2 is off.
CH<x>:LABEL:NAMe
Description
This command sets or queries the label attached to the displayed
waveform for the specified channel. The channel is specified by
x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Label from the Vertical
menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:LABEL:NAMe <str>
126
Syntax 2
CH<x>:LABEL:NAMe?
Argument
•
<str>
This is an alphanumeric character string, ranging from 1
through 32 characters in length.
Example 1
CH2:LABEL:NAMe "Pressure"
This command changes the waveform label for the CH2
waveform to "Pressure".
Example 2
CH3:LABEL:NAMe?
This query might return
:CH3:LABEL:NAME "CH3"
This indicates that the waveform label for the CH 3 waveform is
"CH3".
CH<x>:LABEL:XPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the
label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified
channel) is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen. The
channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for twochannel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting
Label from the Vertical menu and either viewing or setting X
Pos.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:LABEL:XPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:LABEL:XPOS?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for
the selected channel is displayed, relative to the left edge of
the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0
through 500.
Example 1
CH3:LABEL:XPOS 50
127
This command moves the waveform label for the CH3 waveform
so that it begins 50 pixels to the right of the left edge of the
screen.
Example 2
CH2:LABEL:XPOS?
This query might return
:CH2:LABEL:XPOS 50
This indicates that the waveform label for the CH2 waveform is
currently 50 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
CH<x>:LABEL:YPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the
label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified
channel) is displayed, relative to the top edge of the screen. The
channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for twochannel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting
Label from the Vertical menu and either viewing or setting Y
Pos.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:LABEL:YPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:LABEL:YPOS?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for
the selected channel is displayed, relative to the top edge of
the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 to
385.
Example 1
CH3:LABEL:YPOS -25
This command moves the waveform label for the CH3 waveform
to just beneath (25 pixels below) the top of the screen.
Example 2
CH2:LABEL:YPOS?
This query might return
:CH2:LABEL:YPOS 0
This indicates that the waveform label for the CH2 waveform is
currently located just beneath the top of the screen.
128
CH<x>:OFFSet
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical offset for the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Offset from the Vertical menu.
This command offsets the vertical acquisition window (moves
the level at the vertical center of the acquisition window) for the
selected channel. Visualize offset as scrolling the acquisition
window towards the top of a large signal for increased offset
values, and scrolling towards the bottom for decreased offset
values. The resolution of the vertical window sets the offset
increment for this control.
Offset adjusts only the vertical center of the acquisition window
for channel waveforms to help determine what data is acquired.
The instrument always displays the input signal minus the offset
value. The channel reference marker will move to the vertical
graticule position given by the negative of the offset value
divided by the scale factor, unless that position is off-screen. If
the computed coordinate for the reference mark is off-screen, the
mark moves to the nearest screen limit and changes from a rightpointing arrow (→) to an arrow pointing in the appropriate offscreen direction.
The settable range of a channel offset is either ±100 V, ±10 V or
±1.0 V, depending on the vertical scale factor.
V ert i ca l S c al e Ad j us t F a ct o rs
When Internal scale adjust gain is:
Product of Offset range, probe gain and
transducer gain is:
From 0.001
to 0.1
±1.0 V
From 0.101
to 01.0
±10.0 V
From 1.01
to 100.0
±100.0 V
Note: The above table describes instrument behavior only when
no probe is attached, and when the external attenuation factor is
1.0.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>POSition
Syntax 1
CH<x>:OFFSet <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:OFFSet?
129
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the offset value for the specified channel, ranging
from -1.6 V through 1.6 V.
Example 1
CH3:OFFSet 2.0E-3
This command sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV.
Example 2
CH2:OFFSet?
This query might return
:CH4:OFFSET 1.0000E-03
This indicates that the offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV.
CH<x>:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the
specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x
can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. The position value is
applied to the signal before it is digitized. This command is
equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Vertical menu
and either viewing or setting Position.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the
waveform to move up, and decreasing the position value causes
the waveform to move down. Position adjusts only the display
position of a waveform, whether it is a channel, math, or
reference waveform. The position value determines the vertical
graticule coordinate at which input signal values, equal the
present offset setting for that channel, are displayed. For
example, if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2.0 and the offset
is set to 3.0, then input signals equal to 3.0 units are displayed
2.0 divisions above the center of the screen.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:OFFSet, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition,
MATH<x>:POSition
Syntax 1
CH<x>:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:POSition?
Argument
•
130
<NR3>
This is the position value, in divisions from the center
graticule, ranging from 8 to -8 divisions.
Example 1
CH2:POSition 1.3E+00
This command positions the Channel 2 input signal 1.3 divisions
above the center graticule.
Example 2
CH1:POSition?
This query might return
:CH1:POSITION -1.3000E+00
This indicates that the current position of Channel 1 is 1.3
divisions below the center graticule.
CH<x>:PRObe?
Description
This query-only command returns all information concerning the
probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is
specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Syntax
CH<x>:PROBE?
Example
CH2:PROBE?
This query might return, for a 10x probe,
:CH2:PROBE:GAIN 1.0000E-01; RESISTANCE
1.0000E+07;UNITS "V";ID:TYPE "10X"'SERNUMBER
"N/A"
This indicates that (among other parameters) the attenuation
factor for the probe attached to channel 2 is 100.0 mV (assuming
that probe units are set to volts).
131
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Description
This query-only command returns the probe calibration state for
the selected channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of
x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Probe Cal from the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
Syntax
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Outputs
•
FAIl
This signifies that the probe calibration has failed for the
selected channel.
•
INIT
This signifies that the probe calibration has not yet been run
for the selected channel.
•
PASS
This signifies the probe calibration has passed for the
selected channel.
Example
CH2:PROBECal?
This query might return
:CH2:PROBECAL PASS
This indicates that the probe calibration has passed for channel 2.
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?
Description
This query-only command returns the gain factor of the probe
that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified
by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. The
"gain" of a probe is the output divided by the input transfer ratio.
For example, a common 10x probe has a gain of 0.1.
Group
Vertical
132
Related Commands
CH<x>:SCAle
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?
Example
CH2:PRObe:GAIN?
This query might return :CH2:PROBE:GAIN 0.1000E+00,
indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0.1 V to the
channel 2 BNC for every 10 V applied to the probe input.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Description
This query-only command returns the type and serial of the
probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is
specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Example
CH2:PRObe:ID?
This query might return :CH2:PROBE:ID:TYPE
"10X";SERNUMBER "N/A", indicating that a passive 10x probe
of unknown serial number is attached to channel 2.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe?
Description
This query-only command returns the type of probe that is
attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.
The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. Level 2
(or higher) probes supply their exact product nomenclature; for
Level 0 or 1 probes, a generic 'type string' of "nnX" is returned.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe?
Example
CH1:PRObe:ID:TYPe?
133
This query might return :CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE "P6203",
indicating that P6203-type probe is attached to channel 1.
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Description
This query-only command returns the serial number of the probe
that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified
by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
Note: For Level 0 and 1 probes, the serial number will be "N/A".
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Example
CH1:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
This query might return :CH1:PROBE:ID:SERNUMBER
"B010289", indicating that the serial number of the probe
attached to channel 1 is B010289.
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
Description
This query-only command returns the resistance factor of the
probe that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is
specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
Example
CH2:PRObe:RESistance?
This query might return :CH2:PROBE:RESISTANCE
10.0000E+06, indicating that the input resistance of the probe
attached to Channel 2 is 10.0 MΩ.
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?
Description
This query-only command returns a string describing the units of
measure for the probe attached to the specified channel. The
channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
134
through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for twochannel instruments.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?
Example
CH4:PRObe:UNIts?
This query might return :CH4:PROBE:UNITS "V", indicating
that the units of measure for the probe attached to channel 4 are
volts.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTatten
Description
This command instructs the instrument when to make vertical
settings (offset and scale) effective for the specified channel. The
vertical settings become effective at the input of the external
network or transducer (of a specified input÷output transfer ratio)
when the output is connected to the input of the probe attached to
the channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can
range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through
2 for two-channel instruments.
There is also a corresponding query that returns the userspecified attenuation. Note that, as the name implies, this
command deals with an attenuation factor, not a gain factor,
unlike CH<x>:PRObe? (Note that this command returns a value
independent of the external attenuation). For example, if you
specify a 20x attenuation factor for channel 1, then the
commands return the following values (assuming that a 1x probe
is presently attached, since the external attenuation is used in
combination with the probe attenuation):
CH1:PRObe:EXTA?
CH1:PRObe?
20.00E+0
1.0E+0
This command is equivalent to selecting Attenuation from the
Vertical command and then viewing or setting Ext Atten.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten
Syntax 1
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTatten <NR3>
135
Syntax 2
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTatten?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the attenuation value, which is specified as a
multiplier in the range from 1.00E-10 to 1.00E+10.
Example 1
CH1:PROBEFunc:EXTatten 167.00E-3
This command specifies an external attenuation, which is
connected between the user's input signal and the input of the
probe attached to channel 1.
Example 2
CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTatten?
This query might return :CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN
1.0000E+00, indicating that the probe attached to channel 2 is
connected directly to the user's signal.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten
Description
This command instructs the instrument to make vertical scale
and offset settings for a specified channel effective at the input
of an external network or transducer (with a specified input ÷
output transfer ratio in decibels). It is assumed that the input of
the probe for the specified channel is connected to the output of
this network or transducer. The channel is specified by x. The
value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
There is also a corresponding query, which returns the userspecified attenuation, in decibels. Note that 1X = 0 dB, 10X = 20
dB, 100X = 40 dB etc.
This command is equivalent to selecting Attenuation from the
Vertical menu and then either viewing or setting Ext Att(dB).
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTatten
Syntax 1
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten?
Argument
•
136
<NR3>
This is the attenuation value, which is specified in the range
from -200.00 to 200.00 dB.
Example 1
CH3:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten 2.5
This command specifies an external 2.5 dB attenuator on channel
3.
Example 2
CH1:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten?
This query might return :CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEEN
2.5000E+00, indicating that the attenuation for channel 1 is 2.5
dB.
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
Description
This command sets the unit of measurement for the external
attenuator of the specified channel. The channel is specified by
x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. There is
also a corresponding query that returns the user-specified unit of
measurement for the external attenuator. Unless these units are
set to the factory default string value of "None", they become the
attenuated units of measurement for that channel. It is assumed
that the probe connected to the specified channel is of the correct
type to receive the output of the user's external transducer or
network.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PRObe:UNITS
Syntax 1
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits <str>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits?
Argument
•
<str>
This can contain a string of up to eight characters to indicate
the attenuation unit of measurement for the specified
channel. However, most instrument attenuators only display
the first two characters.
Example 1
CH4:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits "Pa"
137
This command sets the unit of measurement for the Channel 4
external attenuator.
Example 2
CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits?
This query might return :CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS "Pa",
indicating that the Channel 2 external attenuator units of
measurement are pascals.
CH<x>:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments. Sending this command is equivalent to
selecting Vertical Setup from the Vertical menu and then
viewing or setting the Scale.
Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter. For a signal with
constant amplitude, increasing the Scale causes the waveform to
be displayed smaller. Decreasing the scale causes the waveform
to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms, but affects channel waveforms
differently from other waveforms:
•
For channel waveforms, this setting controls the vertical size
of the acquisition window as well as the display scale. The
range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe
attached and any other external factors you have specified.
•
For reference and math waveforms, this setting controls the
display only, graphically scaling these waveforms and
having no affect on the acquisition hardware.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>OFFSet, CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle,
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Syntax 1
CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:SCAle?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the vertical channel scale in units per division.
138
Example 1
CH4:SCAle 100E-03
This command sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division.
Example 2
CH2:SCAle?
This query might return :CH2:SCALE 1.0000E+00, indicating
that the current scale setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division.
CH<x>:TERmination
Description
This command sets the connected/disconnected status of a 50 Ω
resistor, which may be connected between the specified
channel's coupled input and instrument ground. The channel is
specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments. There is also a corresponding query that requests
the termination parameter and translates this enumeration into
one of the two float values. This command is equivalent to
selecting Termination from the Vertical menu or toggling
between termination values from the VERTICAL area of the
front panel.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:TERmination <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:TERmination?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the channel input resistance, which can be
specified as 50 or 1,000,000 Ω.
Example 1
CH4:TERmination 50.0E+0
This command establishes 50 Ω impedance on channel 1.
Example 2
CH2:TERmination?
This query might return :CH2:TERMINATION 50.0E+0,
indicating that channel 2 is set to 50 Ω impedance.
139
CMDBatch
Description
This command sets or queries the state of command batching. By
batching commands, database transactions can be optimized,
increasing command throughput. Also, batching allows for ALL
commands in an individual batch to be order independent and
accomplish the same result as if the commands were coupled.
The Batch state is persistent and will be saved across power
cycles, but will not be saved and recalled as part of a setup. In a
setup scenario, the factory initial value is enabled.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax 1
CMDBatch {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
CMDBatch?
Arguments
•
OFF
This turns command batching off.
•
ON
This turns command batching on.
•
<NR1>
A 0 turns command batching off; any other value turns
command batching on.
Example 1
CMDBatch OFF
This command disables command batching.
Example 2
CMDBatch?
This query might return :CMDBATCH 1, indicating that
command batching is turned on.
CURSor?
Description
This query-only command returns all of the current cursor
settings.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor?
140
Example: CURSOR?
This query might return the following as the current cursor
settings:
:CURSOR:STATE OFF;FUNCTION VBARS;MODE
INDEPENDENT
;SOURCE CH1;VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1 8.0000E-07
;POSITION2 8.0000E-07;:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1
3.0000E-01
;POSITION2 -3.0000E-01;UNITS BASE;:CURSOR:PAIRED
:POSITION1 -8.0000E-07;POSITION2 8.0000E07;UNITS BASE;
:CURSOR:SPLIT:POSITION1 -8.0000E-07;POSITION2
8.0000E-07
;SOURCE2 CH1;UNITS BASE
CURSor:FUNCtion
Description
This command selects or queries the cursor type. Sending this
command is equivalent to selecting Cursor Type from the
Cursors menu, and then choosing from the drop-down list.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:STAte
Syntax 1
CURSor:FUNCtion {HBArs|OFF|VBArs|PAIred|SPLit}
Syntax 2
CURSor:FUNCtion?
Arguments
•
HBArs
Specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical
units.
•
OFF
Removes the cursors from the display but does not change
the cursor type.
•
VBArs
Specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal
units.
•
PAIred
Specifies paired cursors, which measure in both horizontal
and vertical units.
•
SPLit
Specifies split cursors, which measure horizontal and
141
vertical units across two waveforms.
Example 1
CURSOR:FUNCtion VBARS
This command selects vertical bar type cursors.
Example 2
CURSOR:FUNCtion?
This query might return
:CURSOR:FUNCTION HBARS
This indicates that the horizontal bar cursors are currently
selected.
CURSor:HBArs?
Description
This query-only command returns the current settings for the
horizontal bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs?
Example
CURSor:HBArs?
This command might return the horizontal bar setting as
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 320.0000E-03;POSITION2320.0000E-03;UNITS BASE
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical difference
between the two horizontal bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Returns
<NR3>
Example
CURSOR:HBArs:DELTa?
This command might return :CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA
5.0800E+00, indicating that the voltage difference between the
two cursors is 5.08 V.
142
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Description
This command specifies or queries the horizontal bar cursor
position relative to ground, which is expressed in vertical units
(usually volts). This command is the equivalent of selecting
Cursor Position from the Cursors menu, selecting the H Bars
Cursor Type and then viewing or editing the desired cursor
position.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
Syntax 2
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?
Argument
•
<NR3>
Specifies the cursor position relative to ground.
Example 1
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3
This command positions one of the horizontal cursors at 25 mV.
Example 2
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2?
This query might return :CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2 64.0000E-03, indicating that one of the horizontal bar cursors
is at -64 mV.
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Description
This query-only command returns the units for the horizontal bar
cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Example
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
This query might return :CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE
indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base.
143
CURSor:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries whether the two cursors move
together in unison or separately. This command is the equivalent
of selecting Cursor Mode from the Cursors menu and then
choosing from the drop-down list.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:MODe {TRACk|INDependent}
Syntax 2
CURSor:MODe?
Arguments
•
TRACk
This ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors
together.
For cursor 1 adjustments, this ties the movement of the two
cursors together. However, cursor 2 continues to move
independently of cursor 1.
•
INDependent
This frees the two cursors to be independently adjusted.
Example 1
CURsor:MODe TRACk
This command specifies that the cursor positions move in
unison.
Example 2
CURSor:MODe?
This query might return :CURSOR:MODE TRACK indicating that
the two cursors move in unison.
CURSor:PAIred
Description
This command positions the active paired cursors to the position
defined by the DATa:STARt or DATa:STOP command. This
query returns the current paired cursor settings.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP
144
Syntax 1
CURSor:PAIred SNAp
Syntax 2
CURSor:PAIred?
Arguments
•
SNAp
This positions the paired cursors at DATa:STARt and
DATa:STOP.
Returns
A string for horizontal units and two floating point values with
an exponent for cursors1 position and cursors2 position.
Example 1
CURsor:PAIred SNAp
Specifies the positions of the cursors at the current DATa:STARt
and DATa:STOP values.
Example 2
CURSor:PAIred?
This query might return :CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1 2.0000E-03;POSITION2 2.0000E-03;UNITS BASE
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical difference
between the cursors1 and cursors2 paired cursors. This is the
absolute value of the vertical position for cursors1 minus the
vertical position for cursors2.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:SPLit:HDELTA?
Syntax
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?
Returns
<NR3>
Example
CURSor:PAIred:HDELTA?
This query might return :CURSOR:PAIRED:HDELTA
5.0800E+00, indicating that the voltage difference between the
two cursors is 5.08 V.
145
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS<x>?
Description
This query-only command returns the voltage at the vertical
position of the cursor<x> paired cursor. The paired cursor can be
either 1 or 2.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS<x>?
Returns
A floating point value that indicates the vertical position of the
selected paired cursor.
Example
CURSor:PAIred:HPOS1?
This query might return :CURSOR:PAIRED:HPOS1 64.0000E-03, indicating that the vertical position of cursors1 is
at -64 mV.
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal position (typically
in time) of the cursor<x> paired cursor. The paired cursor can be
either 1 or 2. This command is equivalent to selecting Cursor
Position from the Cursors menu and then viewing or editing the
desired cursor position.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax 1
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x> <NRf>
Syntax 2
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>?
Argument
•
<NRf>
This specifies the horizontal position of the cursor<x> paired
cursor, which ranges from 1 to 2. The cursor position can
appear in units of base or 1/base.
146
Example 1
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION1 9.0000E-06
This command specifies that the first paired cursor is at 9 µs.
Example 2
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION1?
This query might return :CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION
1.0000E-06, indicating that the first paired cursor is at 1 µs.
CURSor:PAIred:UNIts?
Description
This query-only command requests the units for the paired
cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:PAIred:UNIts?
Returns
The unit of measurement.
Example
CURSor:PAIred:UNIts?
This query might return: :CURSOR:PAIRED:UNITS BASE,
indicating that base is the unit of measurement.
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?
Description
This query-only command requests the time distance between
paired cursors. It returns the absolute value of the first cursor less
the second cursor horizontal positions. The position can appear
in units of base and 1/base.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?
Returns
<NR3>
Example
CURSor:PAIred:VDELTA?
This query might return :CURSOR:PAIRED:VDELTA
1.0640E+00, indicating that time between the paired cursors is
1.064 s.
147
CURSor:SOUrce
Description
This command sets and queries the source for horizontal bar,
vertical bar and paired cursors, and both sets and queries the
source for split cursor1. This command is equivalent to selecting
Cursor Setup from the Cursors menu and then choosing the
desired cursor source.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:SPLit:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
CURSor:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
CURSor:SOUrce?
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The valid channel
waveform range is from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel-instruments.
•
MATH<x>
This is a math waveform. The valid math waveform range is
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two channel-instruments.
•
REF<x>
This is a reference waveform. The valid reference waveform
range is from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two channel-instruments.
Returns
Any valid waveform.
Example 1
CURSor:SOUrce CH2
This command sets the cursor source to channel2.
Example 2
CURSor:SOUrce?
This query might return :CURSOR:SOURCE CH2, indicating that
the cursor source is channel2.
148
CURSor:SPLit
Description
This command positions the split cursors to positions defined by
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP (or maximum record length, if
DATa:STOP is greater than the maximum record length). The
query form of this command returns the units, positions, and
second source of the split cursors.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP
Syntax 1
CURSor:SPLit SNAP
Syntax 2
CURSor:SPLit?
Argument
•
SNAP
This specifies that the vertical bar cursor positions will snap
to the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.
Example 1
CURSor:SPLit SNAP
This command specifies that the cursor positions will snap to
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP positions.
Example 2
CURSor:SPLit?
This query might return: :CURSOR:SPLIT:POSITION1 1.9992E+01
:POSITION2 -1.7996E+01;SOURCE2 CH1;UNITS BASE.
CURSor:SPLit:HDELTA?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical (volts) difference
between cursor1 and cursor2. These values are represented on
screen by the "X" markers (placed where the cursor marker and
the waveform intersect).
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:SPLit:HDELTA?
149
Example
CURSor:SPLit:HDELTA?
This query might return :CURSOR:SPLIT:HDELTA
3.1400E+00, indicating that the vertical difference between two
split cursors is 3.14 V.
CURSor:SPLit:HPOS<x>?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical position of
cursor<x> (that point where the Vbar intersects with the
waveform), which can be specified as 1 or 2.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:SPLit:HDELTA
Syntax
CURSor:SPLit:HPOS<x>?
Example
CURSor:SPLit:HPOS1?
This query might return :CURSOR:SPLIT:HPOS1 2.5400E+00,
indicating that the vertical position of cursor1 and cursor2 is
2.54 V.
CURSor:SPLit:POSITION<x>
Description
This command returns or sets the horizontal position of the
cursor<x> vertical bar markers. The value of x can be 1 or 2.
This command is equivalent to selecting Cursor Setup from the
Cursors menu and then entering the desired Cursor Position.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:SPLit:POSITION<x>; <NRf>
Syntax 2
CURsor:SPLit:POSITION<x>?
Argument
•
<NRf>
This specifies the horizontal position of the cursor<x>
cursor, which ranges from 1 to 2. The cursor position can
appear in units of base or 1/base.
150
Example 1
CURSor:SPLit:POSITION2 350E-6
This command sets the position of cursor2 to 350 µs.
Example 2
CURSor:SPLit:POSITION1?
This query might return :CURSOR:SPLIT:POSITION1 204.0000E-09, indicating the position of cursor1 is 204 ns.
CURSor:SPLit:SOURCE2
This command sets or returns the source waveform associated
with split cursor2. This command is equivalent to selecting
Cursor Setup from the Cursors menu and then entering the
desired cursor 2 Source.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:SOUrce
Syntax 1
CURSor:SPLit:SOURCE2
Syntax 2
CURsor:SPLit:SOURCE2?
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This is an input channel. The valid channel waveform range
is from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments.
•
MATH<x>
This is a math waveform. The valid math waveform range is
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two-channel instruments.
•
REF<x>
This is a reference waveform. The valid reference waveform
range is from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments.
Example 1
CURSor:SPLit:SOURCE2 CH3
This command sets cursor2 source to Channel3.
Example 2
CURSor:SPLit:SOURCE2?
This query might return :CURSOR:SPLIT:SOURCE2 MATH2,
indicating that the source associated with cursor2 is Math2.
151
CURSor:SPLit:UNIts
Description
This command returns or sets the amplitude units of the split
cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:SPLit:UNIts
Syntax 2
CURsor:SPLit:UNIts?
Example 1
CURSor:SPLit:UNIts BASE
This command sets the amplitude units of the split cursors to
base.
Example 2
CURSor:SPLit:UNIts?
This query might return :CURSOR:SPLIT:UNITS BASE,
indicating that base is the current setting for split cursor
amplitude units.
CURSor:SPLit:VDELTA?
Description
This command returns the horizontal (time) difference between
the split cursors. It returns the absolute value of the first cursor
less the second cursor horizontal positions. Note that the split
cursor values are for source1 and source2, and the sources can be
located on different waveforms. The position can appear in units
of base and 1/base.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURsor:SPLit:VDELTA?
Example
CURSor:SPLit:VDELTA?
This command might return :CURSOR:SPLIT:VDELTA
1.0640E+00, indicating that the time between the vertical bar
cursors is 1.064 s.
152
CURSor:STATE
Description
This command sets or returns the state of the cursor. The cursor
can either be turned on or off. Note that setting the cursor state
does not modify the cursor type. This command is equivalent to
pressing the CURSOR button on the front panel.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:FUNCtion OFF
Syntax 1
CURSor:STATE {ON|OFF}
Syntax 2
CURsor:STATE?
Arguments
•
ON
This displays the cursor.
•
OFF
This removes the cursor from display.
Example 1
CURSor:STATE ON
This command displays the cursor.
Example 2
CURSor:STATE?
This query might return :CURSOR:STATE ON, indicating that
the cursor is active on the display.
CURSor:VBArs
Description
This command positions the vertical bar cursor to the position
defined by DATa:STARt or DATa:STOP. This query returns the
current vertical bar settings for horizontal position and units.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP
Syntax 1
CURSor:VBArs?
153
Syntax 2
CURSor:VBArs SNAp
Argument
•
SNAp
This positions the vertical bar cursors at DATa:STARt and
DATa:STOP.
Example 1
CURSor:VBArs?
This query might return :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS
;POSITION1 1.0000E-06;POSITION2 9.0000E-06
Example 2
CURSor:VBArs SNAp
This command positions the vertical bar cursor to the position
defined by DATa:STARt or DATa:STOP.
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Description
This query-only command returns the difference between the
two vertical bar cursors. The units are specified by the
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command. The position can appear in
units of Base or 1/Base.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Returns
A floating point value with an exponent.
Example
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
This command might return :CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA
1.0640E+00, indicating that the time between the vertical bar
cursors is 1.064 s.
154
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal position for both
vertical bar and paired cursors. Values are with respect to trigger
position or the zero reference point for the designated waveform
(if horizontal units are not set to time). Use the
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command to specify units. The position
can appear in units of base or 1/base.
This command is the equivalent of selecting Cursor Setup from
the Cursors menu, selecting the V Bars Cursor Type and then
viewing or editing the desired cursor position.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Syntax 1
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> <NRf>
Syntax 2
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?
Argument
<NRf>
Specifies the cursor position.
Returns
A floating point value with an exponent.
Example 1
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION2 9.00E-6
Positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursors at 9 ms.
Example 2
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION1?
This command might return :CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1
1.0000E-06, indicating the cursor1 vertical bar is at 1 ms.
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Description
This command sets or queries the units for the vertical bar
cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
155
Syntax 2
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
Arguments
•
SECOnds
This argument sets the units of the VBArs for the time
domain (seconds).
•
HERtz
This argument sets the units of the VBArs for the frequency
domain (hertz).
Returns
A string for SECOnds or HERtz, depending upon current vertical
bar cursor units.
Example 1
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts HERtz
Sets the units of the VBArs cursors to 1/seconds.
Example 2
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
This command might return :CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS
SECONDS, indicating that the units for the vertical bar cursor are
currently set to seconds.
CURVe
Description
This command transfers waveform data to and from the
instrument. Each waveform that is transferred has an associated
waveform preamble that contains information such as data
format and scale.
The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data
source is specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The first and
last data points are specified by the DATa:STARt and
DATa:STOP commands.
The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the
instrument. The data is stored in the reference memory location
specified by DATa:DESTination, starting with the data point
specified by DATa:STARt. Only one waveform can be
transferred at a time. The waveform will only be displayed if the
reference is displayed.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt,
DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre,
156
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Syntax 1
CURVe {<Block>|<asc curve>}
Syntax 2
CURVe?
Arguments
•
<Block>
This is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is
formatted as: #<x><yyy><data><newline>, where
<x> is the number of y bytes. For example, if <yyy>=500,
then <x>=3)
<yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer. If width is 1, then
all bytes on the bus are single data points. If width is 2, then
all bytes on the bus are 2-byte pairs. If width is 4, then all
bytes on the bus are 4-byte pairs. Use the
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr command to set the width.
<data> is the curve data.
<newline> is a single byte new line character at the end of
the data.
•
<asc curve>
This is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for
ASCII data is <NR1>[,<NR1>…], where each <NR1>
represents a data point.
Example 1
CURVe?
This query with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10
respectively, and a width set to 1 might return :CURVE
61,62,61,60,60,-59,-59,-58,-58,-59
Example 2
CURVe <Block>
This command sets the format of the waveform data, transferred
to and from the instrument, to binary format.
157
DATa
Description
This command sets or queries the format and location of the
waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, DATa:ENCdg
SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat,
WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Syntax 1
DATa {INIT|SNAp}
Syntax 2
DATa?
Argument
•
INIT
This initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory
defaults.
•
SNAp
This sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the
current V Bar/Paired/Split cursor positions.
Example 1
DATa?
This query might return :DATA:DESTINATION REF1:ENCDG
RIBINARY;SOURCE CH1;START 1;STOP 500
Example 2
DATa INIT
This command initializes the waveform data parameters to their
factory defaults.
DATa:DESTination
Description
This command sets or queries the reference memory location for
storing waveform data that is transferred into the instrument by
the CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
158
Related Commands
CURVe
Syntax 1
DATa:DESTination REF<x>
Syntax 2
DATa:DESTination?
Argument
•
REF<x>
This is the reference where the waveform will be stored. The
reference number is specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 4.
Example 1
DATa:DESTination?
This query might return :DATA:DESTINATION REF3,
indicating that reference 3 is the currently selected reference
memory location for waveform data.
Example 2
DATa:DESTination REF1
This command indicates that incoming waveform data be stored
in reference 1.
DATa:ENCdg
Description
This command sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform
data. This command is equivalent to setting
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, and
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or. Setting the DATa:ENGdg value causes
the corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and visa
versa.
Note: Values are constrained (for outbound data) to the format
of the data specified by DATa:SOUrce.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt,
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Syntax 1
DATa:ENCdg
{ASCIi|FAStest|RIBinary|RPBinary|FPBinary|SRIbin
ary|SRPbinary|SFPbinary}
Syntax 2
DATa:ENCdg?
159
Argument
•
ASCIi
This specifies the ASCII representation of signed INT,
FLOAT. If ASCII is the value, then :BN_Fmt and :BYT_Or
are ignored.
•
FAStest
This specifies that the data be sent in the fastest possible
manner consistent with maintaining accuracy and is
interpreted with respect to the first waveform specified in the
DATA:SOUrce list.
:ENCdg will always be BIN, :BYT_Or will always be LSB,
but :BN_Fmt and :BYT_Nr will depend on the first
DATa:SOUrce waveform. :BN_Fmt will be RI unless the
waveform is internally stored as a floating point number, in
which case the FP format will be used.
•
RIBinary
This specifies signed integer data point representation with
the most significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range is from -128 through 127.
When :BYT_Nr is 2, the range is from -32,768 through
32,767. When :BYT_Nr is 8, then the waveform being
queried has been set to Fast Acquisition mode. Center screen
is 0 (zero). The upper limit is one division above the top of
the screen and the lower limit is one division below the
bottom of the screen. This is the default argument.
•
RPBinary
This specifies the positive integer data-point representation,
with the most significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through 255. When
:BYT_Nr is 2, the range is from 0 to 65,535. When
:BYT_Nr is 8, then the waveform being queried has been set
to Fast Acquisition mode. The center of the screen is 127.
The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen
and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the
screen.
•
FPBinary
This specifies the floating point (width = 4) data.
The range is from -3.4 × 1038 to 3.4 × 1038. The center of the
screen is 0. The upper limit is one division above the top of
the screen and the lower limit is one division below the
bottom of the screen.
The FPBinary argument is only applicable to math
waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math waveforms.
160
•
SRIbinary
This is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is
swapped, meaning that the least significant byte is
transferred first. This format is useful when transferring data
to IBM compatible PCs.
•
SRPbinary
This is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is
swapped, meaning that the least significant byte is
transferred first. This format is useful when transferring data
to PCs.
•
SFPbinary
This specifies floating point data in IBM PC format.
The SFPbinary argument only works on math waveforms or
ref waveforms saved from math waveforms
D AT a an d W FM O UT PR E P a r a m et e r S et t i n g s
DATa:ENCdg Setting
ASCii
FAStext
RIBinary
RPBinary
FPBinary
SRIbinary
SRPbinary
SFPbinary
:ENCdg
ASC
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
WFMOUTPRE Settings
:BN_Fmt
:BYT_Or
N/A
N/A
RI/FP
MSB
RI
MSB
RP
MSB
FP
MSB
RI
LSB
RP
LSB
FP
LSB
:BYT_NR
1, 2, 4, 8
1, 2, 4
1, 2, 8
1, 2, 8
4
1, 2, 8
1, 2, 8
4
Example 1
DATa:ENCdg?
This query might return :DATa:ENCDG SRPBINARY for the
format of the outgoing waveform data.
Example 2
DATa:ENGdg RPBinary
This command sets the data encoding format to be a positive
integer where the most significant byte is transferred first.
DATa:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the location of waveform data that
is transferred from the instrument by the CURVe? Query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe?
161
Syntax 1
DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<,><wfm>]
Syntax 2
DATa:SOUrce?
Argument
•
<wfm>
This is the location of the waveform data that will be
transferred from the instrument to the controller.
Example 1
DATa:SOUrce?
This query might return :DATA:SOURCE REF3, indicating that
the source for the waveform data which is transferred using a
CURVe? Query sis reference 3.
Example 2
DATa:SOUrce CH1
This command specifies that the CH1 waveforms will be
transferred in the next CURVe? query.
DATa:STARt
Description
This command sets or queries the starting data point for
waveform transfer. This command allows for the transfer of
partial waveforms to and from the instrument.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt,
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Syntax 1
DATa:STARt <NR1>
Syntax 2
DATa:STARt?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the first data point that will be transferred, which
ranges from 1 to the record length. Data will be transferred
from <NR1> to DATa:STOP or the record length, whichever
is less. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, the last
data point in the record is transferred.
162
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent.
When DATa:STOP is greater than DATa:STARt, the values
will be swapped internally for the CURVE? query.
Example 1
DATa:STARt?
This query might return :DATA:START 214, indicating that data
point 214 is the first waveform data point that will be transferred.
Example 2
DATa:STARt 10
This command specifies that the waveform transfer will begin
with data point 10.
DATa:STOP
Description
This command sets or queries the last data point that will be
transferred when using the CURVe? query. This command
allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to the controller.
Changes to the record length value are not automatically
reflected in the data:stop value. As record length is varied, the
data:stop value must be explicitly changed to ensure the entire
record is transmitted. In other words, curve results will not
automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if
the distance from data:start to data:stop stays smaller than the
increased record length.
Note: When using the CURVe command, DATa:STOP is
ignored and WFMInpre:NR_Pt is used.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt,
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Syntax 1
DATa:STOP <NR1>
Syntax 2
DATa:STOP?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the last data point that will be transferred, which
ranges from 1 to the record length. If <NR1> is greater than
the record length, then data will be transferred up to the
record length. If both DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are
163
greater than the record length, the last data point in the
record is returned.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent.
When DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the values
will be swapped internally for the CURVE? query.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, set
DATa:STARt to 1 and DATa:STOP to the maximum record
length, or larger.
Example 1
DATa:STOP?
This query might return :DATA:STOP 14900, indicating that
14900 is the last waveform data point that will be transferred.
Example 2
DATa:STOP 15000
This command specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at
data point 15000.
DATe
Description
This command sets or queries the date that the instrument can
display. This command is equivalent to selecting Set Date &
Time from the Utilities menu and then setting the fields in the
Date group box.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
TIMe
Syntax 1
DATe <Qstring>
Syntax 2
DATe?
Argument
•
<QString>
This is a date in the form "yyyy-mm-dd" where yyyy refers
to a four-digit year number, mm refers to a two-digit month
number from 01 to 12, and dd refers to a two-digit day
number in the month.
Example 1
DATE "2000-01-24"
This command specifies that the date is set to January 24, 2000.
164
Example 2
DATE?
This query might return :DATE 2000-01-24, indicating the
current date is set to January 24, 2000.
DELEte:SETUp
Description
This command (no query form) changes the setup to reference
the factory setup instead of the specific user setup slot. The
content of the setup slot is unchanged, but the data will no longer
be accessible to you. This command is equivalent to selecting
Instrument Setup from the File menu, choosing the Delete Setups
tab, and then clicking the Delete button for the specific setup you
want to delete (or delete all).
Note: The setup information cannot be recovered once it has
been deleted.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
*RCL?, RECall:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp, *SDS
Syntax
DELEte:SETUp {ALL|<NR1>}
Arguments
•
ALL
This argument deletes all the stored setups.
•
<NR1>
This argument specifies a setup storage location to delete.
Setup storage location values range from 1 through 10; using
an out-of-range value causes an error.
Example
DELEte:SETUp ALL
This command deletes all stored setups. All ten storage locations
are initialized to the factory default setup.
DELEte:WAVEform
Description
This command (no query form) deletes one or all stored
reference waveforms from memory. This command is equivalent
to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu and
choosing Reference Setup from the drop-down list (when
deleting individual reference waveforms) or selecting Delete All
Refs from the File menu (when deleting all reference
waveforms).
165
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
RECAll:WAVEform, Save:WAVEform
Syntax
DELEte:WAVEform {ALL|REF<x>}
Arguments
•
ALL
This specifies to delete all the stored reference waveforms.
•
REF<x>
This specifies to delete one of the reference memory
locations. Reference memory location values range from 1
through 4.
Example 1
DELEte:WAVEform ALL
This command removes all waveforms stored in reference
memory.
Example 2
DELEte:WAVEform REF2
This command removes the waveform stored at REF2.
DESE
Description
This command sets and queries the bits in the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER). The DESER is the mask that
determines whether events are reported to the Standard Event
Status Register (SESR), and entered into the Event Queue. For a
more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see
Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, *EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax 1
DESE <NR1>
Syntax 2
DESE?
Argument
•
<NR1>
The binary bits of the DESER are set according to this value,
166
which ranges from 1 through 255. For example, DESE 209
sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 (that is, the
most significant bit in the register is set to 1, the next most
significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0, etc.).
The power-on default for DESER is all bits set if *PSC is 1.
If *PSC is 0, the DESER maintains the previous power cycle
value through the current power cycle.
Note: Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value
allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue
and summarized on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte
Register. Use the *ESE command to set the ESER.
Example 1
DESE 209
This sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the
PON, URQ, EXE and OPC bits.
Example 2
DESE?
This query might return
:DESE 186,
This shows that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010.
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT
Description
This command (no query form) determines whether the next
execution of diagnostics will stop on the first diagnostic failure
that occurs or will execute the selected set of diagnostic
functions. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then enabling Halt on
Fail.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP
Syntax
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT (ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
•
ON
This enables the halt function, causing the execution of
diagnostics to halt at the first diagnostic failure that occurs.
•
OFF
This disables the halt function, allowing the oscilloscope to
execute the entire set of diagnostics before halting, even if
167
diagnostic failure occurs.
•
<NR1>
A 0 enables the halt function; any other value disables the
halt function.
Example
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT ON
This command enables the halt function, causing the execution
of diagnostics to halt at the first diagnostic failure that occurs.
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP
Description
This command (no query form) determines whether the next
execution of diagnostics executes once or continuously loops on
the selected set of diagnostics (assuming the halt control is set to
off using the DIAg:CONTROL:HALT command or that the halt
control is set to ON but no failures occur). This command is
equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities
menu and then enabling Loop Control.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT, DIAg:STOP
Syntax
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
•
ON
This enables the loop function, causing the execution of
diagnostics to continuously loop.
•
OFF
This disables the loop function, causing the oscilloscope to
execute the entire set of diagnostics once and then halt.
•
<NR1>
A 0 enables the loop function; any other value disables the
loop function.
Example
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP ON
This command enables the loop function.
168
DIAg:EXECUTE
Description
This command (no query form) starts the execution of the
currently selected set of diagnostics. This command is equivalent
to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and
then pressing Run.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:STATE
Syntax
DIAg:EXECUTE
Example
DIAg:EXECUTE
This command starts the execution of the entire set of
diagnostics.
DIAg:ITEM?
Description
This query-only command returns diagnostics settings. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from
the Utilities menu and then reviewing the diagnostics settings.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?, DIAg:ITEM:NAME?,
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?, DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM? <NR1>
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned,
which ranges from 0 through 15.
Example
DIAg:ITEM? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM "TRIGGER","FAIL",2,7
169
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?
Description
This query-only command returns the total number of failures.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics
from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic
Status.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:NAME?, DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?,
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES? <NR1>
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned,
which ranges from 0 through 15.
Example
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:FAILURES 2
This indicates the number of failures.
170
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe?
Description
This query-only command returns the name of the selected menu
item. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the
Subsystem, Area and Test settings.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?,
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?, DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe? <NR1>
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned,
which ranges from 0 through 15.
Example
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:NAME "TRIGGER"
This indicates that the selected menu item is Trigger.
171
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?
Description
This query-only command returns the result from the last
execution of the item. This command is equivalent to selecting
Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then
reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:NAMe?, DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?,
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? <NR1>
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned,
which ranges from 0 through 15.
Example 1
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:RESULT "PASS"
This indicates that the item passed during the last execution.
Example 2
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:RESULT "FAIL"
This indicates that the item failed during the last execution.
Example 3
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:RESULT "*****"
This indicates that the item was not run.
172
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of sub-items
associated with the item. This command is equivalent to
selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu,
choosing the Subsystem, Area or Test setting and then reviewing
the resulting sub-items.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:NAME?, DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?,
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? <NR1>
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned,
which ranges from 0 through 15.
Example
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:SUBITEMS 15
This indicates that there are 15 sub-items associated with the
selected item.
173
DIAg:LEVEL
Description
This command sets or returns the currently selected level of
diagnostic test hierarchy. This command is equivalent to
selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and
then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Group
Diagnostics
Syntax 1
DIAg:LEVEL (SUBSYS|AREA|TEST}
Syntax 2
DIAg:LEVEL?
Arguments
•
SUBSYS
This sets diagnostic testing to the subsystem level.
•
AREA
This sets diagnostic testing to the area level.
•
TEST
This sets diagnostic testing to the test level.
Example 1
DIAg:LEVEL AREA
This command sets the level of diagnostic test hierarchy to Area.
Example 2
DIAg:LEVEL?
This query might return
:DIAG:LEVEL SUBSYS
This indicates that the current level of diagnostic test hierarchy is
Subsys.
174
DIAg:LOOPS?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of times that the
selected diagnostics set was completed during the last diagnostic
execution. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the
Elapsed Loops.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Syntax
DIAg:LOOPS?
Example
DIAg:LOOPS?
This query might return
:DIAG:LOOPS 5
This indicates that the selected set of diagnostics was completed
five times during the last diagnostic execution.
DIAg:NAMe?
Description
This query-only command returns the names of the subsystem,
area, and test of the current diagnostic test.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?,
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Syntax
DIAg:NAMe?
Example
DIAg:NAMe?
This query might return
:DIAG:NAME:SUBSYS "Acquisition";AREA
"Memory";TEST"diag Data Format"
This indicates the subsystem name, area name, and test name of
the currently selected diagnostic test.
175
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
Description
This query-only command returns the selected area of the current
diagnostic test. There are three levels of diagnostic test
hierarchy: subsystem, area and test. This command is equivalent
to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and
then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Syntax
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
Example
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
This query might return
:DIAG:NAME:AREA "Memory"
This indicates the selected area name of the current diagnostic
test.
176
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
Description
This query-only command returns the subsystem of the current
diagnostic test. This command is equivalent to selecting
Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then
reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe?, DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Syntax
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
Example
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
This query might return
:DIAG:NAME:SUBSYS "Acquisition"
This indicates the subsystem name of the current diagnostic test.
177
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Description
This query-only command returns the name of the current
diagnostic test. This command is equivalent to selecting
Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then
reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe?, DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
Syntax
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Example
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
This query might return:
:DIAG:NAME:TEST "diagDataFormatConf"
This indicates the test name of the current diagnostic test.
DIAg:NUMITEMS?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of items on the
currently selected level of test hierarchy, which ranges from 1
hrough 15. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the
Diagnostic Status.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Syntax
DIAg:NUMITEMS?
Example
DIAg:NUMITEMS?
This query might return
:DIAG:NUMITEMS 7
This indicates the number of items on the currently selected level
of test hierarchy.
178
DIAg:RESULts?
Description
This query-only command returns an abbreviated status about
the results of the last diagnostic (or test) execution. For a more
explanatory status message, use the DIAg:RESULts:VERBose?
query. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the
Diagnostic Status.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:RESULts:VERBose?
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlts?
Example 1
DIAg:RESULts?
This query might return :DIAG:RESULTS "135", indicating
the specific failure code of the first test failure that occurred.
Example 2
DIAg:RESULts?
This query might return :DIAG:RESULTS "Pass",
indicating that the last diagnostic test passed.
Example 3
DIAg:RESULts?
This query might return
:DIAG:RESULTS "*****"
This indicates that the diagnostic test was not run.
179
DIAg:RESULts:VERBose?
Description
This query-only command returns a more explanatory message
about the results of the last diagnostic (or test) execution than the
DIAg:RESUlts? query. This command is equivalent to selecting
Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then
reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query-only command can be issued while diagnostics are
still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:RESUlts?
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlts:VERBose?
Example
DIAg:RESUlts:VERBose?
This query might return
:DIAG:RESULTS:VERBOSE "DIAG ABORTED, ERROR
15 in A2D-Dmux 1 interconnects"
DIAg:SELect:ALL
Description
This command (no query form) selects all available diagnostics.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics
from the Utilities menu and then choosing ALL from the
Subsystem, Area and Test pull-down lists.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?,
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?, DIAg:EXECUTE
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:ALL ALL
Example
DIAg:SELect:ALL ALL
This command selects all available diagnostics.
180
DIAg:SELect:AREA
Description
This command (no query form) selects one of the available
areas. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then selecting an Area
from the pull-down list.
Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL
is currently set to AREA.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS, DIAg:SELect:TEST,
DIAg:SELect:LAST
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:AREA <NR1>
Argument
•
<NR1>
This selects an area by number, which can range from 0
(zero selects all) through 15 (as specified by
DIAg:NUMITEMS).
Example
DIAg:SELect:AREA 1
This command selects Area 1 as the area to be diagnosed.
181
DIAg:SELect:LAST
Description
This command (no query form) selects one or more diagnostic
menu items to be executed via the DIAg:EXECUTE command.
If you specify DIAg:LEVEL SUBSYS, then menu items come
from this diagnostic level and are limited to the value returned
by the DIAg:NUMITEMS? query. For example, specifying
DIAg:SELECT:SUBSYS 2 and DIAg:NUMITEMS 5
indicates that diagnostics will start from subsystem 2 and that
you can specify a range from 2 through 5 for
DIAg:SELect:LAST.
If you enter:
DIAg:SELect:LAST 2, only subsystem 2 will be executed.
DIAg:SELect:LAST 4, subsystems 2 through 4 will be
executed.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:EXECUTE, DIAg:LEVEL, DIAg:NAMe:AREA?,
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?,
DIAg:NUMITEMS?, DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:LAST <NR1>
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This selects an integer that identifies the number of the last
item that will be executed when the DIAg:EXECUTE
command is run.
Example
DIAg:SELect:LAST 2
This command specifies that (based on the previous example)
only subsystem 2 will be executed.
182
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
Description
This command (no query form) selects one of the available
subsystems. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then choosing a
Subsystem from the drop-down list.
Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL
is currently set to SUBSYS.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:SELect:AREA, DIAg:SELect:TEST, DIAg:SELect:LAST
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS <NR1>
Argument
•
<NR1>
This selects a subsystem by number, which can range from 0
(zero selects ALL) through 15 (as specified by
DIAg:NUMITEMS).
Example
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
This command selects Subsystem 1 as the subsystem to be
diagnosed.
183
DIAg:SELect:TEST
Description
This command (no query form) selects one of the available tests.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics
from the Utilities menu and then choosing a Test from the dropdown list.
Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL
is currently set to TEST.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:SELect:AREA, DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS,
DIAg:SELect:LAST
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:TEST <NR1>
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This selects a test by number, which can range from 0 (zero
selects ALL) through 15 (as specified by
DIAg:NUMITEMS).
Example
DIAg:SELect:TEST 1
This command selects Test 1 as the test to be executed.
184
DIAg:STATE
Description
This command (no query form) changes the oscilloscope
operating state. Depending on the argument, diagnostics
capabilities are either turned on or off. This command is
equivalent to opening the DIAg:STATE dialog (ON) or closing
it (OFF).
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST:STOP
Syntax
DIAg:STATE {ON|OFF}
Arguments
•
ON
This puts the instrument into the state in which diagnostics
can be run. This argument is thrown automatically if either
the DIAg:EXECUTE or DIAg:TEST commands are
executed.
•
OFF
This disables diagnostics capabilities and returns the
oscilloscope to a normal operating state.
Example
DIAg:STATE OFF
This command turns off diagnostics capabilities and returns the
instrument to a normal operating state.
185
DIAg:STOP
Description
This command (no query form) causes diagnostics (or test)
execution to terminate at the end of the next low-level test. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from
the Utilities menu and then clicking Abort.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST:STOP
Syntax
DIAg:STOP
Example
DIAg:STOP
This command terminates diagnostics (or test) execution at the
end of the next low-level test.
DISplay?
Description
This query-only command returns the current display settings.
This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the
Display menu and then viewing the contents of each tab.
Group
Display Control
Syntax
DISplay?
Example
DISplay?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL;MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT;:DISPLAY:FILTER
SINX;FORMAT YT
;GRATICULE FULL;INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 6.0000E+01
;AUTOBRIGHT 1;SCREENSAVER 1;SCREENSAVERDELAY
28800,
:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE VECTORS;TRIGBAR
SHORT
;TRIGT 0;VARPERSIST 5.0000E-01
186
DISplay:CLOCk
Description
This command sets or queries the display of the date and time.
This is equivalent to selecting Display Date & Time from the
Display menu. The query form of this command returns an ON
(1) or an OFF (0).
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:CLOCk {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
DISplay:CLOCk?
Arguments
•
ON
This enables display of date and time.
•
OFF
This disables display of date and time.
•
<NR1>
A 0 disables display of date and time; any other value
enables display of date and time.
Example 1
DISplay:CLOCk ON
This command enables display of date and time.
Example 2
DISplay:CLOCk?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1
This indicates that the display of date and time is currently
enabled.
DISplay:COLOr?
Description
This query-only command returns the settings from the
PALETTE, MATHCOLOR and REFCOLOR commands. This is
equivalent to selecting Colors from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Syntax
DISplay:COLOr?
187
Arguments
None
Example
DISplay:COLOr?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL;MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT;REFCOLOR INHERIT
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte
Description
This command sets or queries the palette to be used for trace
display. This is equivalent to selecting Colors from the Display
menu and choosing from the displayed color palette options.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:COLOr, DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr,
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte
{NORMal|MONOGREEN|MONOGRAY|TEMPErature|SPECTral}
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte?
Arguments
•
NORMal
This colors traces according to their channel. This is the
default color palette.
•
MONOGREEN
This colors traces green, emulating a traditional instrument
color palette.
•
MONOGRAY
This colors traces gray, emulating a monochrome TDS series
instrument.
•
TEMPErature
All traces share a multicolored palette, where "intensity" is
represented by hue; blue for least frequently occurring
values, red for most frequently occurring values.
•
SPECTral
All traces share a multicolored palette, where "intensity" is
represented by hue; red for least frequently occurring values,
blue for most frequently occurring values.
188
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte MONOGRAY
This command sets the palette for all display types.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL
This indicates that the Normal color palette is currently selected,
which colors traces according to their channel.
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr
Description
This command sets or queries the color to be used for math
traces, either in the stnadard palette's nominal Math color, or
according to the color of the source waveform. This command is
equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and
then choosing the Colors tab.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:COLOr:PALETTE
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr {DEFAULT|INHERIT}
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr?
Arguments
•
DEFAULT
This sets color math traces in nominal palette math color,
which is red.
•
INHERIT
This sets color math traces in the source waveform color.
Math waveforms are drawn in the same color as their
primary source waveform.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr DEFAULT
This command sets the color math traces in the nominal palette
math color.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR INHERIT
189
This indicates that the primary source waveform color is used for
each math trace.
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr
Description
This command sets or queries the color to be used for reference
traces, either in the standard palette's nominal REF color or
according to the color of the source waveform. This command is
equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and
then choosing the Colors tab.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:COLOr:PALETTE
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr {DEFAULT|INHERIT}
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr?
Arguments
•
DEFAULT
This assigns color reference traces in nominal palette
reference color, which is off-white.
•
INHERIT
This assigns color reference traces in the source waveform
color.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr DEFAULT
This command assigns color reference traces in nominal palette
reference color, which is off-white.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:REFCOLOR INHERIT
This indicates that source waveform color is used for reference
traces.
190
DISplay:FILTer
Description
This command sets or queries the type of interpolation to use for
the display. Filtering only applies to normal-mode acquisition.
The DISplay:FILTer command also provides selection for
acquisition interpolation type. This command is equivalent to
selecting Waveform Interpolation from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:FILTer {LINEAr|SINX}
Syntax 2
DISplay:FILTer?
Arguments
•
LINEAr
This specifies linear interpolation, where acquired points are
connected with straight lines.
•
SINX
This specifies sin(x)/x interpolation, where acquired points
are fit to a curve.
Example 1
DISplay:FILTer SINX
This command specifies sine-curve interpolation, when
magnifying waveforms.
Example 2
DISplay:FILTer?
This query might return :DISPLAY:FILTER LINEAR,
indicating that straight-line interpolation is specified for
magnifying waveforms.
DISplay:FORMat
Description
This command sets or queries the display format. This command
is equivalent to selecting Format from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1 (Two-channel instruments)
DISplay:FORMat {YT|XY}
Syntax 2 (Four-channel instruments)
DISplay:FORMat {YT|XY|XYZ}
191
Syntax 3
DISplay:FORMat?
Arguments
•
YT
This sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is
the default mode.
•
XY
This argument displays one waveform against another. The
source pairs that make up an XY trace are predefined and are
listed in the following table. Selecting one source causes its
corresponding source to be implicitly selected, producing a
single trace from the two input waveforms.
XY F o rm at P ai r s
192
X-Axis Source
Y-Axis Source
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
(Four-channel models only)
Ch 4
(Four-channel models only)
Ref 1
Ref 2
Ref 3
(Four-channel models only)
Ref 4
(Four-channel models only)
•
XYZ
This agrument is available only for four-channel
instruments. The argument combines channel 1 and channel
2 for X and Y coordinates and uses channel 3 to provide the
intensity value for the sample. XYZ groups channels 1, 2
and 3 to form a single trace. Other channel, math, and
reference waveforms are turned off.
Note: Selecting XY or XYZ forces a switch to FASTAcq mode.
Example 1
DISplay:FORMat YT
This command selects a voltage versus time format for the
display.
Example 2
DISplay:FORMat?
This query might return :DISPLAY:FORMAT XYZ for the display
format, indicating that the display is in the XYZ mode.
DISplay:GRATicule
Description
This command selects or queries the type of graticule that is
displayed. This command is equivalent to selecting Graticule
Style from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:GRAticule
{CROSSHair|FRAme|FULl|GRId|IRE|MV|PAL}
Syntax 2
DISplay:GRAticule?
Arguments
•
CROSSHair
This specifies a frame and cross hairs.
•
FRAme
This specifies a frame only.
•
FULl
This specifies a frame, a grid and cross hairs.
•
GRId
This specifies a frame and grid only.
193
•
IRE
This specifies an IRE video graticule, and sets the vertical
scale to 143 mV per division. This graticule is used to
measure NTSC standard video signals.
•
MV
This specifies an mV video graticule and sets the vertical
scale to 143 mV per division. This graticule is used to
measure PAL standard video signals.
•
PAL
This specifies a PAL video graticule (same as the mV
graticule) and sets the vertical scale to 143 mV per division.
This graticule is used to measure PAL standard video
signals.
Example 1
DISplay:GRAticule FRAme
This command sets the graticule type to display the frame only.
Example 2
DISplay:GRAticule?
This query might return :DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL,
indicating that all graticule elements are selected.
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Description
This query-only command returns the waveform saturation level,
autobright state and screen saver settings. This command is
equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and
choosing the Appearance tab.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTPBright,
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform,
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER,
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Arguments
None
194
Example
DISplay:INTENSITy?
This query might return :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM
7.5000E+01; AUTOBRIGHT 1; SCREENSAVER 1;
SCREENSAVERDELAY 120
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright
Description
This command enables automatic, ongoing adjustment of the
intensity to display images. The query form returns a 1 (ON) or a
0 (OFF). This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup
from the Display menu and choosing the Appearance tab.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright?
Arguments
•
OFF
This argument allows the system to use the manually set
waveform intensity value against an absolute scale. The
display simulates the appearance of signals on an analog
oscilloscope. Waveforms that trigger more frequently appear
bighter than waveforms that trigger less frequently.
•
ON
This argument allows the system to adjust the settings
automatically to provide a visible waveform.
•
<NR1>
A 0 allows the system to use the manually-set waveform
intensity value against an absolute scale; any other value
allows the system to adjust settings.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright ON
This command allows the system to adjust settings using the
waveform intensity value and the pixel intensity found in the
acquired waveform.
195
Example 2
This query might return :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT
1, indicating that system adjustment of waveform intensity is
enabled.
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
Description
This command sets or queries the intensity saturation of the
waveforms. This command is equivalent adjusting the
INTENSITY knob on the front panel.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform <NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform?
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This is the waveform intensity and ranges from 10 to 100
percent.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform 100
This command sets the waveform intensity to 100 percent.
Example 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform?
This query might return :DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM
6.0000E+01, indicating that the intensity of the waveforms is
currently set to 60 percent.
196
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
Description
This command sets and queries the screen saver features of the
MS Windows operating system. When enabled, a delay timer
(set in seconds by the
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY command)
begins counting down. When this screen saver delay times out,
the screen low-power mode engages. This causes the LCD
backlight to switch off and clears both waveform and text
displays. Any control (front panel, mouse or keyboard) or touch
screen activity resets the delay timer and restores normal
instrument display. This command is equivalent to selecting
LCD Save Enabled from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER?
Arguments
•
OFF
This disables the screen saver feature.
•
ON
This enables the screen saver feature after the specified
screen saver delay seconds of control activity have passed.
•
<NR1>
A 0 disables the screen saver feature; a 1 enables the screen
saver protection features.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER OFF
This command disables the screen saver feature.
Example 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER 0, indicating that the
screen saver feature is disabled.
197
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY
Description
This command sets or queries the timeout of the screen saver
features of the display system. When enabled (after the specified
screen saver delay seconds of control activity and when the
screen saver feature is enabled) the instrument activates the
screen saver feature. Normal instrument displays are restored
and the delay timer is reset upon any control activity. The
instrument continues to acquire and process data normally while
in screen saver mode; only the display is disabled. This
command is equivalent to selecting Objects from the Display
menu and entering a time in the Delay field of the LCD
Backlight Timeout control.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY {<NR1>}
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY?
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This sets the screen saver timeout, which ranges from 30
through 28800 seconds.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY 120
This command sets the screen saver delay feature to activate
after 120 seconds of control inactivity.
Example 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY 300, indicating
that the screen saver delay feature is set to 300 seconds of
control inactivity.
198
DISplay:PERSistence
Description
This command sets or queries the persistence aspect of the
display. This affects the display only and is equivalent to
selecting Display Persistence from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:VARPersist
Syntax 1
DISplay:PERSistence {OFF|INFPersist|VARPersist}
Syntax 2
DISplay:PERSistence?
Arguments
•
OFF
This disables the persistence aspect of the display.
•
INFPersist
This sets a display mode where any pixels, once touched by
samples, remain set until cleared by a mode change.
•
VARPersist
This sets a display mode where set pixels are gradually
dimmed.
Example 1
DISplay:PERSistence VARPersist
This command sets the persistence aspect of the display to fade
set pixels according to the time set in the DISplay:VARPersist
command.
Example 2
DISplay:PERSistence?
This query might return :DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF,
indicating that the persistence aspect of the display is disabled.
199
DISplay:STYle
Description
This command sets or queries how the data is displayed for
normal and FastAcq modes. This command is equivalent to
selecting Display Style from the Display menu and choosing a
style.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:STYle {VECtors|DOTs|INTENSIFied}
Syntax 2
DISplay:STYle?
Arguments
•
VECtors
This connects adjacent data points. New points immediately
replace old ones.
•
DOTs
This displays individual data points. New points
immediately replace old ones.
•
INTENSIFied
This causes the display to show interpolated samples with
dark spaces (Only the "real" samples are displayed).
When FastAcq mode is enabled, intensified samples display
as dots. However, turning off FastAcq mode causes the
display style to snap back to its previous setting.
Example 1
DISplay:STYle VECtors
This command sets the display to connect adjacent data points.
Example 2
DISplay:STYle?
This query might return :DISPLAY:STYLE INTENSIFIED,
indicating that interpolated samples are not displayed.
200
DISplay:TRIGBar
Description
This command controls or queries the display of the trigger-level
indicator bar/s. Indicator bars show where the trigger voltage
level is set.
The instrument will only display the bar if the associated trigger
source is also displayed. If both a main and a delayed trigger are
displayed, then two bars will appear. One will accompany each
source. If a logic trigger is selected, then multiple bars may
appear. One will show the upper threshold and one will show the
lower threshold. This command is equivalent to selecting
Display Setup from the Display menu and then choosing the
Objects tab.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:TRIGBar {OFF|SHORt|LONG}
Syntax 2
DISplay:TRIGBar?
Arguments
•
OFF
This removes the trigger indicator bar from the display.
•
SHORt
This displays, as the indicator, a short arrow at the right side
of the graticule for each displayed trigger signal.
•
LONG
This displays, as the indicator, a horizontal line across the
width of the graticule for each displayed trigger signal.
Example 1
DISplay:TRIGBar LONG
This command sets the display to show a long trigger indicator
bar (or bars).
Example 2
DISplay:TRIGBar?
This query might return :DISPLAY:TRIGBAR OFF, indicating
that the indicator bar is removed from the display.
201
DISplay:VARPersist
Description
This command sets or queries persistence decay time, which is
the approximate decay time for a freshly struck persistence
sample. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup
from the Display menu, selecting the Appearance tab, and then
entering the desired Persist Time.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:PERSistence
Syntax 1
DISplay:VARPersist <NR3>
Syntax 2
DISplay:VARPersist?
Arguments
•
<NR3>
This indicates the persistence decay time setting in numeric
seconds. The persistence time ranges from 32 ms to 10 s.
Example 1
DISplay:VARPersist 5E-1
This command sets the persistence decay time to 500 ms.
Example 2
DISplay:VARPersist?
This query might return :DISPLAY:VARPERSIST 5.0000E01, indicating that persistence decay time is currently set to 500
ms.
EVENT?
Description
This query-only command returns an event code from the Event
Queue that provides information about the results of the last
*ESR? read. EVENT? also removes the returned value from the
Event Queue.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
202
Syntax
EVENT?
Example
EVENT?
This query might return :EVENT 110, showing that there was an
error in a command header.
EVMsg?
Description
This query-only command removes a single event code from the
Event Queue that is associated with the results of the last *ESR?
read and returns the event code along with an explanatory
message. For more information, see Event Handling.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
ALLEv?
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax
EVMsg?
Returns
The event code and message in the following format:
<Event Code><Comma><Qstring>[<Event
Code><Comma><Qstring>…]
<Qstring>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and
may be returned when a command error is detected by the
instrument. As much of the command will be returned as
possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the
<Message> and <Command> string combined. The command
string is right-justified.
Example
EVMsg?
This query might return :EVMSG 110, "Command header
error"
EVQty?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of event codes
that are in the Event Queue. This is useful when using the
ALLEv? query, since it lets you know exactly how may events
will be returned.
203
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg?
Syntax
EVQty?
Example
EVQty?
This query might return :EVQTY 3, indicating the number of
event codes in the Event Queue.
FACtory
Description
This command (no query form) resets the instrument to its
factory default settings. This command is equivalent to pressing
the DEFAULT SETUP button located on the front panel.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
*PSC, *RCL?, RECall:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
FACtory
Arguments
None
Example
FACtory
This command resets the instrument settings to factory defaults:
204
•
Clears the Event Status Enable Register.
•
Clears the Service Request Enable Register.
•
Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 2555.
•
Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE.
•
Purges all defined aliases.
•
Enables all Command Headers.
•
Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a "zero-length field."
•
Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations.
This command does not reset the following:
•
The state of the GPIB (IEEE Std 488.1-1987) interface.
•
The selected GPIB address.
•
Calibration data that affects device specifications.
•
Protected user data.
•
Stored settings.
•
The current password (if implemented).
FASTAcq?
Description
This query-only command returns the state of Fast Acquisitions.
This command is equivalent to pressing the FASTACQ button
on the front panel.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
FASTAcq?
Example
FASTAcq?
This query might return the following string for the current
acquisition parameters:
:FASTACQ:STATE 0
FASTAcq:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries the state of Fast Acquisitions. This
command is equivalent to the FASTACQ button on the front
panel.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax 1
FASTAcq:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
FASTAcq:STATE?
Arguments
•
ON
This enables Fast Acquisitions mode.
205
•
OFF
This disables Fast Acquisitions mode.
•
<NR1>
A 0 disables Fast Acquisitions mode; any other value
enables Fast Acquisitions mode.
Example 1
FASTAcq:STATE ON
This command enables the Fast Acquisitions mode.
Example 2
This query might return :FASTACQ:STATE 1, indicating that
Fast Acquisitions mode is currently active.
FILESystem?
Description
This query-only command returns the directory listing of the
current working directory. This query is the same as the
FILESystem:DIR? query.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:COPy, FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DELEte,
FILESystem:DIR?, FILESystem:PRInt, FILESystem:READFile,
FILESystem:REName, FILESystem:WRITEFile
Syntax
FILESystem?
Arguments
None.
Example
FILESystem?
This query might return :FILESYSTEM:DIR,
".","..","myFile.txt","myWaveform.wfm".
FILESystem:COPy
Description
This command (no query form) copies a named file to a new file.
The new file may be in a totally separate directory than the old
file. You can only copy one file at a time using this command.
Wild card characters are not allowed.
Group
File System
206
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DELEte
Syntax
FILESystem:COPy {<source file path>,<destination
file path>}
Arguments
•
<file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If
the file path is within the current working directory, you
need only specify the file name.
Example
FILESystem:COPy
"C:\MYDIR\TEK00001.SET","C:\AnotherDir\copyOfTek
001.set"
This command copies the file named TEK00001.SET, located in
the MYDIR directory on the C drive to a file named
copyOfTek001.set in the AnotherDir directory on the C drive.
FILESystem:CWD
Description
This command sets or queries the current working directory for
FILESystem GPIB commands. The default working directory is
"C:\TekScope". Anytime that you use this command to change
the directory, the directory that you specify is retained as the
current working directory until you either change the directory or
you delete the directory. If you delete the current working
directory, the instrument resets current working directory to the
default directory (C:\TekScope) the next time the instrument is
powered on or the next time you execute a file ystem command.
The current working directory is retained between power cycles.
This command supports the permutations of file and directory
names that are supported by Microsoft Windows:
•
Relative path names; for example, ".\Temp"
•
Absolute path names; for example, "C:\Windows\System"
•
Implied relative pathe names; for example "newfile.text"
becomes "C:\TekScope\newfile.txt" if the current working
directory is "C:\TekScope"
Group
File System
Syntax 1
FILESystem:CWD {<new working directory path>}
207
Syntax 2
Arguments
•
<new working directory path>
This is a quoted string that defines the current working; a
directory name can be up to 128 characters.
Example 1
FILESystem:CWD "C:\TekScope\images"
This command sets the current working directory to images.
Example 2
FILESystem:CWD?
This query might return :FILESYSTEM:CWD
"C:\TekScope\Waveforms", indicating that the current
working directory is set to Waveforms.
FILESystem:DELEte
Description
This command (no query form) deletes a named file. It does not
delete directories. Use the FILESystem:RMDir command to
delete a directory.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:COPy, FILESystem:CWD
Syntax
FILESystem:DELEte <file path>
Arguments
•
<file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If
the file path is within the current working directory, you
need only specify the file name.
Example 1
FILESystem:DELEte "NOT_MINE.SET"
This command deletes the file named NOT_MINE.SET from the
current working directory.
208
FILESystem:DIR?
Description
This query-only command returns a list of quoted strings. Each
string contains the name of a file or directory in the current
working directory.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:MKDir
Syntax
FILESystem:DIR?
Arguments
None
Example
FILESystem:DIR?
This query returns a list of files and directories in the current
working directory.
FILESystem:MKDir
Description
This command (no query form) creates a new directory.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DIR?
Syntax
FILESystem:MKDir <directory path>
Arguments
•
<directory path>
This is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create
Example 1
FILESystem:MKDir "C:\NewDirectory"
This command creates the directory named NewDirectory at
the root of the C drive.
209
Example 2
FILESystem:CWD "C:\MyDirectory"
FILESystem:MKDir "MyNewSubDirectory"
These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory
within the existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the C
drive. This, of course, assumes that C:\MyDirectory already
existed and was not a read-only directory.
FILESystem:PRInt
Description
This command (no query form) prints a named file to a named
port. This command is the same as the FILESystem:READFile
command.
This command is not IEEE 488.2 compliant for the following
reasons:
•
The command produces output on the 488.2 bus. Queries,
not commands, are the only message units that should
produce output on the 488.2 bus. Errors may not be
recognized if they occur while data is being output in
response to this command. This will be evident if a
command is sent to the instrument before all of the data
generated by this command has been read. In such cases, you
should send a device clear message to the instrument.
•
The command does not use a standard 488.2 output format.
The closest defined format is the indefinite format of
ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding.
However, this command output omits the initial '#0'
characters needed for that format.
•
Newlines, ASCII value 10, can be included in the output
data. Output on the bus can be terminated by newlines. The
output of this command is only terminated by <EOI>.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:READFile
Syntax
FILESystem:PRInt <filepath>, GPIb
Arguments
•
<file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If
the file path is within the current working directory, you
need only specify the file name.
210
•
GPIb
This specifies that the hardcopy is sent out of the GPIB port.
GPIb is the only port allowed for this command.
Example
FILESystem:PRInt "C:\TEK00000.IBM",GPIb
This command sends the file named TEK00000.IBM out of the
GPIB port.
FILESystem:READFile
Description
This command (no query form) prints a named file to a named
port. It is identical to the FILESystem:PRInt command.
This command is not IEEE 488.2 compliant for the following
reasons:
•
The command produces output on the 488.2 bus. Queries,
not commands, are the only message units that should
produce output on the 488.2 bus. Errors may not be
recognized if they occur while data is being output in
response to this command. This will be evident if a
command is sent to the instrument before all of the data
generated by this command has been read. In such cases, you
should send a device clear message to the instrument.
•
The command does not use a standard 488.2 output format.
The closest defined format is the indefinite format of
ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding.
However, this command output omits the initial '#0'
characters needed for that format.
•
Newlines, ASCII value 10, can be included in the output
data. Output on the bus can be terminated by newlines. The
output of this command is only terminated by <EOI>.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:PRInt
Syntax
FILESystem:READFile <filepath>, GPIb
Arguments
•
<file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If
the file path is within the current working directory, you
need only specify the file name.
211
•
GPIb
This specifies that the hardcopy is sent out of the GPIB port.
GPIb is the only port allowed for this command.
Example
FILESystem:READFile "C:\TEK00000.IBM",GPIb
This command sends the file named TEK00000.IBM out of the
GPIB port.
FILESystem:REName
Description
This command (no query form) assigns a new name to an
existing file.
Group
File System
Related Command
FILESystem:CWD
Syntax
FILESystem:REName <old file path>,<new file
path>
Arguments
•
<old file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If
the file path is within the current working directory, you
need only specify the file name.
•
<new file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If
the file path is within the current working directory, you
need only specify the file name.
Example
FILESystem:REName
"C:\TEK00000.SET","C:\MYSETTING.SET"
This command gives the file named TEK00000.SET the new name of
MYSETTING.SET. The file remains in the root directory on the C drive.
FILESystem:RMDir
Description
This command (no query form) deletes a named directory. The
directory cannot contain any files. If there are files in the
directory, they must first be deleted. The directory must not be a
read-only directory.
Group
File System
212
Related Command
FILESystem:CWD
Syntax
FILESystem:RMDir <directory path>
Arguments
•
<directory path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If
the file path is within the current working directory, you
need only specify the file name.
Example
FILESystem:RMDir "C:\OldDirectory"
This command removes the directory named OldDirectory from
the root of the C drive.
FILESystem:WRITEFile
Description
This command (no query form) copies the block data from the
GPIB port to a named file.
Group
File System
Related Command
FILESystem:CWD
Syntax
FILESystem:WRITEFile <file path>,<data>
Arguments
•
<file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If
the file path is within the current working directory, you
need only specify the file name
•
<data>
This data can be either DEFINITE LENGTH or
INDEFINITE LENGTH ARBITRARY BLOCK
PROGRAM DATA encoding as described in IEEE 488.2.
Example 1
FILESystem:WRITEFile "C:\SomeNewFile.txt",#221
1.23 2.54 8.22 -1.22<EOI>
This command creates a file named "SomeNewFile.txt" on the
root of the C drive, containing the string of 21 characters " 1.23
2.54 8.22 -1.22". This is an example of using the definite length
arbitrary block.
213
Example 2
FILESystem:WRITEFile "C:\SomeNewFile.txt",#0
This is a test<NL+EOI>
This command creates a file named "SomeNewFile.txt" on the
root of the C drive, containing the string of " This is a test". This
is an example of using the indefinite length arbitrary block. The
newline character (0x0a) is required.
FILESystem:WRITEFile "C:\SomeNewFile.txt",#221
1.23 2.54 8.22 -1.22<NL+EOI>
This command creates a file named "SomeNewFile.txt" on the
root of the C drive, containing the string of 21 characters " 1.23
2.54 8.22 -1.22". Because the data argument is indefinite format
arbitrary block program data, it may contain any 8-bit values,
including newline characters (hexadecimal 0a). The fact that
newline characters are allowed makes this command deviate
from the strictest interpretation of the IEEE488.2 specification.
HARDCopy
Description
This command sends a copy of the screen display to the port
specified by HARDCopy:PORT. This command is equivalent to
pressing the PRINT button on the front panel. When printing to a
file, the file format is Windows Bitmap Image (BMP).
The HARDCopy query returns the port and file path.
Group
Hardcopy
Related Commands
*WAI, *CLS?
Syntax 1
HARDCopy STArt
Syntax 2
HARDCopy?
Arguments
•
STARt
This initiates a screen copy to a file or the default system
printer, as specified by the :HARDCopy:PORT selection.
The default system printer is set within the Windows
operating system. If you need information about how to set
the default system printer,. refer to Microsoft Windows
online help.
Note: Use the *WAI command between HARDCopy STARt
commands to ensure that the first hardcopy is complete before
starting another.
214
Example 1
HARDCopy STARt
This command initiates a screen copy to a file or the default
system printer, as specified by the :HARDCopy:PORT selection.
Example 2
HARDCopy?
This query returns the hardcopy file path and the selected port.
The query might return
:HARDCOPY:FILENAME
"C:\TekScope\Images\hcFILE.BMP";PORT FILE.
HARDCopy:FILEName
Description
This command sets or returns the file that will be sent hardcopy
data on the next HARDCopy command (if the
HARDCopy:PORT is set to FILE).
Group
Hardcopy
Related Commands
HARDCopy
Syntax 1
HARDCopy:FILEName <file path>
Syntax 2
HARDCopy:FILEName?
Argument
•
<file path>
This specifies that the hardcopy is sent to the named file.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name
and path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>:<dir>\ <filename>. <drive> and one
or more <dir>s are optional. <filename> stands for a
filename of up to 128 characters. If you don't specify the
path with <drive> and one or more <dir>s, the default
location is "C:\TekScope\Images". While filename
extensions are not required, they are highly recommended.
Example 1
HARDCopy:FILEName "TEK.IBM"
This command sets TEK.IBM as the selected file name. The next
hardcopy will be sent to this file in the default hardcopy
directory, if the :HARDCopy:PORT selection is FILE.
Example 2
HARDCopy:FILEName?
215
This query might return :HARDCOPY:FILENAME
"C:\TekScope\Images\TEK.IBM" as the selected file.
Example 3
HARDCopy:FILEName "TEK??.IBM"
This command sets TEK as the selected file name with a
numeric, two-digit suffix. The instrument might return
:HARDCOPY:FILENAME "TEK00.IBM";"TEK01.IBM"
This indicates TEK00.IBM is the first file and TEK01.IBM is the
second file.
HARDCopy:PORT
Description
This command selects or returns whether the hardcopy data will
be sent to a file or printed on the next hardcopy command (for
example, the HARDCopy STARt command). This is equivalent
to selecting Print in the File menu and then either choosing Print
to file or specifying the default printer.
Group
Hardcopy
Related Commands
HARDCopy, HARDCopy:FILEName
Syntax 1
HARDCopy:PORT {FILE|PRINTER}
Syntax 2
HARDCopy:PORT?
Arguments
•
FILE
This argument specifies that the hardcopy is stored in the file
specified in the HARDCopy:FILEName command.
•
PRINTER
This argument specifies that the hardcopy is sent to the
printer specified in the Print dialog box.
Example 1
HARDCopy:PORT FILE
This command specifies
That the hardcopy is stored in the file specified in the
HARDCopy:FILEName command.
Example 2
HARDCopy:PORT?
This query might return
:HARDCOPY:PORT FILE
216
This indicates that hardcopies are sent to the specified file.
HEADer
Description
This command sets or queries the Response Header Enable State
that causes the instrument to either include or omit headers on
query responses.
Note: This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987
Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk); these
commands never return headers. This command does make a
corresponding change in the Response Header Enable State of
the opposite interface (physical or virtual GPIB interface). Refer
to Introduction for more information.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
HDR, VERBose
Syntax 1
HEADer {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
HEADer?
Arguments
•
OFF
This sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This
causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses, so
that only the argument is returned.
•
ON
This sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This
causes the instrument to include headers on applicable query
responses. You can then use the query response as a
command.
•
<NR1>
A 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any
other value sets this state to true, which causes the
instrument to omit headers on query responses.
Example 1
HEADer OFF
This command specifies that the instrument omits headers on
query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
Example 2
HEADer?
This query might return
217
:HEADER 1
This indicates that the instrument is including headers on
applicable query responses.
HDR
Description
This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included
for backward compatibility purposes.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
HEADer, VERBose
Syntax 1
HDR {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
HDR?
Arguments
•
OFF
This sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This
causes the instrument to omit headers on query responses, so
that only the argument is returned.
•
ON
This sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This
causes the instrument to include headers on applicable query
responses. You can then use the query response as a
command.
•
<NR1>
A 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any
other value sets this state to true, which causes the
instrument to omit headers on query responses.
Example 1
HDR OFF
This command specifies that the instrument omits headers on
query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
Example 2
HDR?
This query might return
:HEADER 1I
This indicates that the instrument is including headers on
applicable query responses.
218
HIStogram?
Description
This query-only command returns all histogram parameters; it
queries the state of all histogram parameters that the user can set.
This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms
from the Measure menu.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Histogram
Related Commands
MEASUrement:METHod
Syntax 1
HIStogram?
Example 1
HIStogram?
This query might return the histogram parameters as
:HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT 3.0000E+01,
2.5100E+01,7.0000E+01,7.5200E+01;DISPLAY LINEAR
;STATE 0;FUNCTION HORIZONTAL;SIZE 2.0000E+00
;SOURCE CH1
HIStogram:Box
Description
This command defines or returns the left, top, right, and bottom
boundaries of the histogram box, in source waveform
coordinates. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform
Histograms from the Measure menu and then setting Limits for
Left, Right, Top, and Bottom in the appropriate boxes. The
command is similar to the HIStogram:BOXPcnt command
except that command uses percentage coordinates to define the
boundaries of the histogram box.
Note: This command implicitly clears the histogram count and
statistics for the histogram and histogram source data when
HIStogram:STATE is turned on.
This command is available only if you have installed Option 2A
Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Histogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
Syntax 1
HIStogram:Box <NR3>,<NR3>,<NR3>,<NR3>
219
Syntax 2
HIStogram:Box?
Arguments
•
<NR3>
This specifies the left position of the histogram box in source
waveform coordinates.
•
<NR3>
This specifies the top position of the histogram box in source
waveform coordinates.
•
<NR3>
This specifies the right position of the histogram box in
source waveform coordinates.
•
<NR3>
This specifies the bottom position of the histogram box in
source waveform coordinates.
Example 1
HIStogram:Box 1E-9, 0.250, 2E-9, 0.500
This command defines the coordinates of the histogram box in
source waveform coordinates.
Example 2
HIStogram:Box?
This query might return
HISTOGRAM:BOX 1.0000E-09, 0.2500, 2.0000E-09,
0.5000
which identifies the coordinates of the histogram box in source
waveform coordinates.
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
Description
This command defines or queries the left, top, right, and bottom
positions of the histogram box, in percentage coordinates. The
upper left has the value 0,0 and the lower right has the value 100,
100. Any value outside the range of 0 to 100 is clipped. This
command is similar to the HIStogram:Box command except that
this command uses percentage coordinates to define the
boundaries of the histogram box.
Note: This command implicitly clears the histogram count and
statistics for the histogram and histogram source data when
HIStogram:STATE is turned on.
This command is available only if you have installed Option 2A
Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
220
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:Box
Syntax 1
HIStogram:BOXPcnt <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>
Syntax 2
HIStogram:BOXPcnt?
Arguments
•
<NR3>
This specifies the left position of the histogram box in
percentage coordinates. The default value is 30.0.
•
<NR3>
This specifies the top position of the histogram box in
percentage coordinates. The default value is 25.1.
•
<NR3>
This specifies the right position of the histogram box in
percentage coordinates. The default value is 70.0.
•
<NR3>
This specifies the bottom position of the histogram box in
percentage coordinates. The default value is 75.2.
Example 1
HIStogram:BOXPct 30.0,25.1,70.0,75.2
This command sets the hardcopy page layout format to default
values.
Example 2
HIStogram:BOXPct?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:BOXPCT
3.0000E+01,25.1000E+01,7.0000E+01,7.5200E+01.
HIStogram:COUNt
Description
This command (no query form) clears the count and statistics for
the histogram and the histogram source data. If the histogram is
on, then counting restarts. This command is equivalent selecting
Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu and then clicking
the Reset button.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
221
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:Box, HIStogram:BOXPcnt
Syntax
HIStogram:COUNt RESET
•
RESET
This zeros the histogram count.
Example
HIStogram:COUNt RESET
This command clears the count and statistics for the histogram
and the histogram source data.
HIStogram:DISplay
Description
This command sets whether or not the histogram is displayed. If
the histogram is displayed, this command also sets the format of
the histogram. The query form of this command either returns
the histogram display format or that histogram display is
disabled. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform
Histogram from the Measure menu and then ensuring that
Display is set to On.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:MODe, HIStogram:STATE
Syntax 1
HIStogram:DISplay {OFF|LOG|LINEAr}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:DISplay?
Arguments
•
<OFF>
This disables the histogram display but allows the histogram
data to accumulate.
•
<LOG>
This specifies that the histogram display type is set to Log
format.
•
222
<LINEAr>
This argument sets the histogram display type to linear
format. LINEAr is the default setting.
Example 1
HIStogram:DISplay OFF
This command disables the histogram display.
Example 2
HIStogram:DISplay?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY LOG
This indicates that the current histogram displayed is in Log
format.
HIStogram:FUNCtion
Description
This command either selects the type of histogram to create or
returns the current histogram type. This command is equivalent
to selecting Waveform Histogram from the Measure menu and
then choosing either Horizontal or Vertical from the Histogram
Mode group box.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:MODe, HIStogram:STATE
Syntax 1
HIStogram:FUNCtion {HORizontal|VERTical}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:FUNCtion?
Arguments
•
HORizontal
This displays a horizontally positioned histogram that shows
time distribution.
•
VERTical
This displays a vertically positioned histogram that shows a
voltage distribution (or another distribution such as
amperes).
Example 1
HIStogram:FUNCtion HORizontal
This command sets the histogram mode to the horizontal display
mode.
223
Example 2
HIStogram:FUNCtion?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:FUNCTION VERTICAL
This indicates that the vertical display mode is selected for the
histogram.
HIStogram:MODe
Description
This command selects the type of histogram to create or disables
the histogram display. The query form either returns the current
histogram type or that histogram display is disabled. This
command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histogram from
the Measure menu and then choosing from the Histogram Mode
group box.
HIStogram:MODe is functionally equivalent to the
HIStogram:FUNCTION and HIStogram:STATE commands and
is included for backward compatibility purposes.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:FUNCTION, HIStogram:STATE,
HIStogram:DISplay
Syntax 1
HIStogram:MODe {HORizontal|VERTical|OFF}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:MODe?
Arguments
•
HORizontal
This enables a horizontally positioned histogram that shows
time distribution.
•
VERTical
This enables a vertically positioned histogram that shows a
voltage distribution (or another distribution such as
amperes).
•
OFF
This disables collection of the histogram measurement.
Example 1
HIStogram:MODe HORizontal
224
This command sets the type of histogram created to horizontal,
which displays a horizontally positioned histogram that shows
time distribution.
Example 2
HIStogram:MODe?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:MODE OFF
This indicates that histogram display is disabled.
HIStogram:SIZe
Description
This command sets or queries the width or height of the
histogram on the screen. This is equivalent to selecting
Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu and then entering
a value in the Histo Size box.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:DISplay
Syntax 1
HIStogram:SIZe <NR3>
Syntax 2
HIStogram:SIZe?
Arguments
•
<NR3>
This specifies the histogram size. The value can vary from
0.1 to 8.0 divisions in HORizontal mode and from 0.1 to
10.0 divisions in VERTical mode. Resolution is to the
nearest pixel.
Example 1
HIStogram:SIZe 2.0
This command sets the size of the histogram to 2.0 divisions.
Example 2
HIStogram:SIZe?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:SIZE 2.0000E+01
This indicates the histogram size is set to 2.0 divisions.
225
HIStogram:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries which source will be compared
against the histogram box when the histogram testing is enabled.
This is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the
Measure menu and then choosing the desired waveform source.
The waveform need not be displayed for histograms to run. You
might want the channel displays disabled so you can see a fullscreen histogram and not have waveform data confuse the
display.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:DISplay,
Syntax 1
HIStogram:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:SOUrce?
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This selects a channel waveform as the source for the
histogram. The channel waveform range is from 1 through 4.
•
MATH<x>
This selects a math waveform as the source for the
histogram. The valid math waveform range is from 1
through 4.
•
REF<x>
This selects a reference waveform as the source for the
histogram. The valid reference waveform range is from 1
through 4.
Example 1
HIStogram:SOUrce CH1
This command enables the channel 1 waveform to be compared
against the histogram box. The default timebase, Main, is used
for the histogram display.
Example 2
HIStogram:SOUrce?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1
226
This indicates that the waveform for channel 1 is the source for
the histogram.
HIStogram:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries whether the histogram calculations
are enabled. This is equivalent to selecting Waveform
Histograms from the Measure menu.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:MODe, MEASUrement:METHod
Syntax 1
HIStogram:STATE {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:STATE?
Arguments
•
<ON>
This enables histogram calculations.
•
<OFF>
This disables the histogram calculations.
•
<NR1>
A 0 disables histogram calculations; any other value enables
histogram calculations.
Example 1
HIStogram:STATE ON
This command enables histogram calculations.
Example 2
HIStogram:STATE?
This query might return :HISTOGRAM:STATE 0, indicating that
histogram calculations are currently disabled.
HORizontal?
Description
This query-only command returns all settings for the horizontal
commands.
Group
HORizontal
227
Syntax
HORizontal?
Example
HORizontal?
This query might return the following horizontal settings
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 0;POSITION 50.0000;TIME
0.0000;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 400.0000E9;POSITION 50.0000;SAMPLERATE
1.2500E+9;UNITS:VALUE 1.0000;STRING "s";OFFSET
0.0000;:HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 5000;RESOLUTION
5000;ROLL AUTO
HORizontal:DIVisions?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of graticule
divisions over which the waveform is displayed.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DIVisions?
Arguments
None.
Example
HORizontal:DIVisions?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS 1.0000E-01
This indicates that the waveform is displayed across one
division.
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Description
This command sets or queries FastFrame frame count. This is
equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq
menu and entering a value in the Frame Count box. FastFrame,
also known as memory segmentation, captures a series of
triggered acquisitions with minimal intervening time. This
command is equivalent to selecting Fast Frame Setup from the
Horiz/Acq menu and entering a value in the Frame Count box.
Group
Horizontal
228
Related Commands
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt?
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This indicates the number of frames to acquire.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 2
This command sets up FastFrame mode to acquire two frames
(segments) of data.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 4
This indicates that FastFrame mode is currently set to acquire 4
frames (segments) of data.
229
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAME
Description
This command sets or queries the FastFrame reference frame
number. The Reference Frame number is used to calculate time
differences for each frame and displays those differences in the
graticule. This command is equivalent to selecting FastFrame
Setup in the Horiz/Acq menu and entering a value in the Time
Stamps/Frame box.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:DELTa:<wfm>?,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:REF?,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAME <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAME?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This specifies the FastFrame reference frame.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME 2
This command sets the FastFrame reference frame to 2.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME 3
This indicates that the FastFrame reference frame is currently set
to 3.
230
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal record length to the
number of sample points in each frame. This command is
equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq
menu and entering a value in the Rec Length box. FastFrame,
also known as memory segmentation, captures a series of
triggered acquisitions with minimal intervening time between
them.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This represents the supported values for horizontal record
lengths, which can range from 500 through 400000. For
more information about valid data point ranges, select
Specifications from the Help menu and choose the
Horizontal & Acquisition tab.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH 5000
This command sets the horizontal record length to 5000 sample
points in each frame.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH 25000
This indicates that the FastFrame record length is set to 25000
sample points in each frame.
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<
wfm> <NR1>
Description
This command sets or queries the start frame number on the
specified waveform for the FastFrame multiple frames feature.
The multiple frames feature supports displaying multiple frames
in an overlaid manner.
231
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm>
<NR1>,
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODE,
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:
<wfm> <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:
<wfm>?
Argument
•
<wfm>
This specifies the waveform source. Valid waveforms include
CH<x>, MATH<x>, and REF<x>. Express the x variable as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 in four-channel instruments and
1 through 2 in two-channel instruments.
•
<NR1>
This represents the start frame number on the specified
waveform.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:FRAMESTART:
CH1 3
This command sets the start frame number to frame 3 on
Channel 1
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:
MULTIPLEFRAMES:FRAMESTART:CH1?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIFRAMES:
FRAMESTART:CH1 3
This indicates that the frame number starts on frame 3 for
channel 1.
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODE
Description
This command sets or queries the mode for the FastFrame
multiple frames feature. The multiple frames feature supports
displaying multiple frames in an overlaid manner.
232
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm>
<NR1>,
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm>
<NR1>,
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODE
{OFF|OVERlay}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODE?
Argument
•
OFF
This turns off the multiple frames mode.
•
OVERlay
This sets the multiple frames mode to overlay.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE OFF
This command turns off the multiple frames mode.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE
OFF
This indicates that the multple frames mode is off.
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<
wfm> <NR1>
Description
This command sets or queries the number of frames on the
specified waveform for the FastFrame multiple frames feature.
The multiple frames feature supports displaying multiple frames
in an overlaid manner.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm>
<NR1>,
233
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODE,
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRAMES:
<wfm> <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRAMES:
<wfm>?
Arguments
•
<wfm>
This specifies the waveform source. Valid waveforms
include CH<x>, MATH<x>, and REF<x>. Express the x
variable as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 in fourchannel instruments and 1 through 2 in two-channel
instruments.
•
<NR1>
This represents the number of frames on the specified
waveform.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUMFRAMES:
CH1 3
This command sets the number of frames to 3 on channel 1.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUMFRAMES:
CH1?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:
NUMFRAMES:CH1 3
This indicates that the number of frames on channel 1 is 3.
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries FastFrame Reference waveform
source. This is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the
Horiz/Acq menu and choosing the reference source.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:DELTa:<wfm>?,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:REF?,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk
234
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce <wfm>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce?
Argument
•
<wfm>
This specifies the FastFrame Reference waveform source.
Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x>, and REF<x>;
the x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1
through 4.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE CH2
This command sets the horizontal FastFrame waveform
reference source to CH2.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE CH2
This indicates that the FastFrame waveform source is currently
set to CH2.
235
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm>
Description
This command sets or returns the FastFrame Selected frame
number on the specified waveform. This is equivalent to
selecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and then
choosing the waveform source and frame. Valid waveforms
include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>; the x variable can be
expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:DELTa:<wfm>?,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:REF?
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm> <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This specifies the selected frame number on the specified
waveform.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH2 33
This command sets the FastFrame Selected frame number on
channel 2 to 33.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH4?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH4 25
This indicates that the FastFrame frame number on channel 4 is
set to 25.
Example 3
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH1 2; CH2
2; CH3 2; CH4 2; MATH1 2; MATH2 2; MATH3 2;
MATH4 2; REF1 8; REF2 8; REF3 8; REF4 8,
indicating all waveforms' Fastframe selected frame numbers.
236
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
Description
This command sets or returns the state of FastFrame acquisition.
This is equivalent to setting FastFrame On in the FastFrame
Setup menu. FastFrame, also known as memory segmentation,
lets users capture a series of triggered acquisitions with minimal
time between them.
The digitizing oscilloscope in FastFrame mode is ready to accept
a continuous burst of triggers 400 ms after the controller sends
the ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
ACQuire:STATE RUN
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE?
Arguments
•
<ON>
This turns on horizontal FastFrame.
•
<OFF>
This turns off horizontal FastFrame.
•
<NR1>
A 0 turns off horizontal FastFrame; any other value turns on
horizontal FastFrame.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE ON
This command turns on horizontal FastFrame.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE 0
This indicates that the current state of FastFrame is off.
237
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:<wfm>?
Description
This query-only command returns the frame number and time
stamp for each frame between requested frames, inclusive,
within the specified waveform. Argument order is unimportant.
Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>; the
x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through
4.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:<wfm>? <NRF>,
<NRF>
Arguments
•
<NRF>
This specifies the selected "from" frame number within the
specified waveform.
•
<NRF>
This specifies the selected "to" frame number within the
specified waveform.
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:ALL:CH2? 4,1
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:ALL:CH1
4,1,"02 Mar 2000 20:10:54.542 037 272 620",
which is the list of time stamps from frame 1 through frame 4 on
channel 1.
238
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen:<wfm>?
Description
This query-only command returns the relative trigger for the
delta time between the specified frames, within the specified
waveform. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and
REF<x>; the x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging
from 1 through 4.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen:<wfm>?
<NRF>, <NRF>
Arguments
•
<NRF>
This specifies the selected "from" frame number within the
specified waveform.
•
<NRF>
This specifies the selected "to" frame number within the
specified waveform.
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:BETWEEN:CH1? 5,2
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:BETWEEN:CH1
5,2,"00:00:00.010 000 540 624"
This is the delta of channel 1's Time Stamp frame 5 - Time
Stamp frame 2 (TS[5]-TS[2]).
239
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>?
Description
This query-only command returns the relative time between the
triggers of the FastFrame Selected and the FastFrame Reference,
within the specified waveform. Valid waveforms include
CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>; the x variable can be
expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>?
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTRAME:TIMESTAMP:DELTA:CH1?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:DELTA:CH1
"00:00:00.006 000 306 556"
This is the delta time stamp of FastFrame Selected Frame on
channel 1 - FastFrame Reference Frame (TS[C1 Selected]TS[Reference]).
240
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAME:<wfm>?
Description
This query-only command returns the absolute trigger date and
time for the specified frame and waveform. Valid waveforms
include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>; the x variable can be
expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAME:<wfm>?
<NR1>
Argument
•
<NR1>
The frame number for which the timestamp will be returned
on the specified waveform.
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:FRAME:CH1? 10
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:FRAME:CH1
10,"02 Mar 2000 20:10:54.536 036 928 432",
which is the time stamp of channel 1, frame 10.
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF?
Description
This query-only command returns the absolute trigger date and
time for FastFrame reference.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme,
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF?
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:REF?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:REF "02 Mar
2000 20:10:54.533 036 838 784", which is the time
stamp of FastFrame Reference.
241
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SELECTED:<wfm>?
Description
This query-only command returns the absolute trigger date and
time for the FastFrame Selected, within the specified waveform.
Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>; the
x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through
4.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm>?
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SELECTED:<wfm>?
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:SELECTED:REF1?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:SELECTED:RE
F1 "02 MAR 2000 20:10:54:539 037 145 340",
which is the time stamp of FastFrame Selected on reference 1.
242
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk
Description
This command sets up or returns the state of FastFrame tracking
feature. This command is equivalent to selecting FastFrame
Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and then clicking the desired
Frame Tracking state.
When FastFrame Track is set to "live", the channel and math
waveforms are locked together. Adjusting a channel waveform
also adjusts a related math waveform. All reference waveforms
are also locked together but they are separate from channel and
math waveforms.
For example, when you set the Selected Frame Source Ch1 to
Frame 3, then Selected Frame Ch2, Ch3, Ch4, Math1, Math2,
Math3 and Math4 are also set to Frame 3.
When you set the Selected Frame Source Ref1 to Frame 2, then
Selected Frame Ref2, Ref3 and Ref4 are also set to Frame 2. If
the Frame Tracking is set to Live, changing Selected Frame Ch1
will not affect the Selected Frame Ref1 frame of the Reference
Frame setting.
When FastFrame Track is set to "all", the channel, math and
reference waveforms are locked together. Adjusting a channel
waveform also adjusts the related math and reference
waveforms.
For example, when you set the Selected Frame Source Ch1 to
Frame 3, then Selected Frame Ch2, Ch3, Ch4, Math1, Math2,
Math3, Math4, Ref1, Ref2, Ref3 and Ref4 are also set to Frame
3.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAme,
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce,
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm>?
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk {LIVE|ALL}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk?
Arguments
•
LIVE
This sets FastFrame Track to Live.
•
ALL
This sets FastFrame Track to All.
243
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACk LIVE
This command sets FastFrame Track to live.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK ALL
This indicates that all FastFrame Selected Frames and the
FastFrame Reference will be locked together.
HORizontal:MAIn?
Description
This query-only command returns the time per division of the
time base. This command is equivalent to selecting
Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:SCAle
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn?
Example
HORizontal:MAIn?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 1.0000E-04;POSITION
5.0000E+01;UNITS:VALUE 1.0000E+00;STRING
"s";OFFSET 0.0000E+01
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries the time base trigger delay mode.
This command is equivalent to choosing Delay Mode On from
the Horiz/Acq menu.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
Syntax 1
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe [ON|OFF|<NR1>]
244
Syntax 2
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe?
Arguments
•
ON
This enables the time base trigger delay mode.
•
OFF
This disables the time base trigger delay mode.
•
<NR1>
A 0 disables the time base trigger delay mode, any other
value enables the time base trigger delay mode.
Example 1
HORizontal:DELay:MODe ON
This command enables the time base trigger delay mode.
Example 2
HORizontal:DELay:MODe?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 1
This indicates that the time base trigger delay mode is currently
enabled.
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the time base position when
Horizontal Delay Mode is turned on. This command is
equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition Setup from the
Horiz/Acq menu and then entering a Ref Point value.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn}:DELay:TIMe
Syntax 1
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition?
Arguments
•
<NR3>
This is from 0 to ≈100 and is the percentage of the waveform
that is displayed left of the center graticule.
245
Note: The upper limit of the waveform position is slightly
limited by a value that is determined from the record length
(upper limit = 100 - 1/record length).
Example 1
HORizontal:DELay:POSition 5E+1
This command sets the time base trigger delay position to 50
percent.
Example 2
HORizontal:DELay:POSition?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:DELAY:POSITION 5.0000E+01
This indicates that the time base trigger delay position is
currently set to 50 percent.
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries the time base trigger delay time.
This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the
Horiz/Acq menu and choosing a value for Horiz Delay.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe,
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition
Syntax 1
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe?
246
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the time base trigger delay time setting,
typically represented in seconds.
Example 1
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe 5.0E-3
This command sets the time base trigger delay time to 5 ms.
Example 2
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:DELAY 5.0000E-05
This indicates that the time delay setting is 5 µs.
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?
Description
This query-only command returns the Horizontal Main time base
interp ratio.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?
Example
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO 10.0
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition
This command either positions the waveform horizontally on the
display or returns the horizontal position on the display and is
identical to the HORizontal:POSition command. When
Horizontal Delay mode is turned off, this command is equivalent
to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the frontpanel. When Horizontal Delay mode is turned on, this command
is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition from the
Horiz/Acq menu and then choosing a Horizontal Ref Point value.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition <NR3>
247
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition?
Arguments
•
<NR3>
This argument can range from 0 to ≈100 and is the
percentage of the waveform that is displayed left of the
center graticule.
Note: The upper limit of the waveform position is slightly
limited by a value that is determined from the record length
(upper limit = 100 - 1/record length).
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition 5.000E+01
This command sets the horizontal position of the waveform such that 10
percent of the waveform is to the left of center of the screen.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition?
This query might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION
5.0000E+01, indicating that the horizontal position of the
waveform on the screen is currently set to 50 percent.
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate
Description
This command sets the horizontal sample rate to the desired
number of samples per second. The record length is
automatically adjusted at the same time to maintain a constant
number of data points in each frame. The query form of this
command returns the current horizontal sample rate. This
command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition Setup
from the Horiz/Acq menu and then entering the desired Sample
Rate.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:RESOlution
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate?
Arguments
•
<NR3>
This represents the size of the sample rate, which ranges
from 5 S/s to 250 GS/s.
248
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate 125E6
This command sets the sample rate to the sample rate increment
that is closest to 125 MS/s.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate?
This query might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SAMPLERATE
2.5000E+09, indicating that the sample rate is currently set to
2.5 GS/s.
249
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle
Description
This command sets the time per division for the time base or
returns its horizontal scale on the display and is identical to the
HORizontal:SCAle command. The specified scale value is
rounded to a valid scale setting. This command is equivalent to
selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and then
choosing a Scale value.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:SCAle
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the time per division. The range is from 200 ps
through 40 s.
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle 2E-6
This command sets the main scale to 2µs per division.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?
This query might return :HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE
2.0000E-06, indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2
µs per division.
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts
Description
This command sets or returns the units for the horizontal time
base. It is equivalent to setting the
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing
250
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts <STRing>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?
Arguments
•
<STRing>
This is the time base units string.
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts "lum"
This command sets the time base multiplier to 5.5, the units to
lumens and the time base units offset to 2.9.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS STRING "lum".
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing
Description
This command sets or returns the units string for the horizontal
time base trigger delay.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing <string>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?
Argument
•
<string>
This is the time base units string.
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing lum
This command sets the units string for the time base trigger
delay to lumens.
251
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS:STRING "lum"
indicating that the units string for the time base trigger delay is
set to lumens.
HORizontal:POSition
Description
This command either positions the waveform horizontally on the
display or returns its horizontal position on the display. When
Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off, this command is equivalent
to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front
panel.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
Syntax 1
HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:POSition?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is from 0 to ≈100 and is the percentage of the waveform
that is displayed left of the center graticule.
Note: The upper limit of the waveform position is slightly
limited by a value that is determined from the record length
(upper limit = 100 - 1/record length).
Example 1
HORizontal:POSition 10
This command sets the horizontal position of the waveform such
that 10% of the waveform is to the left of screen center.
Example 2
HORizontal:POSition?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0000E+01
indicating the horizontal position of the waveform on the screen.
252
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Description
This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of
data points in each frame. The query form of this command
returns the current horizontal record length. This command is
equivalent to selecting Resolution from the Horiz/Acq menu and
then entering the desired Rec Length.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax 1
HORizontal:RECOrdlength <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This represents the supported values for horizontal record
lengths, which range from 500 through 400K data points.
For more information about valid data point ranges, select
Specifications from the Help menu and choose the
Horizontal & Acquisition tab.
Example 1
HORizontal:RECOrdlength 50000
This command specifies that 50000 data points will be acquired
for each record.
Example 2
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:RECOrdlength 5000
indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 5000 data
points.
HORizontal:RESOlution
Description
This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of
data points in each frame. The sample rate is automatically
adjusted at the same time to maintain a constant time per
division. The query form of this command returns the current
horizontal record length. This command is equivalent to
adjusting the RESOLUTION knob on the front panel.
Group
Horizontal
253
Syntax 1
HORizontal:RESOlution <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:RESOlution?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This represents the supported values for horizontal record
lengths, which range from 500 through 400K data points.
For more information about valid data point ranges, select
Specifications from the Help menu and choose the
Horizontal & Acquisition tab.
Example 1
HORizontal:RESOlution 50000
This command specifies that 50000 data points will be acquired
for each record.
Example 2
HORizontal:RESOlution?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:RESOLUTION 5000
indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 5000 data
points.
HORizontal:ROLL
Description
This command sets or queries the Roll Mode status. Use Roll
Mode when you want to view data at very slow sweep speeds. It
is useful for observing data samples on the screen as they occur.
This command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition
Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu, selecting the Acquisition tab,
and setting the Roll Mode to Auto or Off.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax 1
HORizontal:ROLL {AUTO|OFF|ON}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:ROLL?
Arguments
•
AUTO
This enables Roll Mode, if the time/division is set
appropriately.
•
254
OFF
This disables Roll Mode.
•
ON
This enables Roll Mode, if the time/division is set
appropriately.
Example 1
HORizontal:ROLL ON
This command enables Roll Mode.
Example 2
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:ROLL OFF
indicating that the Roll Mode is disabled.
HORizontal:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the time per division for the time
base and is identical to the HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command.
It is provided to maintain program compatibility with some older
models of Tektronix instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and entering
the desired Scale value.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Syntax 1
HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:SCAle?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the time per division. The range is from 200 ps to
40 s.
Example 1
HORizontal:SCAle 2E-6
This command sets the main scale to 2 µs per division.
Example 2
HORizontal:SCAle?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 2.0000E-06
255
indicating that the time per division is currently set to 2 µs,
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the position of the trigger and is
identical to the HORizontal:MAIn:POSition command. It is
provided to maintain program compatibility with some older
models of Tektronix instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and entering
the desired Position.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition
Syntax 1
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the amount of pretrigger information in the
waveform. The range is from 0 to 100%.
Example 1
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition 50
This command sets the pretrigger information in the waveform to 50%.
Example 2
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION 50
indicating that 50% of the waveform is pretrigger information.
ID?
Description
This query-only command returns identifying information about
the instrument and related firmware.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
*IDN?
256
Syntax
ID?
Example
ID?
This query might return
:TEK/TDS5404,CF:91.1CT,FV:01.00.912
indicating the instrument model number, configured format, and
firmware version number.
LOCk
Description
This command enables or disables all front-panel buttons and
knobs, including the touch screen. There is no front panel
equivalent.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
UNLock
Syntax 1
LOCk {ALL|NONe}
Syntax 2
LOCk?
Arguments
•
ALL
This disables all front panel controls.
•
NONe
This enables all front panel controls. This is equivalent to the
UNLock ALL command.
Note: If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State
(RWLS), the LOCk NONe command has no effect. For more
information, see the ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987 Standard
Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section
2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Example 1
LOCk ALL
This command locks the front panel controls.
Example 2
LOCk?
This query might return
:LOCK NONE
257
indicating that the front panel controls are enabled by this
command.
MATH<x>?
Description
This query-only command returns the definition for the math
waveform specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4 in
four-channel instruments and 1 through 2 in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Math
Related Commands
SELect:<wfm>
Syntax
MATH<x>?
Example
MATH1?
This query might return the definition of a math waveform as
:MATH1 DEFINE "PROBE POINT7";NUMAVG 2;SCALE
1.0000E+00;
POSITION 0.0000E+00;LABEL:NAME "Math1";XPOS 5;
YPOS 65;;MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE
DEGREES;GATEPOS 0.0000E+00;
GATEWIDTH 1.9996E-06;REFLEVEL
2.0000E+01;REFLEVELOFFSET
2.2360E-01;SPAN 1.2500+09;CENTER
6.2500E+08;RESBW 1.0002E+06
;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS -3.5000EE+01;UNWRAP
0;LOCK 0
MATH<x>:DEFIne
Description
This command allows you to use mathematical expressions to
define the math math waveform specified by x. The value of x
can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Math Setup from the Math menu,
selecting a math waveform (Math 1 through Math 4 in fourchannel instruments or Math 1 through Math 2 in two-channel
instruments), and entering a math expression in the Math<x> =
box. The query form of this command returns the math definition
for the specified math waveform.
You can define and display up to four math waveforms
simultaneously in four-channel instruments and two math
waveforms simultaneously in two-channel instruments.
258
The standard math functions allow you to create simple
waveform expressions, such as Ch 1 + Ch 2, which creates a
math waveform that is the algebraic sum of the signal source of
channel 1 and channel 2. Standard math expressions must fit the
following defined equations:
•
<operand><operation><operand>
where <operand> is one of Ch<x> or Ref<x> and
<operation> is one of +, -, *, or /
•
<operation><operand>
where <operand> is one of Ch<x> or Ref<x> and
<operation> is one of SpectralMag or SpectralPhase
If you have Option 2A, Advanced Analysis, installed, you can
create complex expressions consisting of 100 plus characters and
comprising many sources, functions, and operands. For example,
you can enter the expression Log(Ch 1+Ch 2), which specifies
that the signals from channels 1 and 2 are to be algebraically
added, and the base 10 log of the sum is to be shown as the final
math waveform.
For information about constructing mathematical expressions,
see Creating and Using Math Waveforms in the user manual for
this instrument.
Group
Math
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:DEFIne <QString>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:DEFIne?
Argument
•
<QString>
This quoted string argument is the mathematical expression
that defines the waveform.
Example 1
MATH2:DEFIne "Ch1+Ch2"
This command adds the Ch 1 waveform and Ch 2 waveforms,
storing the results in Math 2.
Example 2
MATH2:DEFIne?
This query might return
:MATH1:DEFINE "CH2*REF2"
as the expression that defines Math 1.
259
MATH<x>:LABEL:NAMe
Description
This command sets or returns the label string, which is used for
annotating the math waveform on the screen. The math
waveform to which the label is attached is specified by x, which
ranges in value from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Math Setup from the Math menu and
entering a label in the Label box.
Group
Math
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:LABEL:NAMe <string>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:LABEL:NAMe?
Argument
•
<string>
This specifies the label to annotate the math waveform.
Example 1
MATH2:LABEL:NAMe "Probe point7"
This command assigns "Probe point7" Math 2.
Example 2
MATH2:LABEL:NAMe?
This query might return
:MATH2:LABEL:NAME "Probe point7"
indicating that Probe point 7 is the label for Math 2.
MATH<x>:LABEL:XPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the
label attached to a math waveform is displayed, relative to the
left edge of the screen. Channels are specified by x, which
ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Math Label from the Math menu and
entering a value in the X Position box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:LABEL:YPOS
260
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:LABEL:XPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:LABEL:XPOS?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the label for the
selected math waveform is displayed, relative to the left edge
of the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0
to 500.
Example 1
MATH2:LABEL:XPOS 50
This command moves the waveform label for the MATH2
waveform (on a four-channel instrurment) so that it begins 50
pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
Example 2
MATH2:LABEL:XPOS?
This query might return
:MATH2:LABEL:XPOS 50
indicating that the waveform label for the MATH2 waveform is
currently 50 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
MATH<x>:LABEL:YPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the
label attached to a math waveform is displayed, relative to the
top edge of the screen. The Math waveform is specified by x,
which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Math Label from the Math menu and
entering a value in the Y Position box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:LABEL:XPOS
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:LABEL:YPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:LABEL:YPOS?
Argument
•
<NR1>
261
This is the location (in pixels) where the label for the
selected math waveform is displayed, relative to the top edge
of the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0
to 400.
Example 1
MATH2:LABEL:YPOS -25
This command moves the waveform label for the MATH2
waveform to just beneath (25 pixels below) the top of the screen.
Example 2
MATH2:LABEL:YPOS?
This query might return
:MATH2:LABEL:YPOS 0
indicating that the waveform label for the MATH2 waveform is
currently located just beneath the top of the screen.
MATH<x>:NUMAVg
Description
This command sets or returns the acquisition number at which
the averaging algorithm will begin exponential averaging.
Prior to that acquisition number, the algorithm uses stable
averaging. This has no affect unless the AVG() function is used
in the specified math expression. If so, it affects all AVG()
functions in this math expression. The Math waveform is
specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Set Math Averages from the
Math menu and then entering an averaging value for the math
waveform.
Group
Math
Related Commands
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:NUMAVg <NR1>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:NUMAVg?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This specifies the number of acquisitions over which
exponential averaging is performed.
Example 1
MATH2:NUMAVg 10
262
This command averages the Math 2 waveform ten times.
Example 2
MATH2:NUMAVg?
This query might return
:MATH2:NUMAVG 10
indicating that ten Math 2 waveforms are averaged before a
single acquisition occurs.
MATH<x>:SPECTral?
Description
This query-only command returns the current spectral setups for
the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the
Math menu and viewing the current spectral setup values.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH<x>:SPECTral?
Example
MATH1:SPECTral?
This query might return the spectral setup values for MATH1 as
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000E+00
;GATEWIDTH 1.9996E-06;REFLEVEL 4.4587+01
;REFLEVELOFFSET 2.2360E-01;SPAN
1.2500E+09;CENTER 6.2500E+08
;RESBW 1.0002E=06;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 3.5000E+01
;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER
Description
This command specifies or returns the center frequency of the
spectral analyzer output data span for the specified math
waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and then entering a
Center Freq value.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
263
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the desired frequency of the spectral analyzer output
data span in hertz.
Example 1
MATH3:SPECTral:CENTER 10.09E6
This command sets the center frequency to the closest value it
can attain to 10.09 MHz.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:CENTER?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTral:CENTER 10.0900E+06
indicating that the center frequency is currently set at 10.09
MHz.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS
Description
This command sets or returns the position of the center of the
gate, which is used as the data input to the spectral analyzer for
the specified math waveform. The math waveform is specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.This
command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the
Math menu and then entering a Gate Pos value.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS <NRf>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS?
264
Argument
•
<NRf>
This is the gate position. Units are represented in seconds,
with respect to trigger position.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:GATEPOS 0
This command specifies the position of the center edge of the
gate used as the data input to the spectral analyzer.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:GATEPOS?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTRAL:GATEPOS 0.0000E+00
indicating that the gate position is set to zero (the trigger
position).
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH
Description
This command sets or returns the gate width input, in seconds, to
the spectral analyzer for the specified math waveform. The math
waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral
Setup from the Math menu and entering a duration value in the
Gate Dur box.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the time across the 10-division screen in seconds.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH 1.0E-3
This command sets the gate width input to the spectral analyzer
at 1 ms.
265
Example 2
MATH3:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH?
This query might return
:MATH3:SPECTRAL:GATEWIDTH 1.0000E-03
indicating that the gate width to the spectral analyzer is set to 1
ms.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk
Description
This command locks menus for two or more math waveforms
together as a group. The query form of this command returns an
ON (1) or OFF (0), indicating whether spectral locking is turned
on. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the
Math menu, choosing the Control tab and then clicking the
Time/Track Frequency Domain Controls button associated with
the math waveforms that you want to lock. However, applying
spectral locking functionality from the interface is limited to
locking Math1 and Math2 (on two-channel and four-channel
instruments) or Math 3 and Math4 (on four channel instruments).
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
MAT H< x> Lo ck Co mb i n atio n s
MATH1
MATH2
MATH3
Locked Math Waveforms
Off
Off
Off
None
Off
Off
On
Math3 and Math4 locked
Off
On
Off
Math2 and Math3 locked
Off
On
On
Math2, Math3 and Math4
locked
On
Off
Off
Math1 and Math2 locked
On
Off
On
Math1 and Math 2 locked,
Math3 and Math4 locked
On
On
Off
Math1, Math2 and Math3
locked
On
On
On
Math1, Math2, Math3 and
Math4 locked
Note: Executing MATH4:SPECTral:LOCk via the GPIB
interface has no affect since there is no Math5 to which it can be
locked.
Group
Math
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk {ON|OFF}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk?
266
Arguments
•
ON
This turns on the parameter lock for the specified math
waveform.
•
OFF
This turns off the parameter lock for the specified math
waveform.
•
<NR1>
A 0 disables the parameter lock for the specified math
waveform; any other value enables the parameter lock.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:LOCk ON
This command turns on the parameter lock for Math1, which
causes the parameters for Math1 and Math2 to be locked
together.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:LOCk?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:LOCK 0
indicating that the parameter lock for Math1 is turned off.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG
Description
This command sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag
function in the math string. The Math waveform is specified by
x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. If you are using the
standard math, this command is equivalent to selecting
Magnitude Spectrum from the Math menu and then selecting the
units that you want from the Scale button drop-down menu. If
you have Option 2A Advanced Analysis installed on your
instrument, this command is equivalent ot selecting Spectral
Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Mag tab, and then
clicking the desired Scale button.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG {LINEAR|DB|DBM}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG?
267
Arguments
•
LINEAR
This sets the SpectralMag units to linear.
•
DB
This sets the SpectralMag units to decibels.
•
DBM
This sets the SpectralMag units to decibels. It also sets the
Ref Level Offset to a value that is the equivalent of 1mW
into 50Ω.
Example 1
MATH2:SPECTral:MAG DB
This command sets the SpectralMag units for Math2 to decibels.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:MAG?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTRAL:MAG DB
indicating that the SpectralMag units for Math2 are set to
decibels.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE
Description
This command sets or returns the units of a SpectralPhase
function in the math string. The Math waveform is specified by
x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.This command is equal
to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the
Phase tab, and then clicking the desired Scale button.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE
{DEGREES|RADIANS|GROUPDELAY}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE?
Arguments
•
DEGREES
This sets the SpectralPhase units to degrees.
268
•
RADIANS
This sets the SpectralPhase units to radians.
•
GROUPDELAY
This sets the SpectralPhase units to groupdelay, which
commutes the derivative of unwrapped phase spectrum.
Units are expressed in seconds.
Example 1
MATH2:SPECTral:PHASE DEGREES
This command sets the SpectralPhase units for Math2 to degrees.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:PHASE?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTRAL:PHASE RADIANS
indicating that the SpectralPhase units for Math2 are set to
radians.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel
Description
This command specifies the vertical position of the output data
from the spectral analyzer on the display screen for the specified
math waveform. The numerical value represents the position at
the top of the display graticule. The Math waveform is specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math
menu, choosing the Mag tab and then entering a value in the
Reference Level box.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the position that represents the top of the display
screen graticule. The range depends on the units and both the
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle and
269
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition settings.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLevel -10
This sets the top of the display screen to be a reference level of 10 dB. If the vertical scale is LINEAR, then the vertical units
will be the same as the input waveform.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLevel?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:REFLEVEL 2.0000E+01
indicating that the top of the display screen is set to a reference
level of 20 dB.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset
Description
This command sets or returns the spectral level offset used for
calculating the dB value for the specified math waveform. The
Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4
for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments. Changing the reference level offset causes the
spectral waveform to move vertically, with respect to zero dB.
This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the
Math menu, choosing the Mag tab and then entering a value in
the Reference Level Offset box.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset {DBM|<NR3>}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset?
Arguments
•
DBM
This specifies the reference level used for calculation to be
equivalent to 1 mW into 50 Ω (Zero dB will occur at this
level).
•
<NR3>
This specifies the reference level used for calculation of the
decibel value when the output units are Log.
270
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLEVELOFFset 0.5
This sets the reference level for the Log calculation for decibel to
be 0.5. dB = A x Log(y/<NR3>) where A is 10 if the input units
are watts and A is 20 if the input units are otherwise.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset DBM
This sets the decibel reference to be equivalent to 1 mW into 50
Ω. The reference level numerical value will depend on the input
units. If the units are volts, the value is set to 0.2236 V; if the
units are amperes, the value is set to 40 µA; if the units are watts,
the value is set to 0.001 W.
Example 3
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:REFLEVELOFFSET 2.23360E-01
indicating that the spectral reference level offset is 223.6 mV.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw
Description
This command sets or returns the resolution bandwidth of the
spectral analyzer for the specified math waveform. The Math
waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for
four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral
Setup from the Math menu and then entering a value in the Res
BW box.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH,
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER, MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN,
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the desired resolution bandwidth value. Units are
represented in hertz.
271
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:RESBw 250E3
This command sets the resolution bandwidth to the attainable
value that is close to 250 KHz.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:RESBw?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:RESBW 1.0002E+06
indicating the actual resolution bandwidth value obtained from
the spectral analyzer.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN
Description
This command sets the ceiling of the span to a value that is
closest to the specified value. The query form of this command
returns the current span value for specified math waveform. The
Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4
for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel
instruments.This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup
from the Math menu and then entering a value in the Freq Span
box.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN {<NR3>|FULL}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN?
Arguments
•
<NR3>
This specifies the frequency span of the output data vector
from the spectral analyzer.
•
FULL
This sets the top of the span to 1/2 the sample rate and sets
the center frequency to 1/2 the span.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:SPAN FULL
This command sets the top of the span to 1/2 the sample rate and
sets the center frequency to 1/2 the span.
272
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:SPAN 2.56E6
This command sets the top of the span to a value that is closest to
2.56 MHz.
Example 3
MATH1:SPECTral:SPAN?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:SPAN 1.2500E+09
indicating the actual span value obtained by the spectral
analyzer.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress
Description
This command sets or returns the phase suppression threshold
for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is
specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math
menu, choosing the Phase tab and then entering a value in the
Suppression Threshold box.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the level under which all data with magnitudes are
displayed as zero phase.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:SUPPress -62
This command specifies that any magnitude values less than -62
dB will have their phase output set to zero.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:SUPPress?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS -3.5000E+01
273
indicating that the phase suppression threshold is currently set to
-35 dB.
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap
Description
This command sets or returns whether phase unwrap of the
spectral analyzer output data is enabled for the specified math
waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments.This command is equal to selecting
Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Phase tab and
then clicking the Unwrap button.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap <ON|OFF>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap?
Arguments
•
ON
This enables phase unwrap.
•
OFF
This disables phase wrap.
•
<NR1>
A 0 disables phase wrap; any other value enables phase
wrap.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:UNWRap ON
This command enables phase wrap of the spectral analyzer
output data.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:UNWRap?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP 0
indicating that phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output data
is disabled.
274
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow
Description
This command sets or returns the window function used to
multiply the spectral analyzer input data for the specified math
waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments. A spectral window determines what
the filter shape of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency
domain. It can be described by a mathematical function that is
multiplied point-by-point times the input data to the spectral
analyzer. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup
from the Math menu, and choosing from the Window Type dropdown list.
Following is a list of arguments that specify the window function
used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data. The windows
are listed in the order of their ability to resolve frequencies
(resolution bandwidth). For additional information about spectral
windows, see Selecting a Spectral Window in the online help for
this instrument.
Note: This command is available only if you have installed
Option 2A Advanced Analysis in your instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow {RECTANGULAR|HAMMING
|HANNING|KAISERBESSEL|BLACKMANHARRIS|FLATTOP2
|GAUSSIAN|TEKEXPONENTIAL}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow?
Arguments
•
RECTANGULAR
This type of window function is equivalent to multiplying all
gate data by one.
•
HAMMING
This type of window function is based on a cosine series.
•
HANNING
This type of window function is based on a cosine series.
•
KAISERBESSEL
This type of window function is based on a cosine series.
•
BLACKMANHARRIS
275
This type of window function is based on a cosine series.
•
GAUSSIAN
This type of window function has the best localization
characteristics in the joint time/frequency plane.
•
TEKEXPONENTIAL
This type of window has an exponential nonsymmetrical
shape in the time domain and a triangular shape in the
frequency domain.
•
FLATTOP2
This type of window function is a cosine series window with
a flattened frequency response lobe.
Example 1
MATH2:SPECTral:WINdow HANNING
This command applies a Hanning window to the spectral
analyzer input data.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:WINdow?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW TEKEXPONENTIAL
indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral
analyzer input data is the Tek exponential function.
276
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the
specified Math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x,
which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. The position value is
usually applied to the signal before it is digitized. The highest
three units/div scale ranges of a given math are implemented by
changing the way the acquired data is displayed. When the
instrument is operating in any of these highest three scale ranges,
the position control operates only on the signal after it is
digitized. Note that if a signal that exceeds the range of the
digitizer in one of these three scale ranges is repositioned, the
displayed waveform will contain clipped values on-screen. This
command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Math
menu and then entering a Vert Pos value or adjusting the frontpanel Vertical POSITION knob.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the
waveform to move up, and decreasing the position value causes
the waveform to move down. Position adjusts only the display
position of a waveform, whether a channel, math, or reference
waveform. The position value determines the vertical graticule
coordinate at which input signal values, equal to the present
offset setting for that reference, are displayed. For example, if
the position for Math 3 is set to 2.0 and the offset is set to 3.0,
then the input signals equal to 3.0 are displayed 2.0 divisions
above the center of the screen.
Be aware that autoscaling occurs when a math waveform is first
defined and enabled, or when a math string changes. After the
math waveform is computed for the first time, the instrument
determines the min + max of that waveform data. Then, the
instrument sets the math position so that (min + max)/2 is in the
center of the screen. In addition, the instrument sets the math
scale so that the range of the min and max cover 6 divisions.
This autoscaling process can take up to 1/2 second to complete
and will override any vertical scale or position commands for
that math waveform received during this time. You should insert
an appropriate pause in your program after defining and enabling
a math waveform before changing its position or scale.
Group
Math, Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
277
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the desired position in divisions from the center
graticule.
Example 1
MATH2:VERTical:POSition 1.3E+00
This command positions the Math 2 input signal 1.3 divisions
higher than a position of 0.
Example 2
MATH1:VERTical:POSition?
This query might return
:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION -1.3000E+00
indicating that the current position of Math 1 is 1.3 divisions
below the center graticule.
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified
math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which
ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Math menu and
then entering a Vert Scale value or adjusting the front-panel
Vertical SCALE knob.
Each waveform has its own vertical scale parameter. For a signal
with constant amplitude, increasing the scale causes the
waveform to be displayed smaller. Decreasing the scale causes
the waveform to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms. For reference and math waveforms,
the scale setting controls the display only, graphically scaling
these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition
hardware.
Be aware that autoscaling occurs when a math waveform is first
defined and enabled, or when a math string changes. After the
math waveform is computed for the first time, the instrument
determines the min + max of that waveform data. Then, the
instrument sets the math position so that (min + max)/2 is in the
center of the screen. In addition, the instrument sets the math
scale so that the range of the min and max covers 6 divisions.
This autoscaling process can take up to 1/2 second to complete
and will override any vertical scale or position commands for
that math waveform received during this time. You should insert
278
an appropriate pause in your program after defining and enabling
a math waveform before changing its position or scale.
Group
Math, Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:SCAle, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the scale, in volts, amps or watts per division. The
range is from 100.0E-36 through 100.0E+36.
Example 1
MATH4:VERTical:SCAle 100E-03
This command sets the Math 4 scale to 100 mV per division.
Example 2
CH2:VERTical:SCAle?
This query might return
:MATH2:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000E+00
indicating that the current scale setting of Math 2 is 1 V per
division.
MEASUrement?
Description
This query-only command returns all measurement parameters in
the following order: MEAS1, MEAS2, MEAS3, MEAS4,
MEAS5, MEAS6, MEAS7, MEAS8, and IMMED.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement?
Example
MEASUrement?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:GATING OFF
;METHOD HISTOGRAM;IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS
"V"
;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE
279
;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0
;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1
;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS
"V"
;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE
;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0
;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;DELAY
:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE 0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS
"V"
;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE
;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:STATE 0
;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1
;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS6:STATE 0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS
"V"
;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE
;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS7:STATE 0
;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS "V";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;DELAY
:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS8:STATE 0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS
"V"
;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE
;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT
;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1
0.0000;MID2 0.0000;
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW
10.0000
;MID1 50.0000;MID2
50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE
OFF;WEIGHTING 32
MEASUrement:GATing
Description
This command specifies or returns the measurement gating
setting. This command is equivalent to selecting Gating from the
Measure menu and then clicking the desired Measurement
Gating setting.
Group
Measurement
280
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:GATing {ON|OFF|<NRf>|ZOOM|CURSOR}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:GATing?
Arguments
•
ON
This turns on measurement gating.
•
OFF
This turns off measurement gating.
•
<NRf>
A 0 turns off measurement gating; any other value turns on
measurement gating.
•
ZOOM
This turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the
zoom box.
•
CURSOR
This limits measurements to the portion of the waveform
between the vertical bar cursors, even if they are off screen.
Example 1
MEASUrement:GATing ON
This command turns on measurement gating.
Example 2
MEASUrement:GATing?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR
indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the
waveform between the vertical bar cursors.
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Description
This query-only command returns all immediate measurement
setup parameters.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Example
MEASUrement:IMMed?
This query might return
281
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE PERIOD;UNITS
"s";SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Description
This query-only command returns information about the
immediate delay measurement. This command is equivalent to
selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing
the Time tab and then clicking the Delay button.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Example
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;
DIRECTION FORWARDS
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
Description
This command sets or returns the starting point and direction that
determines the delay "to" edge when taking an immediate delay
measurement. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
command to specify the delay "to" waveform. This command is
equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure
menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to
display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Search
Direction setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
{BACKWards|FORWards}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction?
Arguments
•
BACKWards
This starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks
for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform.
282
•
FORWards
This starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and
looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction FORWards
This command starts searching from the beginning of the
waveform record and looks for the first rising or falling edge.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS
indicating that searching begins at the end of the waveform
record and looks for the last rising or falling edge.
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used
for the delay "from" waveform when taking an immediate delay
measurement. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1
command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent
to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu,
choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the
delay settings and then clicking the desired Delay Edge1 setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1] {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1]?
Arguments
•
FALL
This specifies the falling edge.
•
RISe
This specifies the rising edge.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1] RISe
This command specifies that the rising edge be used for the
immediate delay measurement.
283
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1]?
This query might return
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 FALL
indicating that the falling edge or negative edge of the waveform
is used for the immediate delay measurement.
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2
Description
This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used
for the delay "to" waveform when taking an immediate delay
measurement. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent
to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu,
choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the
delay settings and then clicking the desired Delay Edge2 setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2?
Arguments
•
FALL
This specifies the falling edge.
•
RISe
This specifies the rising edge.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 RISe
This command specifies that the rising edge be used for the
immediate delay measurement.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2?
This query might return
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2 FALL
indicating that the falling edge or negative edge of the waveform
is used for the immediate delay measurement.
284
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the source for all single channel
immediate measurements and specifies the source to measure
"from" when taking an immediate delay measurement or phase
measurement. This command is equivalent to selecting
Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time
tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and
then clicking the desired Source1 (From) setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
{CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]?
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The valid channel
waveform range is from 1 through 4.
•
MATH<y>
This is a math waveform. The valid math waveform range is
from 1 through 4.
•
REF<X>
This is a reference waveform. The valid reference waveform
range is from 1 through 4.
•
HIStogram
This indicates histogram as the object to be measured.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1] MATH1
This command specifies Math1 as the immediate measurement
source .
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE{1}?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 CH3
indicating that channel 3 is the immediate measurement source.
285
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Description
This command sets or queries the source to measure “to” for
phase or delay immediate measurements. This command is
equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure
menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to
display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Source2
(To) setting.
Tip: Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay
measurement types, which require both a target (Source1) and
reference (Source2) source.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 {CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The valid channel
waveform range is from 1 through 4.
•
MATH<y>
This is a math waveform. The valid math waveform range is
from 1 through 4.
•
REF<X>
This is a reference waveform. The valid reference waveform
range is from 1 through 4.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 REF3
This command sets the waveform in reference memory location
3 as the delay "to" source when making delay measurements.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 MATH1
indicating that Math1 is the immediate measurement source.
286
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the immediate measurement type.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1 (Standard)
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPE
{AMPlitude|AREa|BURst|CARea|CMEan|
CRMs|DELay|FALL|FREQuency|HIGH|LOW|MAXimum|MEAN|
MINImum|
NDUty|NOVershoot|NWIdth|PDUty|PERIod|PHAse|PK2Pk
|POVershoot|
PWIdth|RISe|RMS|UNDEFINED}
Syntax 2 (Option 2A Advanced Analysis)
In addition to the arguments listed in Syntax 1 above, if you have
Option 2A, Advanced Analysis, installed on your instrument, the
following syntax is also supported:
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPE
{HITs|MEDian|PEAKHits|SIGMA1|SIGMA2|
SIGMA3|STDdev|WAVEFORMS}
Syntax 3
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?
Arguments (Standard)
•
AMPlitude
This is the high value minus the low value.
•
AREa
This is the area between the curve and ground over the entire
waveform.
•
BURst
This is the time from the first MidRef crossing to the last
MidRef crossing.
•
CARea
This is the area between the curve and ground over one
cycle.
•
CMEan
This is the arithmetic mean over one cycle.
•
CRMs
This is the true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle.
•
DELay
This is the time between the MidRef crossings of two
different waveforms.
287
•
FALL
This is the time that it takes for the falling edge of a pulse to
fall from a HighRef value to a LowRef value of its final
value.
•
FREQuency
This is the reciprocal of the period measured in hertz.
•
HIGH
This is the 100% reference level.
•
LOW
This is the 0% reference level.
•
MAXimum
This is the highest amplitude (voltage).
•
MINImum
This is the lowest amplitude (voltage).
•
NDUty
This is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal
period expressed as a percentage.
•
NOVershoot
This is the negative overshoot, expressed as 100 x (Low Minimum/Amplitude).
•
NWIdth
This is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%)
amplitude points of a negative pulse.
•
PDUty
This is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal
period, expressed as a percentage.
•
PERIod
This is the time in seconds that it takes for one complete
signal cycle to happen.
•
PHAse
This is the amount of shift expressed in degrees from the
selected waveform to the designated waveform.
•
PK2Pk
This is the absolute difference between the maximum and
minimum amplitude.
•
POVershoot
This is the positive overshoot, expressed as 100 x
(Maximum-High/Amplitude).
•
288
PWIdth
This is the distance (time) between MidRef (usually 50%)
amplitude points of a positive pulse.
•
RISe
This is the time that it takes for the leading edge of a pulse to
rise from a low reference value to a high reference value of
its final value.
•
RMS
This is the true Root Mean Square voltage.
•
UNDEFINED
This is the default measurement type, which indicates that no
measurement type is specified. Once a measurement type is
chosen, it can be cleared by using this argument.
Arguments (Option 2A, Advanced Analysis)
•
HITs
This argument is the number of points in the histogram box
or on the box boundary.
•
MEDian
This argument is the value that half of all acquired points
within (or on) the histogram box are less than and half are
greater than.
•
PEAKHits
This argument is the number of points in the largest bin of
the histogram
•
SIGMA1
This argument is the number of points in the histogram that
are within 1 standard deviation of the histogram mean.
•
SIGMA2
This argument is the number of points in the histogram that
are within 2 standard deviations of the histogram mean.
•
SIGMA3
This argument is the number of points in the histogram that
are within 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean.
•
STDdev
This argument is the standard RMS deviation of all acquired
points within (or on) the histogram box.
•
WAVEFORMS
This argument is the number of waveforms that have
contributed to the histogram.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe FREQuency
289
This defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency
measurement.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPe RMS
indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root
Mean Square voltage.
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Description
This query-only command returns the units of the immediate
measurement.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Example
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNIts "s"
indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in
seconds.
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Description
This query-only command returns the value of the measurement
specified by the MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe command. The
measurement is immediately taken on the source(s) specified by
a MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE command.
Note: A change to HORizontal:MAIn:SCALe or CH<x>:SCALe
will not necessarily have taken affect if followed by this
command.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE, *ESR?, ALLEV?
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Example
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
290
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE 9.9000E+37
If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it,
then an item is added to the error queue. The error can be
checked for with the *ESR? and ALLEV? commands.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Description
This query-only command returns all measurement parameters
for the displayed measurement specified by x, which can range
from 1 through 8. This query command is equivalent to selecting
Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and viewing the
Measurements table; then choosing the Time tab, clicking the
Delay button and viewing the Delay Edge and Search Direction
settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS3?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;TYPE PERIOD;UNITS
"s";SOURCE1 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of values
accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset.
Some values may have been ignored because they generated an
error. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS3:COUNt?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:COUNT 3.247000000E+03.
291
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Description
This query-only command returns the delay measurement
parameters for the measurement specified by <x>, which ranges
from 1 through 8. Measurement parameters are presented in the
following order: Edge1, Edge2, and Direction. This query
command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure
menu, choosing Delay and viewing the Delay Edge and Search
Direction settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS3?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
Description
This command sets or queries the starting point and direction
that determines the delay "to" edge when taking a delay
measurement. Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent
to selecting Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay from
the drop-down list and then clicking the desired Search Direction
setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
{BACKWards|FORWards}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction?
Arguments
•
BACKWards
This means that the search starts at the end of the waveform
and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform.
Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
292
command to specify the slope of the edge.
•
FORWards
This means that the search starts at the beginning of the
waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the
waveform. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 command to
specify the slope of the edge.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS3:DELay:DIREction BACKWards
This command starts searching from the end of the waveform
record.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS3DELay:DIREction?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS
This indicates that the current search direction is backwards.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used
for the delay "from" waveform when taking a delay
measurement. Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent
to selecting Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay from
the drop-down list and clicking the desired Delay Edge1 setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1] {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1]?
Arguments
•
FALL
This specifies the falling edge of the waveform.
•
RISe
This specifies the rising edge of the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS3:DELay:EDGE[1] RISe
293
This command specifies that the rising edge of the waveform be
used for measurement 3.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:DELay:EDGE[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE[1] FALL
This indicates that the falling edge of the waveform is being used
for measurement 1.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
Description
This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used
for the delay "to" waveform when taking a delay measurement.
Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 command to
specify the waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting
Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay from the dropdown list and then clicking the desired Delay Edge2 setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2?
Arguments
•
FALL
This specifies the falling edge of the waveform.
•
RISe
This specifies the rising edge of the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS3:DELay:EDGE2 RISe
This command specifies that the rising edge of the waveform be
used for measurement 3.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:DELay:EDGE2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2 FALL
This indicates that the falling edge of the waveform is being used
for measurement 1.
294
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Description
This query-only command returns the maximum value found for
this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements
are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS3:MAXimum?
This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM
4.18E-9.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Description
This query-only command returns the mean value accumulated
for this measurement since the last statistical reset.
Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through
8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEAN?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN 514.71E-09.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Description
This query-only command returns the minimum value found for
this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements
are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MINImum?
295
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MINIMUM 1.75E-09.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the source for all single channel
measurements and specifies the source to measure "from" when
taking a delay measurement or phase measurement.
Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through
8. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup
from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired
measurement source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
{CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]?
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The valid channel
waveform range is from 1 through 4.
•
MATH<y>
This is a math waveform. The valid math waveform range is
from 1 through 4.
•
REF<x>
This is a reference waveform. The valid reference waveform
range is from 1 through 4.
•
HIStogram
This is a histogram.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS2:SOURCE[1] MATH1
This command specifies Math 1 as the measurement 2 source.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE[1] MATH1
This indicates that Math1 is the measurement 2 source.
296
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Description
This command sets or queries the source to measure “to” for
phase or delay measurements. Measurements are specified by x,
which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to
selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, selecting
a measurement type of either Phase or Delay, and then choosing
the desired measurement source.
Tip: Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay
measurement types, which require both a target (Source1) and
reference (Source2) source.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
{CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2?
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The valid channel
waveform range is from 1 through 4.
•
MATH<y>
This is a math waveform. The valid math waveform range is
from 1 through 4.
•
REF<x>
This is a reference waveform . The valid reference waveform
range is from 1 through 4.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS4:SOURCE2 CH1
This command specifies CH1 as the delay "to" source when
making delay measurement.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS2:SOURCE2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2 MATH1
This indicates that Math 1 is the measurement 2 source.
297
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries whether the specified
measurement slot is computed and displayed. The measurement
slot is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. This
command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the
Measure menu and then clicking the Display button.
For a measurement to display, you must have selected a source
waveform and defined the measurement you want to take and
display. You select the measurement using the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] command. You define
the measurement type using the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe command.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1],
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE?
Arguments
•
OFF
This disables calculation and display of the specified
measurement slot.
•
ON
This enables calculation and display of the specified
measurement slot.
•
<NR1>
A 0 disables calculation and display of the specified
measurement slot; any other value enables calculation and
display of the specified measurement slot.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS2:STATE ON
This command computes and displays the measurement defined
as measurement 2.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:STATE?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0
298
This indicates that measurement defined for measurement slot 1
is disabled.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Description
This query-only command returns the standard deviation of
values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical
reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:STDdev?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV 21.0E-12.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the type of measurement that is
defined for the specified measurement slot. The measurement
slot is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. This
command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the
Measure menu and then choosing the desired measurement type.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1 (Standard)
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
{AMPlitude|AREa|BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs
|DELay|FALL|FREQuency|HIGH||LOW|MAXimum|MEAN|MIN
Imum|NDUty
|NOVershoot|NwIdth|PDUty|PERIod|PHAse|PK2Pk|POVe
rshoot|PWIdth
|RISe|RMS|UNDEFINED}
Syntax 2 (Option 2A Advanced Analysis)
In addition to the arguments listed in Syntax 1 above, if you have
Option 2A, Advanced Analysis, installed on your instrument, the
following syntax is also supported:
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPE
{HITs|MEDian|PEAKHits|SIGMA1|SIGMA2|SIGMA3
|STDdev|WAVEFORMS}
Syntax 3
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?
299
Arguments (Standard)
•
AMPlitude
This measures the amplitude of the selected waveform.
•
AREa
This measures the voltage over time. The area is over the
entire waveform or gated region and is measured in voltseconds. The area measured above the ground is positive,
while the area below ground is negative.
•
BURst
This measures the duration of a burst. The measurement is
made over the entire waveform or gated region.
•
CARea
This measures the voltage over time. The area is over the
first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated
region and measured in volt-seconds. The area measured
above ground is positive, while the area below ground is
negative.
•
CMEan
This measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in
the4 waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
•
CRMs
This measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the
first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated
region.
•
DELay
This measures the time between the middle reference point
of the source waveform and the destination waveform.
•
FALL
This measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first
pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high
reference value (default is 90%) to a low reference value
(default is 10%).
•
FREQuency
This measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated
region. Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is
measured in hertz (Hz), where 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second.
•
HIGH
This measures the High reference (100% level, sometimes
called Topline) of a waveform.
You can also limit the High measurement (normally taken
over the entire waveform record) to a gated region on the
waveform.
300
•
LOW
This measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes
called Baseline) of a waveform.
•
MAXimum
This finds the maximum amplitude. This value is the most
positive peak voltage found. It is measured over the entire
waveform or gated region.
•
MEAN
This amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over
the entire waveform or gated region.
•
MINImum
This amplitude measurement finds the minimum amplitude.
This value is typically the most negative peak voltage. It is
measured over the entire waveform or gated region.
•
NDUty
This measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated
region. The negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative
pulse width to the signal period, expressed as a percentage.
•
NOVershoot
This amplitude measurement finds the negative overshoot
value over the entire waveform or gated region.
•
NWIdth
This measures the first pulse in the waveform or gated
region. This distance (time) is measured at the middle
reference amplitude points of a negative pulse.
•
PDUty
This measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated
region. The positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive
pulse width to the signal period, expressed as a percentage.
•
PERIod
This measures the time it takes for the first complete
waveform cycle to complete in the waveform or gated
region. Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured
in seconds.
•
PHAse
This measures the phase difference (amount of time a
waveform leads or lags the reference waveform) between
two waveforms. The measurement is made between the
middle reference points of the two waveforms and is
expressed in degrees, where 360° represents one waveform
cycle.
•
PK2Pk
301
This peak-to-peak amplitude measurement is the absolute
difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in
the entire waveform or gated region.
•
POVershoot
This amplitude measurement is the positive overshoot value
over the entire waveform or gated region.
•
PWIdth
This measures the first pulse in the waveform or gated
region. The distance (time) is measured at the middle
reference amplitude points of a positive pulse.
•
RISe
This timing measurement is the rise time of the waveform.
The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the
first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value
(default is 10%) to a high reference value (default is 90%).
Rise time = TimeRef High - TimeRef Low
You can also limit the measurement (normally taken over the
entire waveform record) to a gated region on the waveform.
•
RMS
This amplitude measurement is the true Root Mean Square
voltage in the entire waveform or gated region.
•
UNDEFINED
This is the default measurement type, which indicates that no
measurement type is specified. Once a measurement type is
chosen, it can be cleared by using this argument. Note that if
the measurement is displayed when you change its type to
UNDEFINED, the measurement is removed from the
display. In this case, the STATE will still indicate "1" and,
when a valid type is later specified for the measurement, the
measurement will again be displayed.
Arguments (Option 2A, Advanced Analysis)
•
HITs
This argument is the number of points in the histogram box
or on the box boundary.
•
MEDian
This argument is the value that half of all acquired points
within (or on) the histogram box are less than and half are
greater than.
•
PEAKHits
This argument is the number of points in the largest bin of
the histogram
•
302
SIGMA1
This argument is the number of points in the histogram that
are within 1 standard deviation of the histogram mean.
•
SIGMA2
This argument is the number of points in the histogram that
are within 2 standard deviations of the histogram mean.
•
SIGMA3
This argument is the number of points in the histogram that
are within 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean.
•
STDdev
This argument is the standard RMS deviation of all acquired
points within (or on) the histogram box.
•
WAVEFORMS
This argument is the number of waveforms that have
contributed to the histogram.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS2:TYPe FREQuency
This command defines measurement 2 as a measurement of the
frequency of a waveform.
303
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPe?
This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE RMS,
indicating that measurement 1 is defined to measure the RMS
value of a waveform.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Description
This query-only command returns the units associated with the
specified measurement.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:UNIts?
This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNIts %,
indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent.
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Description
This query-only command returns the value that has been
calculated for the measurement specified by <x>, which ranges
from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting
Display Statistics from the Measure menu and then choosing
Value from the drop-down list to display all measurement values
on-screen.
Note: This is the displayed value in the onscreen display. If
measurement statistics are enabled, a new value is calculated
with every waveform. In addition, this value is updated about
every 1/3 second. If you are acquiring a long acquisition record,
the instrument may take longer to update.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?, *ESR?, ALLEV?
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:VALue?
304
This query might return :MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:VALue
2.8740E-06. If the measurement has an error or warning
associated with it, then an item is added to the error queue. The
error can be checked for with the *ESR? and ALLEV?
commands.
MEASUrement:METHod
Description
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the
0% and 100% reference level. This command is equivalent to
selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then
choosing the desired Determine Base, Top From setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH,
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW,
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID,
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:METHod {HIStogram|MINMax)
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:METHod?
Arguments
•
HIStogram
This sets the high and low reference levels statistically using
a histogram algorithm.
•
MINMax
This sets the high and low waveform levels to MAX and
MIN, respectively.
Example 1
MEASUrement:METHod HIStogram
This command specifies that the high and low reference levels
are set statistically.
Example 2
MEASUrement:METHod?
This query might return :MEASUREMENT:METHOD MINMAX,
indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX.
305
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Description
This query-only command returns the current reference level
parameters. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference
Levels from the Measure menu and then viewing the current
Reference Levels settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Example
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
This query might return these reference level settings
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSOLUTE
;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000E+00;LOW 0.0000E+00;MID1
0.0000E+00
;MID2
0.0000E+00;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
9.0000E+01;LOW 1.0000+01;MID1 5.0000E+01;MID2
5.0000E+01
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the
upper reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
is set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of
rise and fall measurements. This command is equivalent to
selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then
entering the Absolute High Ref value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod,
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
306
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the high reference level, in volts. The default is
0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH 1.71
This command sets the high reference level to 1.71 V.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.7100E+00,
indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1.71 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the low reference level, and is the
lower reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
is set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of
rise and fall measurements. This command is equivalent to
selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and entering
the Absolute Low Ref value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod,
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW 0.0 V.
This command sets the low reference level to 0.0 V.
307
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0000E+00,
indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID
Description
This command sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the
50% reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
is set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of
period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements. This
command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the
Measure menu and then entering the Absolute Mid Ref value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] .71
This command sets the mid reference level to .71 V.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID 0.7100E+00,
indicating that the absolute mid1 reference level is set to .71 V.
308
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Description
This command sets or queries the mid reference level for the "to"
waveform when taking a delay measurement, and is the 50%
reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set
to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of delay
measurements. This command is equivalent to selecting
Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then entering the
Absolute Mid2 Ref value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 0.5
This command sets the mid reference level for the delay
waveform to 0.5 V.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5000E+00,
indicating that the absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0.5 V.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Description
This command specifies or queries the reference level units used
for measurement calculations. This command is equivalent to
selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then
choosing the desired reference level from the Units group box.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod {ABSolute|PERCent}
309
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?
Arguments
•
ABSolute
This specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly
using the MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute commands.
This method is useful when precise values are required (for
example, when designing to published interface
specifications, such as RS-232-C).
•
PERCent
This specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a
percent relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are
defined using the MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent
commands.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod ABSolute
This command specifies that explicit user-defined values are
used for the reference levels.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?
This query might return :MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT, indicating that the reference level units used are
calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal
to HIGH) that is used to calculate the high reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that
this command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from
the Measure menu and then entering the Percentage High Ref
value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod,
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
310
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the high reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The
default high reference level is 90%.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH 95
This command sets the high reference level to 95% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90, indicating
that the percentage high reference level is set to 90% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal
to HIGH) that is used to calculate the low reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that
this command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from
the Measure menu and then entering the Percentage Low Ref
value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod,
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the low reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The
default low reference level is 10%.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW 15
This command sets the high reference level to 15% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
311
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10, indicating that
the percentage high reference level is set to 10% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal
to HIGH) that is used to calculate the mid reference level when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that
this command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and
all cyclic measurements. This command is equivalent to
selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and entering
the Percentage Mid Ref value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The
default mid reference level is 50%.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] 60
This command sets the mid reference level to 60% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 65, indicating that
the percentage mid reference level is set to 65% of HIGH.
312
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Description
This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal
to HIGH) that is used to calculate the mid reference level for the
second waveform specified when
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that
this command affects the results of delay measurements. This
command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the
Measure menu and then entering the Percentage Mid2 Ref value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The
default mid reference level is 50%.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 40
This command sets the mid2 reference level to 40% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 45, indicating
that the percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45% of HIGH.
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt
Description
This command (no query form) clears existing measurement
statistics from memory. This command is equivalent to selecting
Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, selecting Statistics,
and clicking the Reset button.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe
313
Syntax
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt {RESET}
Argument
•
RESET
This clears existing measurement statistics from memory.
Example
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt RESET
This command resets the count of the statistics measurement to
zero, clears the measurement statistics from memory, and restarts
the calculation.
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe
Description
This command controls the operation and display of
management statistics. This command is equivalent to selecting
Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, clicking the
Statistics button and then choosing the desired Measurement
Format.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe {OFF|ALL|VALUEMean}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe?
Arguments
•
OFF
This turns all measurements off. This is the default value.
•
ALL
This turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each
measurement.
•
VALUEMean
This turns on statistics and displays the value and the mean
(µ) of each measurement.
Example 1
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe OFF
This command turns statistic measurements off.
314
Example 2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe?
This query might return :MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE
ALL, indicating that measurement statistics are turned on and all
statistics are being displayed for each measurement.
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
Description
This command sets or queries the time constant for mean and
standard deviation statistical accumulations. This command is
equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure
menu, clicking the Statistics button and entering the desired
Weight n= value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting <NR1>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the time constant for the mean and standard deviation
statistical accumulations.
Example 1
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting 4
This command sets statistical weighting to 4.
Example 2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 4, indicating that
measurement statistics weighting is currently set to 4.
NEWpass
Description
This command (no query form) changes the password that
enables access to password protected data. The PASSWord
command must be successfully executed before using this
command or an execution error will be generated.
315
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
PASSWord, *PUD
Syntax
NEWpass <QString>
Argument
•
<Qstring>
This is the new password, which can contain up to 10
characters.
Example
NEWpass "mypassword"
This command creates a new password (mypassword) for
accessing your protected data.
PASSWord
Description
This command (no query form) enables the *PUD and NEWpass
set commands. Sending PASSWord without any arguments
disables these same commands. Once the password is
successfully entered, the *PUD and NEWpass commands are
enabled until the instrument is powered off, or until the FACtory
command, the PASSWord command with no arguments, or the
*RST command is issued.
To change the password, you must first enter the valid password
with the PASSWord command and then change to your new
password with the NEWpass command. Remember that the
password is case sensitive.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
NEWpass, *PUD
Syntax
PASSWord <QString>
Argument
•
<QString>
This is the password, which can contain up to 10 characters.
The factory default password is "XYZZY" and is always
valid.
316
Example 1
PASSWord "XYZZY"
This command enables the *PUD and NEWPass set commands.
Example 2
PASSWord
This command disables the *PUD and NEWPass set commands.
You can still use the query version of *PUD.
RECAll:SETUp
Description
This command (no query form) restores a stored or factory frontpanel setup of the instrument from a copy of the settings stored
in memory. If factory is referenced (by specifying '0'), the
factory default values will be restored. This command is
equivalent to *RCL and performs the same function as selecting
Instrument Setup from the File menu and choosing the Recall
Setups tab.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
FACtory, *RCL , *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
RECAll:SETUp {FACtory|<NR1>|<file path>}
Arguments
•
FACtory
This restores the factory setup.
•
<NR1>
This specifies a setup storage location to restore. Setup
storage location values range from 0 through 10; using an
out of range value causes an error (222, "Data out of range").
•
<file path>
This is the location from where the setup will be recalled.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and
path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s
are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will
read the file from the default directory. <filename> stands
for a filename of up to 128 characters (use of wildcard
characters in filenames is not supported). Filename
extensions are not required but are highly recommended.
317
Example 1
RECAll:SETUp FACtory
This command recalls (and makes current) the front-panel setup
to its factory defaults.
Example 2
RECAll:SETUp 2
This command recalls the front-panel setup from setup storage
location 2.
Example 3
RECAll:SETUp "TEK00000.SET"
This command recalls the front panel setup from the file
TEK00000.SET in the default directory and on the default drive.
RECAll:WAVEform
Description
This command (no query form) recalls a stored waveform to a
reference location. This command is equivalent to selecting
Reference Waveforms from the File menu and then choosing
Recall Wfm.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
DELEte:WAVEform, SAVe_WAVEform
Syntax
RECAll:WAVEform {<file path>|REF<x>}
Arguments
•
REF<x>
This specifies the location in internal reference memory
from which the waveform is recalled. Reference memory
location values range from 1 through 4.
•
<file path>
This is the location from which the waveform will be
recalled.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and
path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s
are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will
read the waveform from the default directory. <filename>
stands for a filename of up to 128 characters (use of wildcard
characters in filenames is not supported). Filename
extensions are not required but are highly recommended.
318
Example
RECAll:WAVEform "TEK00000.WFM",REF1
This command recalls the waveform stored in the file named
TEK00000.WFM to reference location 1.
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal display position of
the reference waveform. The reference waveform is specified by
x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from
the File menu, choosing Reference Setup… from the drop-down
list, selecting a reference waveform, and then entering the
horizontal position value using the multipurpose knob.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This argument specifies the horizontal position of the
specified reference waveform in percentage of the waveform
that is displayed to the right of the center vertical graticule.
The range of this argument is from 0 through 100.
Example 1
REF2:HORizontal:POSition 0.0
This command positions the start of the Reference 2 waveform at
the center graticule.
Example 2
REF1:HORizontal:POSition?
This query might return :REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50,
indicating that the Reference 1 waveform is centered on the
horizontal graticule.
319
REF<x>:LABel?
Description
This query-only command returns a branch query containing the
waveform label name and the coordinates at which the label
(attached to the displayed waveform of the specified reference)
is displayed. The reference waveform is specified by x. The
value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from
the File menu and then choosing Label from the drop-down list.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe?, REF<x>:LABel:XPOS?,
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS?
Syntax
REF<x>:LABel?
Argument
None
Example
REF1:LABel?
This query might return :REF1:LABel:NAMe
"Myname";:XPOS-200;:YPOS 50.
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe
Description
This command sets or queries the label of the designated
waveform. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value
of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File
menu,choosing Label from the drop-down list, selecting the tab
associated with the reference for which you want to create a
label, and entering a label in the Label box.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
REF<x>:LABel
Syntax 1
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe <String>
320
Syntax 2
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe?
Argument
•
<String>
This is the character string that will be used for the reference
waveform label name.
Example 1
REF3:LABel:NAMe?
This query might return :REF3:LABEL:NAME "Signal2",
indicating that the label name for Reference 3 is currently set to
"Signal2".
Example 2
REF4:LABel:NAMe "My Reference"
This command sets the label name of Reference 4 to "My
Reference".
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the
label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified
reference) is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen The
reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu, choosing
Label from the drop-down list, selecting the tab associated with
the reference for which you want to position a label, and entering
a value in the X Position box.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
REF<x>:LABel
Syntax 1
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for
the selected reference is displayed, relative to the left edge of
the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0
through 500.
321
Example 1
REF4:LABel:XPOS 10
This command moves the waveform label for the REF3
waveform, so that it begins 10 pixels to the right of the left edge
of the screen.
Example 2
REF2:LABel:XPOS?
This query might return :REF2:LABEL:XPOS 150, indicating
that the x-axis for the REF 2 waveform is currently 150 pixels to
the right of the left edge of the screen.
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the
label (attached to the displayed waveform of the specified
reference) is displayed, relative to the top edge of the screen. The
reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu, choosing
Label from the drop-down list, selecting the tab associated with
the reference for which you want to position a label, and entering
a value in the Y Position box.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
REF<x>:LABel
Syntax 1
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for
the selected reference is displayed, relative to the top edge of
the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 to
385.
Example 1
REF3:LABel:YPOS -10
This command moves the waveform label for the REF 3
waveform to just beneath (10 pixels) the top of the screen.
Example 2
REF2:LABel:YPOS?
322
This query might return :REF2:LABEL:YPOS 0, indicating that
the waveform label for the REF 2 waveform is currently located
just beneath the top of the screen.
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of a reference
waveform The reference waveform is specified by x. The value
of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms
from the File menu, choosing Reference Setup… from the dropdown list, selecting a reference waveform, and then entering the
Position value using the multipurpose knob.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the
waveform to move up, and decreasing the position value causes
the waveform to move down. Position adjusts only the display
position of a waveform. The position value determines the
vertical graticule coordinate at which signal values are displayed.
For example, if the position for Reference 3 is set to 2.0, the
signal represented by that reference will be displayed at 2.0
divisions above the center of the screen.
Note: References are static. All position and scale changes are
applied in a post-processing mode.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:POSition, MATH<x>:POSition
Syntax 1
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the desired position, in divisions from the center
horizontal graticule. The range is from -5 to 5 divisions.
Example 1
REF2:VERTical:POSition 1.3E+00
This command positions the Reference 2 input signal 1.3
divisions above the center horizontal graticule.
Example 2
REF1:VERTical:POSition?
323
This query might return :REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION 1.3000E+00, indicating that the current position of Reference 1
is 1.3 divisions below the center horizontal graticule.
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of a reference
waveform. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value
of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File
menu, choosing Reference Setup… from the drop-down list,
selecting a reference waveform, and then entering the Scale
value using the multipurpose knob.
Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter. For a signal with
constant amplitude, increasing the Scale causes the waveform to
be displayed smaller. Decreasing the scale causes the waveform
to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms, but affects reference and math
waveforms differently from channel waveforms:
•
For reference and math waveforms, this setting controls the
display only, graphically scaling these waveforms and
having no affect on the acquisition hardware.
•
For channel waveforms, this setting controls the vertical size
of the acquisition window as well as the display scale. The
range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe
attached and any other external factors you have specified.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:SCAle, MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Syntax 1
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the gain in user units per division.
324
Example 1
REF4:VERTical:SCAle 100E-03
This command sets the Reference 4 scale to 100 mV per
division.
Example 2
CH2:SCAle?
This query might return :REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000e+00, indicating that the current vertical scale setting for
Reference 2 is 1 V per division.
REM
Description
This command (no query form) embeds a comment within GPIB
programs as a means of internally documenting the programs.
The instrument ignores these embedded comment lines.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
NEWpass, *PUD
Syntax
REM <QString>
Argument
•
<QString>
This is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters.
Example
REM "This is a comment"
The instrument ignores this comment string.
ROSc:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the 10 MHz
timebase reference. Depending on the command argument that
you specify, you can use an external reference or use the internal
crystal oscillator as the timebase reference.
This command is also useful for synchronizing multiple
instruments.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
ROSc:STate
325
Syntax 1
ROSc:SOUrce {INTERnal|EXTernal}
Syntax 2
ROSc:SOUrce?
Arguments
•
INTERnal
This specifies the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as the
timebase reference.
•
EXTernal
This specifies the user-supplied external signal as the
timebase reference.
Example 1
ROSc:SOUrce INTERnal
This command specifies the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as
the timebase reference.
Example 2
ROSc:SOUrce?
This query might return: ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL, indicating
that the 10 MHz crystal oscillator is being used as the timebase
reference.
ROSc:STate?
Description
This query-only command returns the state of the 10 MHz
timebase reference. This command will return either LOCKED
or UNLOCKED.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
ROSc:SOUrce
Syntax
ROSc:STate?
Example
ROSc:STate?
This query might return :ROSC:STATE LOCKED, indicating that
the state of the 10 MHz timebase reference is locked.
SAVe:SETUp
Description
This command (no query form) saves the current front-panel
setup into the specified memory location or file. This is
326
equivalent to selecting Instrument Setup from the File menu and
then choosing the Save Setups tab.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp ,*SAV
Syntax
SAVe:SETUp {<file path>|<NR1>}
Arguments
•
<file path>
This is the location from where the waveform will be
recalled.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and
path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s
are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will
read the waveform from the default directory. <filename>
stands for a filename of up to 125 characters, followed by a
period (".") and the three-character extension "SET". The
instrument will generate an error if you use any other
extension for saving a setup.
•
<NR1>
This specifies a location for saving the current front-panel
setup. The front-panel setup value ranges from 1 to 10.
Using an out-of-range value causes an execution error. Any
settings that have been stored previously at this location will
be overwritten.
Example 1
SAVe:SETUp 5
This command saves the current front-panel setup in memory
location 5.
Example 2
SAVe:SETUp "TEK00000.SET"
This command saves the current front-panel setup in the file
TEK00000.SET in the default directory and on the default
drive.
SAVe:WAVEform
Description
This command (no query form) saves a waveform to one of four
reference memory locations or a file. This command is
equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu
and choosing Save Wfm from the drop-down list.
327
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
DELEte:WAVEform, RECAll:WAVEform
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>,{<file path>|REF<x>}
Arguments
•
<wfm>
This is the waveform that will be saved. Valid waveforms
include CH<x>, MATH<y>, and REF<x>.
•
REF<x>
This specifies the location in internal reference memory to
where the waveform is stored.
•
<file path>
This is the location to where the waveform is stored.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and
path. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s
are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will
read the waveform from the default directory. <filename>
stands for a filename of up to 125 characters, followed by a
period (".") and the three-character extension. Internal
format waveforms use the .wfm extension for spreadsheet
format files or the .dat extension for MathCad format files.
The instrument will generate an error if you use any other
extension for saving a waveform.
Example 1
SAVe:WAVEform MATH2,REF2
This command saves the Math2 waveform in reference memory
location2.
Example 2
SAVe:WAVEform MATH1,"TEK0000.WFM"
This command saves the Math1 waveform to the file
TEK00000.WFM in the default directory and on the default drive.
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
Description
This command specifies or returns the file format for saved
waveforms. Waveform header and timing information is
included in the resulting file of non-internal formats. The
instrument saves DPO waveforms as a 500x200 matrix, with the
first row corresponding to the most recently acquired data. The
values specified by DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP determine
328
the range of waveform data to output. In the event that
DATa:STOP value is greater than the current record length, the
current record length determines the last output value.
This command is equivalent to selecting Export Setup from the
File menu, clicking the Waveforms tab and choosing the desired
waveform file format from the Data destination drop-down list.
Note that you choose the waveform file format after first
selecting Select for Export from the File menu and then choosing
Waveform (data) from the drop-down list.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
SAVe:WAVEform, WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt,
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Syntax 1
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
{INTERNal|MATHCad|MATLab|SPREADSHEETCsv|SPREADSH
EETTxt}
Syntax 2
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?
Arguments
•
INTERNal
This specifies that waveforms are saved in an internal
format, using a .wfm filename extension. These files can be
recalled as reference waveforms. When this argument is
specified, the settings specified via the DATa:STARt and
DATa:STOP commands have no meaning as the entire
waveform is saved.
•
MATHCad
This specifies that waveforms are saved in MathCad format,
using a .dat filename extension. When saving in this format,
waveform values are delimited with new lines. MathCad
format enables easy import of waveform data into MathCad
or MATLAB.
329
For FastAcq waveforms, data is imported as a matrix. For
these formats, waveform header and timing information is
saved in a separate header file. MathCad format header files
use a _hdr.dat extension.
•
MATLab
This specifies that waveforms are saved in Matlab format,
using a .dat filename extension. When saving in this format,
waveform values are delimited with new lines. MATLAB
format enables easy import of waveform data into MathCad
or MATLAB.
For FastAcq waveforms, data is imported as a matrix. For
these formats, waveform header and timing information is
saved in a separate header file. MATLAB format header files
use a _hdr.dat extension.
•
SPREADSHEETCsv
This specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that
contains comma delimited values. These waveform data files
are named using the .csv filename extension. Saving
waveforms in CSV format enables spreadsheet programs to
import the data.
•
SPREADSHEETTxt
This specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that
contains tab delimited values. These waveform data files are
named using the .txt filename extension. Saving waveforms
in this format enables spreadsheet programs to import the
data.
Example 1
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat INTERNal
This command specifies that the internal file format is the format
used for saving waveforms.
Example 2
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?
This query might return: SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
INTERNAL, indicating that waveforms are saved using the
internal format.
SELect?
Description
This query-only command returns the selected waveform that is
affected by the front-panel controls and the display status (on or
off) of all waveforms. This query command is equivalent to
selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and
viewing the Source waveform setting.
330
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect?
Example
SELect?
This query might return the waveform and status information as
:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH1 0;MATH2
0;MATH3 0;MATH4 0;REF1 0;REF2 0;REF3 0;REF4
0;CONTROL CH1
SELect:<wfm>
Description
This command turns on the display of a specified waveform and
also resets the acquisition. The query returns whether the channel
is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected
waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
SELect:<wfm> {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
SELect:<wfm>?
Arguments
•
ON
This turns on the display of the specified waveform. This
waveform also becomes the selected waveform.
•
OFF
This turns off the display of the specified waveform.
•
<NR1>
A 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any
other value turns on the display of the specified waveform.
Example
SELect:CH2 ON
This command turns the channel 2 waveform display on, and
selects channel 2.
SELect:REF1?
This query might return :SELECT:REF1, indicating that REF1 is
the selected waveform.
331
SELect:CONTRol <wfm>
Description
This command sets or queries the waveform that is selected as
the implied recipient of channel-related commands that support
legacy-style programs. The command form also performs the
equivalent of a SELECT:<wfm> ON command. This command
is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure
menu and either viewing or setting the Source waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
SELect:CONTROl (CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>)
Syntax 2
SELect:CONTROl?
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This selects the specified channel waveform as the
waveform that is affected by the front-panel controls. The
valid channel waveform range is from 1 through 4.
•
MATH<x>
This selects the specified math waveform as the waveform
that is affected by the front-panel controls. The valid math
waveform range is from 1 through 4.
•
REF<x>
This selects the specified reference waveform as the
waveform that is affected by the front-panel controls. The
valid reference waveform range is from 1 through 4.
Example 1
SELect:CONTROl CH2
This command resets acquisition, displays channel 2, and causes
the selected waveform to be the implied object of waveform
commands.
Example 2
SELect:CONTROl?
This query might return :SELECT:CONTROL MATH3, indicating
that math 3 is the implied object of waveform commands.
332
SETUp:NAMe
Description
This command sets and queries a setup label that you define.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Setup from
the File menu, choosing the Save Setups tab, and adding a label
to the selected setup.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
SAVe:SETUp
Syntax 1
SETUp:NAMe <NR1>,<QString>
Syntax 2
SETUp:NAMe? <NR1>
Arguments
•
<NR1>
This specifies a location in which the setup label is stored.
Location values range from 1 through 10.
•
<QString>
This is a string containing the setup label.
Example 1
SETUp:NAMe 1 "My Setup"
This command changes the setup label for internal setup location
1 to "My Setup".
Example 2
SETUp:NAMe? 2
This query might return :SETUP:NAME 2,"My Setup",
indicating that "My Setup" is the setup label that you defined for
internal setup location 2.
SET?
Description
This query-only command returns the commands that list the
instrument settings, except for configuration information for the
calibration values. You can use these commands to return the
instrument to the state it was in when you made the SET? query.
This command is identical to the *LRN? command.
Group
Miscellaneous
333
Related Commands
HEADer, *LRN?, VERBose
Syntax
SET?
Note: The SET? query always returns command headers,
regardless of the setting of the HEADer command. This is
because the returned commands are intended to be sent back to
the instrument as a command string. The VERBose command
can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should
be abbreviated or full-length.
Example
SET?
This query might return the following response:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE
SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET
1;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB1:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB2:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:WINDOW:HEIGHT 236;WIDTH
640;:APPLICATION:SCOPEAPP:STATE RUNNING;WINDOW
FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE
NOTRUNNING;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE
FALLING;:CMDBATCH 1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK
NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE
1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE
NORMAL;MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR
DEFAULT;:DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE
FULL;INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 75.0000;AUTOBRIGHT
1;SCREENSAVER 1;SCREENSAVERDELAY
28800;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE
VECTORS;TRIGBAR SHORT;TRIGT 1;VARPERSIST
500.0000E-3;:HARDCOPY:FILENAME "untitled";PORT
FILE;:DIAG:LEVEL
SUBSYS;:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
INTERNAL;:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL
0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME 1.5000E6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION
AND;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3
1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH;CH2 X;CH3
X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE
RISE;THRESHOLD 1.2000;SOURCE
CH2;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.2000;SOURCE
CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E9;SETTIME 3.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN
TRUE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE
CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF
ACCEPT;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE
INSIDE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E9;LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4
HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
334
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4
1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2
HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4
HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4
1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH
2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME
2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
FASTERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT
2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN
WITHIN;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY
STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED;SCAN
RATE1;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS;HOLDOFF:FIELD
0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;POLARITY
NORMAL;SCAN RATE1;SOURCE CH1;STANDARD
NTSC;:TRIGGER:B:STATE 0;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL
0.0000;BY EVENTS;EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE
RISE;COUPLING DC;:TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E9;EVENTS:COUNT 2;:MATH1:DEFINE " ";NUMAVG
2;VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000;POSITION
0.0000;:MATH1:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
65;:MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000;GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6;REFLEVEL
20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3;SPAN
600.0000E+6;CENTER 325.0000E+6;RESBW
1.0000E+6;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 35.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0;:MATH2:DEFINE " ";NUMAVG
2;VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000;POSITION
0.0000;:MATH2:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
80;:MATH2:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000;GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6;REFLEVEL
20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3;SPAN
600.0000E+6;CENTER 325.0000E+6;RESBW
1.0000E+6;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 35.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0;:MATH3:DEFINE " ";NUMAVG
2;VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000;POSITION
0.0000;:MATH3:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
95;:MATH3:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000;GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6;REFLEVEL
20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3;SPAN
600.0000E+6;CENTER 325.0000E+6;RESBW
1.0000E+6;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 35.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0;:MATH4:DEFINE " ";NUMAVG
2;VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000;POSITION
0.0000;:MATH4:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
110;:MATH4:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS
0.0000;GATEWIDTH 2.0000E-6;REFLEVEL
20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET 223.6000E-3;SPAN
600.0000E+6;CENTER 325.0000E+6;RESBW
1.0000E+6;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS 35.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0;:HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT
30.0000,25.1000,70.0000,75.2000;DISPLAY
LINEAR;STATE 0;FUNCTION HORIZONTAL;SIZE
2.0000;SOURCE CH1;:CH1:BANDWIDTH
1.0000E+9;COUPLING DC;DESKEW 0.0000;OFFSET
335
0.0000;INVERT 0;POSITION 0.0000;SCALE 100.0000E3;TERMINATION 1.0000E+6;PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN
1.0000;EXTUNITS "None";:CH1:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS
5;YPOS 5;:CH2:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9;COUPLING
DC;DESKEW 0.0000;OFFSET 0.0000;INVERT 0;POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 100.0000E-3;TERMINATION
1.0000E+6;PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000;EXTUNITS
"None";:CH2:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
20;:CH3:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9;COUPLING DC;DESKEW
0.0000;OFFSET 0.0000;INVERT 0;POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 100.0000E-3;TERMINATION
1.0000E+6;PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000;EXTUNITS
"None";:CH3:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
35;:CH4:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+9;COUPLING DC;DESKEW
0.0000;OFFSET 0.0000;INVERT 0;POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 100.0000E-3;TERMINATION
1.0000E+6;PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000;EXTUNITS
"None";:CH4:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
50;:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH1 0;MATH2
0;MATH3 0;MATH4 0;REF1 0;REF2 0;REF3 0;REF4
0;CONTROL CH1;:CURSOR:STATE 0;FUNCTION
VBARS;MODE INDEPENDENT;SOURCE CH1;VBARS:UNITS
SECONDS;POSITION1 -1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E6;:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 300.0000E-3;POSITION2
-300.0000E-3;:CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1 -1.6000E6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6;:CURSOR:SPLIT:POSITION1 1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6;SOURCE2 CH1;UNITS
BASE;:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 0;POSITION
50.0000;TIME 0.0000;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE
400.0000E-9;POSITION 50.0000;SAMPLERATE
1.2500E+9;:HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
5000;RESOLUTION 5000;ROLL
AUTO;:MEASUREMENT:GATING OFF;METHOD
HISTOGRAM;IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED;SOURCE1
CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS4:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS5:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS6:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS7:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS8:STATE 0;TYPE
UNDEFINED;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;DELAY:EDGE1
RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1
0.0000;MID2
0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2
336
50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE
OFF;WEIGHTING 32;:ZOOM:MODE 0;GRATICULE:SPLIT
FIFTYFIFTY;:ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK
ALL;:ZOOM:CH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE
2;:ZOOM:CH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:CH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:CH2:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:CH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:CH3:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:CH4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:CH4:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:MATH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:MATH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:MATH2:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:MATH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:MATH3:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:MATH4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:MATH4:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:REF2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:REF3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:REF3:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;:ZOOM:REF4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;SCALE 2;:ZOOM:REF4:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 1.0000;:REF1:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS
5;YPOS 125;:REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-3;:REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;:REF2:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
140;:REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-3;:REF2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;:REF3:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
155;:REF3:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-3;:REF3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;:REF4:LABEL:NAME "";XPOS 5;YPOS
170;:REF4:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000E-3;:REF4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000;:DATA:DESTINATION REF1;ENCDG
RIBINARY;SOURCE CH1;START 1;STOP 500
TEKSecure
Description
This command initializes both waveform and setup memories,
overwriting any previously stored data.
TEKSecure deletes all four waveform reference memory slots on
the hard drive, if they exist, and puts all setups in the factoryinitialized state. External setups that are stored on the hard drive
are not affected.
337
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
TEKSecure
Example
TEKSecure
This command initializes both waveform and setup memories.
TEST
Description
This command (no query form) provides the ability to select and
execute an item at any level of the test hierarchy (Test, Area or
Subsystem). This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu, choosing a test and then
pressing Run.
Note: Turning off both DIAg:CONTROL:HALT and
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP before executing the TEST command
is recommended.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST:RESults?, TEST:RESults:VERBose?, TEST:STOP
Syntax
TEST
Argument
•
<NR3>
This sets the test ID, which ranges from 0 through 3
characters. If no test ID is specified, all available
diagnostics are executed.
Example 1
TEST "1"
This command executes all Acquisition tests
(Subsystem:Acquisition).
Example 2
TEST "11"
This command executes all Acquisition Memory tests
(Subsystem:Acquisition, Area:Memory)
Example 3
TEST "113"
This command executes a specific Acquisition Memory test
(Subsystem:Acquisition, Area:Memory, Test:Address Lines).
338
TEST:RESults?
Description
This query-only command returns an abbreviated status about
the results of the last TEST execution. This command is
equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities
menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST, TEST:RESults:VERBose?
Syntax
TEST:RESults?
Example 1
TEST:RESults?
This query might return :TEST:RESULTS "135", indicating
the specific failure code of the first test failure.
Example 2
TEST:RESults?
This query might return :TEST:RESULTS "PASS",
indicating that the previously executed test passed.
Example 3
TEST:RESults?
This query might return
:TEST:RESULTS "*****"
indicating that the test was not run.
TEST:RESults:VERBose?
Description
This query-only command returns a more explanatory message
about the results of the last TEST execution than the
TEST:RESults query. This command is equivalent to selecting
Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then clicking
the Error Log button.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST, TEST:RESults?
Syntax
TEST:RESults:VERBose?
339
Example
TEST:RESults:VERBose?
This query might return
:TEST:RESULTS:VERBOSE DIAG ABORTED, ERROR 15 in
A2D-Dmux 1 interconnects"
TEST:STOP
Description
This command (no query form) causes test (or diagnostics)
execution to terminate at the end of the next low-level test. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from
the Utilities menu and then clicking Abort.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:STOP
Syntax
TEST:STOP
Example
TEST:STOP
This command terminates test (or diagnostics) execution at the
end of the next low-level test.
TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries the time that the instrument
displays. This command is equivalent to selecting Set Time &
Date from the Utilities menu and then setting the fields in the
Time group box.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
DATe
Syntax 1
TIMe <Qstring>
Syntax 2
TIMe?
Argument
•
<QString>
This is a time in the form "hh:mm:ss" where hh refers to a
340
two-digit hour number, mm refers to a two-digit minute
number from 01 to 60, and ss refers to a two-digit second
number from 01 to 60.
Example 1
TIME "14:00:00"
This command sets the time to exactly 2:00 p.m.
Example 2
DATE?
This query might return :TIME "14:05:17, indicating the
current time is set to 2:05 p.m. and 17 seconds.
TRIGger
Description
This command forces a trigger event to occur. The query returns
the current trigger parameters for the instrument.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger FORCe
Syntax 2
TRIGger?
Argument
•
FORCe
This creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is set to
READy, the acquisition will complete. Otherwise, this
command will be ignored. This is equivalent to selecting A
Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then
clicking Force Trigger.
Example 1
TRIGger FORCe
This command forces a trigger event to occur.
Example 2
TRIGger?
This query might return these trigger parameters:
:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE
;LEVEL 0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME
250.0000E-9;
:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE
RISE;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION
AND;WHEN TRUE
;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.4000;CH2 1.4000;CH3 1.4000;CH4
1.4000;
341
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC
:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E9;MORELIMIT
5.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE
RISE
;THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH2;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD
:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC
:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-9;SETTIME 3.0000E9;:TRIGGER
:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE
:WHEN TRUE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE
CH1
;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF ACCEPT;POLARITY
POSITIVE;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS
;WIDTH 2.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME
2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
SLOWERTHAN;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E9;HIGHLIMIT
2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A
:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E9;
:TRIGGER:B:STATE 0;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL 0.0000;BY
EVENTS
;EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING
DC;:TRIGGER:B
:TIME 16.0000E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2
TRIGger:A
Description
This command sets the A trigger level automatically to 50% of
the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger
input signal. The query returns current A trigger parameters. The
trigger level is the voltage threshold through which the trigger
source signal must pass to generate a trigger event. This
command is equivalent to pushing the LEVEL knob on the front
panel.
Group
Trigger
342
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?, TRIGger:A:PULSE?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A SETLevel
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A?
Argument
•
SETLevel
This sets the A trigger level to 50% of the range of the
minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
Example 1
TRIGger:A SETLevel
This command sets the A trigger level to 50% of the range of the
minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
Example 2
TRIGger:A?
This query might return the following A trigger parameters;
:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE
;LEVEL 0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME
250.0000E-9;
:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE
RISE;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION
AND;WHEN TRUE
;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.4000;CH2 1.4000
;CH3 1.4000;CH4
1.4000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH
;CH2 X;CH3 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT
5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD
:CLOCK:EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH2;:TRIGGER
:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH1;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E9;SETTIME
3.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN
TRUE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS
GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF
ACCEPT
;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER
343
:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A
:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY
POSITIVE
;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE
:TRANSITION:WHEN
SLOWERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH
:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN
WITHIN
;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY
STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E-9
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
Description
This query-only command returns the trigger source, coupling,
and slope for the A edge trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Edge Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the
current setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse, TRIGger:A:LOGIc
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
Example
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE
CH1;COUPLING DC;SLOPE RISE, indicating the trigger source,
coupling, and slope for the A edge trigger.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Description
This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the A
edge trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event
(Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Edge
Trigger, and choosing from the Coupling drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
{AC|DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej}
344
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling?
345
Arguments
•
AC
This selects AC trigger coupling, which passes the input
signals above 60 Hz to the trigger circuitry.
•
DC
This selects DC trigger coupling, which passes all input
signals to the trigger circuitry.
•
HFRej
This coupling attenuates signals above 50 kHz before
passing the signals to the trigger circuitry.
•
LFRej
This coupling attenuates signals below 80 kHz before
passing the signals to the trigger circuitry.
•
NOISErej
This coupling provides stable triggering by increasing the
trigger hysteresis. Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger
sensitivity to noise but may require greater trigger signal
amplitude.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling DC
This command sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC,
indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Description
This command sets or queries the slope for the A edge trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Slope.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?
346
Arguments
•
RISe
This specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a
signal.
•
FALL
This specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a
signal.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE FALL,
indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe RISe
This command sets the A edge trigger slope to positive, which
triggers on the rising edge of the signal.
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the A edge trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing from the Source
drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce {AUXiliary|CH<x>|LINE}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?
Arguments
•
AUXiliary
This specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger
Input connector located on the rear panel of the instrument.
•
CH<x>
This specifies one input channel as the A edge trigger
source.
•
LINE
This specifies AC line voltage.
347
Example 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1,
indicating that channel 1 is the A edge trigger source.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH1
This command sets channel 1 as the A edge trigger source.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Description
This query-only command returns the A trigger holdoff
parameters. These parameters specify the time period during
which the trigger circuitry is not looking to generate a trigger
event. This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the
Trig menu and then viewing the current settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?, TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY,
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Syntax
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Example
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME
900.0000E-09;BY DEFAULT, indicating that the A edge
trigger holdoff time is set 900 ns.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?
Description
This query-only command returns the holdoff time actually used
(expressed in seconds) by the A trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then
viewing the current Trig Holdoff value.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?, TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY,
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Syntax
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?
348
Example
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL
4.0000E-06, showing that the holdoff time is set to 4 µs.
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY
Description
This command sets or queries the type of holdoff for the A
trigger. Holdoff types are expressed as either user-specified time
(TIMe) or by an internally calculated minimum time value
(DEFAult/AUTO). This command is equivalent to selecting
Holdoff from the Trig menu and then setting the Holdoff type.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY {TIMe|DEFAult}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY {TIMe|RANDOM|AUTO}
Syntax 3
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY?
Arguments
•
TIMe
This enables you to set the holdoff time via the
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe command.
•
DEFAult
This automatically calculates a holdoff time to use. This time
is typically equivalent to the greater of 1/2 screen (5
divisions) of time or 250 ns. The maximum value is 12 s. For
example, if the instrument is set to 1 ms/division then the
default holdoff will be 1 ms/division x 25 divisions = 25 ms.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:BY TIME,
indicating that you will set the holdoff time.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY TIMe
This command sets the holdoff to the "by time" setting. This
enables you to set the holdoff time.
349
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries the A trigger holdoff time. This
command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu
and then choosing the desired Trig Holdoff.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the holdoff time in seconds. The range is from
250 ns through 12.0 s.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIME?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFFTIME
1.2000E-06, indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to
1.2 µs.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe 10
This command sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s.
TRIGger:A:LEVel
Description
This command sets or queries the level for the A trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu
and then viewing or setting the trigger Level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LEVel {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LEVel?
350
Arguments
•
ECL
This specifies the ECL high level.
•
TTL
This specifies the TTL high level.
•
<NR3>
This specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LEVel?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LEVel 1.3000E+00,
indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1.3 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LEVel TTL
This command sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level, which
is 1.4 V.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Description
This query-only command returns all of the A logic trigger
parameters.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGic?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGic?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN
;FUNCTION AND;WHEN TRUE;THRESHOLD:CH1
1.4000;CH2 1.4000
;CH3 1.4000;CH4
1.4000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH
;CH2 X;CH3 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT
5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD
:CLOCK:EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH2;:TRIGGER:A
:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH1;
351
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E9;SETTIME
3.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE;:TRIGGER
:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
Description
This command sets or queries the class of the Logic Trigger.
Used in conjunction with the TRIGger:A:TYPe command, this
command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern, Logic State or
Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:TYPe, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss {PATtern|STATE|SETHold}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss?
Arguments
•
PATtern
In four-channel instruments, this argument sets the
instrument to trigger when the specified logical
combinations of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met. On twochannel instruments, only channel 1 and channel 2 are
available.
•
STATE
In four-channel instruments, this argument sets the
instrument to trigger when the specified conditions of
channels 1, 2, and 3 are met after the channel 4 (clock)
condition is met. On two-channel instruments, only channel
1 and channel 2 (clock) are available.
•
SETHold
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on setup and
hold violations between a data source and a clock source.
Use one channel input as the clock signal and a second
channel input as the data input. The clocking and data levels
are used to determine if a clock or data transition has
occurred.
352
Example 1
TRIGger:A:TYPe LOGIc
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss PATTERN
This command sets the trigger A logic class to PATtern, which
causes the instrument to trigger when the specified logical
combinations of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
Description
This command sets or queries the logical combination of the
input channels for the A pattern and A state logic triggers. This
command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu,selecting Pattern or State for the
Trigger Type, and setting or viewing the Pattern Type.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?
Arguments
•
AND
This specifies to trigger if all conditions are true.
•
NANd
This specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are false.
•
NOR
This specifies to trigger if all conditions are false.
•
OR
This specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are true.
353
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCTion?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION
NAND, which indicates that the instrument will trigger if and of
the logic conditions are false.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCTion AND
This command sets the logical combination of channels to be
true when all conditions are true.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Description
On four-channel instruments, this query-only command returns
the A logic trigger input expected for channel 1, 2, and 3.
Channel 4 is set or queried with the command
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4.
On two-channel instruments, this query returns the A logic
trigger input expected for channel 1. Channel 2 is set or queried
with the command TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2.
This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger
Setup and viewing or setting the Input Threshold for channel 1
through 3 for four-channel instruments or channel 1 for twochannel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X, indicating that a logic high is expected on
channel 1 while channel 2 and channel three are Don't Care.
354
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A logical input for the logic
trigger channel specified by x. The value of x ranges from 1
through 3 for four-channel instruments. For two-channel
instruments x can only be 1. Note that CH4 on four-channel
instruments or CH2 on two-channel instruments cannot be set or
queried with this command. For details about setting this
channel, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 or
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2. This command is
equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the
Trig menu and then choosing the desired logical input from the
Ch<x> drop-down list, which is located in the Input Threshold
group box.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
•
HIGH
This specifies the logic high.
•
LOW
This specifies the logic low.
•
X
This specifies a "do not care" state.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH1?
This query might return :TRIGGER:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X,
indicating that the setting for the A logic trigger input to channel
1 does not matter.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH2 HIGH
This command sets the A logic trigger input to logic HIGH for
channel 2.
355
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Description
This query-only command returns the conditions used for
generating an A logic pattern trigger, with respect to the defined
input pattern, and identifies the maximum and minimum time
that the selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the
Trig menu and then viewing the current setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT
5.0000E-9.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
Description
This command sets or queries the A logic trigger input for
channel 2 in two-channel instruments only. The command
specifies the logic value used when the pattern trigger detects the
threshold level. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting
Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired
logical input from the Ch2 drop-down list, which is located in
the Input Threshold group box.
To set or query the A logic trigger input for a four-channel
instrument, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
356
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2 {HIGH|LOW|X}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2?
Arguments
•
HIGH
This specifies the logic high.
•
LOW
This specifies the logic low.
•
X
This specifies a "do not care" state.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH2 HIGH, indicating
that the logic input for channel 2 is logic high.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2 HIGH
This command sets the A logic trigger input to logic high for
channel 2 when the logic class is set to PATtern. When the
threshold level is detected, HIGH places a 1 on the channel 2
input to the selected function.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
Description
This command sets or queries the A logic trigger input for
channel 4 in four-channel instruments only. The command
specifies the logic value used when the pattern trigger detects the
threshold level. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting
Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired
logical input from the Ch4 drop-down list, which is located in
the Input Threshold group box.
To set or query the A logic trigger input for a two-channel
instrument, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 {HIGH|LOW|X}
357
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4?
Arguments
•
HIGH
This specifies the logic high.
•
LOW
This specifies the logic low.
•
X
This specifies a "do not care" state.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 HIGH, indicating
that the logic input for channel 4 is logic high.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 HIGH
This command sets the A logic trigger input to logic high for
channel 4 when the logic class is set to PATtern. When the
threshold level is detected, HIGH places a 1 on the channel 4
input to the selected function.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A
logic pattern trigger with respect to the defined input pattern.
This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern for Trigger Type,
and choosing a trigger condition from the Pattern drop-down list,
which is located in the Trigger When group box.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
{TRUe|FALSe|LESSThan|MOREThan}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn?
358
Arguments
•
TRUe
This argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern
becomes true.
•
FALSe
This argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern
becomes false.
•
LESSThan
This argument sets the instrument to trigger if the specific
pattern is true less than the time set by the
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit command.
•
MOREThan
This argument sets the instrument to trigger if the specific
pattern is true longer than the specified time set by the
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit command.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE, indicating that the A logic pattern will trigger when the
pattern becomes true.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn FALSe
This command specifies to trigger the A logic pattern when the
pattern becomes false.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Description
This command sets or queries the maximum time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main)
Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern as the
Trigger Type, selecting Less Than for the Pattern in the Trigger
When settings, and entering a maximum value for Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit?
359
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the amount of time to hold the pattern true.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT
5.0000E-09, indicating that the selected pattern may hold true
for up to 5 ns and still generate an A logic pattern trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit 10.0E+00
This command sets the maximum time that the selected pattern
may hold true (and generate an A logic pattern trigger) to 10 s.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Description
This command sets or queries the minimum time that the
selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main)
Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Pattern as the
Trigger Type, selecting More Than for the Pattern in the Trigger
When settings, and entering a minimum value for Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the amount of time to hold the pattern true.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT
5.0000E-09, indicating that the selected pattern must hold true
for at least 5 ns to generate an A logic pattern trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit 10.0E+00
360
This command sets the minimum time that the selected pattern
may hold true (and generate an A logic pattern trigger) to 10 s.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold?
Description
This query-only command returns the clock edge polarity,
voltage threshold and source input; data voltage threshold and
source; and both setup and hold times for setup and hold
violation triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting
Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the
current setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold?
This query might return the settings
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
;THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH2;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA
:THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE
CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD
:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-9;SETTIME 3.0000E-9
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
Description
This query-only command returns the clock edge polarity,
voltage threshold and source input for setup and hold triggering.
This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from
the Trig menu and then viewing the current clock setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
361
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
RISE;THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE CH2, indicating the
current clock settings for setup and hold triggering.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Description
This command sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup
and hold triggering. This is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold
Setup from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Clock
Edge.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
•
FALL
This specifies polarity as the clock falling edge.
•
RISe
This specifies polarity as the clock rising edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE,
indicating that polarity is specified as the clock rising edge.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE RISE
This command specifies the polarity as the clock rising edge.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the clock source for the A logic
trigger setup and hold input. This is equivalent to selecting
362
Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired
channel from the Clock Source drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Argument
•
CH<x>
This specifies the input channel, which ranges from 1
through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two channel instruments.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH4,
indicating that channel 4 is the clock source for the setup and
hold input. For the A logic trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce CH1
This command specifies channel 1 as the A logic setup and hold
input.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Description
This command sets or queries the clock voltage threshold for the
setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired
Clock Level.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
{ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
363
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
Arguments
•
ECL
This specifies a preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
•
TTL
This specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
•
<NR3>
This is the clock level, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD
1.2000E+00, indicating that the clock threshold for the setup
and hold trigger is 1.2 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold TTL
This command specifies the preset TTL value of 1.4 V as the
clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?
Description
This query-only command returns the voltage threshold and data
source for the setup and hold trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and
then viewing the current data setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?
364
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.4000;SOURCE CH1, indicating the current trigger data
settings.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the data source for the setup and
hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold
Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired channel from
the Data Source drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
Argument
•
CH<x>
This specifies the input channel, which ranges from 1
through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments..
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2,
indicating that channel 2 is the current clock source for the setup
and hold trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce CH1
This command sets channel 1 as the clock source for the setup
and hold trigger.
365
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Description
This command sets or queries the data voltage threshold for
setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the
desired Data Level.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
{ECL|TTL<NR3>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
Arguments
•
ECL
This specifies the preset ECL high level of -1.3 V.
•
TTL
This specifies the preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
•
<NR3>
This is the setup and hold data level, in V.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.2000E+00, indicating that 1.2 V is the current data voltage
level for the setup and hold trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold TTL
This command specifies the preset ECL high level of 1.4 V as
the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger.
366
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
Description
This command sets or queries the hold time for setup and hold
violation triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting
Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the
desired Hold Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive
values for hold time occur after the clock edge. Negative
values occur before the clock edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-09,
indicating that the current hold time for the the setup and hold
trigger is 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime 3.0E-3
This command sets the hold time for the the setup and hold
trigger to 3 ms.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
Description
This command sets or queries the setup time for setup and hold
violation triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting
Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the
desired Setup Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
367
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation
triggering.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2.0000E-09,
indicating that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is
2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime 3.0E-6
This command specifies that the current setup time for setup and
hold trigger is 3 µs.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
Description
This query-only command returns the data input and trigger
criteria for the A logic trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and then viewing the
current logic state settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4,
TRIGger:A:LOGic:STATE:WHEn
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2
Description
This command sets or queries the slope for channel 2 when the
logic class is set to STATE in two-channel instruments. This
368
command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig
menu and then choosing the desired channel input (NEG or POS)
from the Ch2 drop-down list.
To set or query the slope of the logic state in four-channel
instruments, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2 {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2?
Arguments
•
FALL
This specifies falling edge.
•
RISe
This specifies rising edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH2 RISE,
indicating that the A logic trigger input for channel 2 is the rising
edge.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2 RISE
This command specifies that the A logic trigger input for channel
2 is the rising edge.
369
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
Description
This command sets or queries the slope for channel 4 when the
logic class is set to State in four-channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig
menu and then choosing the desired channel input (NEG or POS)
from the Ch4 (Clk) drop-down list.
To set or query the slope of the logic state in two-channel
instruments, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4?
Arguments
•
FALL
This specifies falling edge.
•
RISe
This specifies rising edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE,
indicating that the A logic trigger input for channel 4 is the rising
edge.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 RISE
This command specifies that the A logic trigger input for channel
4 is the rising edge.
370
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A
logic state trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Logic State from the Trig menu and choosing the desired
condition from the Trigger When Pattern drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn {TRUe|FALSe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn?
Arguments
•
TRUe
On four-channel instruments, this argument specifies that the
trigger occurs when the clock transition on channel 4 occurs
and the pattern of channels 1-3 are at the desired logic input
states. On two-channel instruments, this specifies that the
trigger occurs when the clock transistion on channel 2 occurs
and the pattern of channel 1 is at the desired logic input state.
•
FALSe
On four-channel instruments, this argument specifies that the
trigger occurs when the desired clock transition on channel 4
occurs and the desired logic input states on channels 1-3 are
not found. On two-channel instruments, this specifies that
the trigger occurs when the clock transistion on channel 2
occurs and the desired logic input state on channel 1 is not
found.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN
FALSE, indicating that the logic condition to trigger upon is
false.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn TRUE
This command specifies that the logic condition to trigger upon
is true.
371
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
Description
This query-only command returns the threshold voltage for all
channels in an A logic trigger. This command query is
equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the
Trig menu, choosing a logic trigger type, such as State or
Pattern, and viewing the current Input Threshold voltage
settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD CH1
24.0000E-03;CH2 1.2000E+00;CH3 1.2000E+00;CH4
1.2000E+00, indicating the threshold voltages for the channels
in an A logic trigger are as follows: channel 1 = 24 mV; channel
2 = 1.2 V; channel 3 = 1.2 V; channel 4 = 1.2 V.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A logic trigger threshold
voltage for the channel, specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for twochannel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting A
Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, choosing a
logic trigger type, such as State or Pattern, and setting the Input
Threshold voltage for the desired channel.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGic:THReshold:CH<x>?
372
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the threshold voltage.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH3
1.2000E+00, indicating that the A logic trigger threshold
voltage for channel 3 is 1.2 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIcTHReshold:CH2 3.0E-3
This command sets the A logic trigger threshold voltage for
channel 2 to 3 mV.
TRIGger:A:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries the A trigger mode. This
command is equivalent to selecting Mode from the Trig menu
and then choosing the desired Trigger Mode.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LEVel
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:MODe {AUTO|NORMal}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:MODe?
Arguments
•
AUTO
This generates a trigger if one is not detected within a
specified time period.
•
NORMal
This waits for a valid trigger event.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:MODe?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL,
indicating that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is
generated.
373
Example 2
TRIGger:A:MODe NORMAL
This command specifies that a valid trigger event must occur
before a trigger is generated.
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Description
This query-only command returns the A pulse trigger
parameters.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS
GLITCH;SOURCE
CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF
ACCEPT;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE
;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE
:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:
TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY
POSITIVE
;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A
:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
SLOWERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH
:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN
WITHIN
;POLARITY
POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY
STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E-9
374
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Description
This command sets or queries the type of pulse on which to
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting the setup menu
for the pulse type that you want from the Trig menu: Glitch
Setup, Width Setup, Runt Setup, Timeout Setup, or Transiition
Setup.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch, TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth, TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?, TRIGger:A:TYPe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
{GLItch|RUNT|WIDth|TRANsition|TIMEOut}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss?
Arguments
•
GLItch
This triggers when a pulse is found that is of the specified
polarity and width. These are set with the commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLITch:POLarity and
TRIGger:A:PULse;GLItch:WIDth.
•
RUNT
This triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage
threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold
before re-crossing the first. The thresholds are set with the
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW and
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH commands.
•
WIDth
This triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified
polarity and is either inside or outside the limits as specified
by TRIGger:A;PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit and
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit. The polarity is
selected using the TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
command.
•
TRANsition
This triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the
same direction as the specified polarity and the transition
time between the two threshold crossings is greater or less
than the specified time delta.
375
•
TIMEOut
This triggers when the pulse train stops in the selected state
for longer than the specified time.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH,
indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity
and width.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss WIDth
This command specifies a width pulse for the A trigger.
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
Description
This query-only command returns the current A glitch pulse
trigger parameters. This command query is equivalent to
selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the
current glitch trigger settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF,
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH
2.0000E-09;FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for A pulse glitch
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup
from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Polarity.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LEVel, TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
376
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
{POSITIVe|NEGative|EITher}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity?
Arguments
•
POSITIVe
This specifies that the instrument will only trigger when the
polarity of the glitch is positive.
•
NEGative
This specifies that the instrument will only trigger when the
polarity of the glitch is negative.
•
EITher
This specifies that the instrument will trigger when the
polarity of the glitch is either positive or negative.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY POSITIVE,
indicating that the polarity of the glitch must be positive for the
trigger to occur.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity EITHER
This command specifies that the polarity of the glitch can be
either positive or negative for the trigger to occur.
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF
Description
This command sets or queries the acceptance/rejection of the
glitch pulse trigger, based on width. This command is equivalent
to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the
desired Trig if Width setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF {ACCept|REJect}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF?
377
Arguments
•
ACCept
This specifies that the instrument will only trigger on pulses
that are narrower than the specified width, when the trigger
type is set to glitch. The width is specified using the
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth command.
•
REJect
This specifies that the instrument will only trigger on pulses
that are wider than the specified width, when the trigger type
is set to glitch. The width is specified using the
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth command.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:TRIGIF
ACCEPT, indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on pulses
that are narrower than the specified width.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF REJect
This command specifies that the instrument triggers on pulses
that are wider than the specified width.
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
Description
This command sets or queries the width for the A glitch trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the
Trig menu and then setting the desired Width.
For information about using the width value, refer to the
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF command.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LEVel, TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This argument specifies the width of the glitch in seconds.
378
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH
2.0000E-09, indicating that the width of the glitch is currently
set at 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth 15E-6
This command sets the width of the glitch to 15 µs.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT?
Description
This query-only command returns the current A runt trigger
parameters. This command query is equivalent to selecting Runt
Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?, TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?, TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH; CH2
X; CH3 X; CH4
LOW;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4
1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE
:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH
2.0000E-9.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc?
Description
This query-only command returns the current A runt trigger
logic parameters. This query is equivalent to selecting Runt
Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings.
Note: This command is not available in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Trigger
379
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH; CH2
X; CH3 X; CH4
LOW;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000.
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut?
Description
This query-only command returns the current A runt pulse
trigger logic input parameters. This query is equivalent to
selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the
current settings.
Note: This command is not available in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIcINPut?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut?
This query might return these parameters:
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH; CH2
X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A runt logic input for the
channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is
equivalent to setting the runt logic inputs from the Trigger When
section in the Runt Trigger menu. While all channels can be set
or queried, only channels 3 and 4 can be used if the runt source
is channel 1 or 2. Similarly, only channels 1 and 2 can be used if
the runt source is channel 3 or 4.
Note: This command is not available in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
{HIGH\LOW\X}
380
Syntax 2
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
•
HIGH
This argument specifies logic high.
•
LOW
This argument specifies logic low.
•
X
This argument specifies a don't care state.
Example 1
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut:CH2?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT CH2 LOW,
indicating that the runt logic trigger input is set to logic low for
channel 2.
Example 2
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut:CH3 HIGH
This command sets the runt logic trigger input to logic high for
channel 3.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A runt logic threshold for the
channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is
equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and
setting the runt logic threshold. While all channels can be set or
queried, only channels 3 and 4 can be used if the runt source is
channel 1 or 2. Similarly only channels 1 and 2 can be used if the
runt source is channel 3 or 4.
Note: This command is not available in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This argument specifies the threshold in volts.
381
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH1?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 0.5000,
indicating that the runt logic trigger threshold is set to 0.5 V for
channel 1.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3 0.5.
This command sets the runt logic trigger threshold to 0.5 V for
channel 3.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for the A pulse runt
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup
from the Trig menu and then choosing the Polarity setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
{POSITIVe|NEGAtive}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity?
Arguments
•
POSitive
This indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold
and the falling edge re-crosses the low threshold without
either edge ever crossing the high threshold.
•
NEGative
This indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold
and the rising edge re-crosses the high threshold without
either edge ever crossing the low threshold.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE, indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger
is positive.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity NEGATIVE
382
This command specifies that the polarity of the A pulse runt
trigger is negative.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Description
This query-only command returns the upper and lower
thresholds for the A pulse runt trigger. This command query is
equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then
viewing the Upper Level and Lower Level settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh,
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH,
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.0000E+00;LOW
8.0000E-01, indicating that the upper threshold is 2 V and that
the lower threshold is 800 mV.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh
Description
This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower
switching thresholds for the A pulse runt trigger. This command
is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and
then setting the Upper Level and Lower Level voltages.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh {TTL|ECL}
383
Arguments
•
TTL
This sets the upper threshold to 1.8 V and the lower
threshold to 800 mV, which are the nominal TTL voltage
levels.
•
ECL
This sets the upper threshold to -1.1 V and the lower
threshold to -1.5 V, which are the nominal ECL voltage
levels.
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh TTL
This command sets the threshold of the pulse runt trigger to the
nominal TTL voltage levels.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the upper limit for the A pulse runt
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup
from the Trig menu and setting the runt trigger Upper Level
voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the threshold value, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.1000E+00,
indicating that the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger is
currently set to 1.1 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH 120E-3
This command sets the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger to
120 mV.
384
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the lower limit for the A pulse runt
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup
from the Trig menu and then setting the Lower Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the threshold value, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 1.2000E-01,
indicating that the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger is set to
120 mV.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW 50E-3
This command sets the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50
mV.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries the type of pulse width the trigger
checks for when it detects a runt. This is equivalent to selecting
Runt Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired Trigger
When setting from the drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
Syntax 1 (Four-channel instruments)
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
{LOGIc|OCCurs|WIDERthan}
385
Syntax 2 (Two-channel instruments)
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn {OCCurs|WIDERthan}
Syntax 3
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn?
Arguments
•
LOGIc
This argument specifies a trigger event when a runt occurs
and the AND of the logic channels. This argument is not
available for two-channel instruments.
•
OCCurs
This argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any
detectable width occurs.
•
WIDERthan
This specifies a trigger event if a runt greater than the
specified width occurs.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN
OCCURS, indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the instrument
detects a runt of any detectable width.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn WIDERthan
This command sets the runt trigger to occur when the instrument
detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width.
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
Description
This command sets or queries the minimum width for a A pulse
runt trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup
from the Trig menu and then setting the Width.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth?
Argument
•
386
<NR3>
This specifies the minimum width, in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH
2.0000E-09, indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt
trigger is 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth 15E-6
This command sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger
to 15 µs.
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the A pulse trigger.
This source parameter applies to all classes of pulse triggers.
This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the pulse type (Glitch,
Width, Runt, Timeout, or Transiition), and then choosing the
desired channel from the Source pull-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce?
Argument
•
CH<x>
This specifies one of the input channels, which range from 1
through 4 for four-channel instruments and 1 through 2 for
two-channel instruments.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:SOURCE CH2,
indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A pulse trigger.
387
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce CH4
This command sets channel 4 as the source for the A pulse
trigger.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Description
This query-only command returns the polarity and time-out
duration for the A pulse timeout trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and
viewing the polarity in the Trigger When box and the Timer
setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY
STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E-9, indicating that the polarity
setting for the A pulse trigger is STAYSHIGH (positive) and the
timeout duration is 2 ns.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for the A pulse
timeout trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired
polarity in the Trigger When box.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity
{STAYSHigh|STAYSLow|EITher}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity?
388
Arguments
•
STAYSHigh
This indicates that a pulse edge must stay high (positive) for
the required time period to permit timeout triggering to
occur. This is the default polarity.
•
STAYSLow
This indicates that a pulse edge must stay low (negative) for
the required time period to permit timeout triggering to
occur.
•
EITher
This indicates that the polarity of the timeout trigger can stay
either high or low (positive or negative) for the required time
period to permit time out triggering to occur.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY EITHER,
indicating that the polarity of the A timeout trigger can be either
positive or negative.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity STAYSHigh
This command sets the polarity of the A timeout trigger to
positive.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries the pulse timeout trigger time
(measured in seconds). This command is equivalent to selecting
Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and setting a value for Timer.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This argument specifies the timeout period in seconds.
389
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME
2.0000E-9, indicating that the timeout is currently set to 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe 3.134E-6
This command sets the timeout to 3.134 µs.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?
Description
This query-only command returns delta time, polarity, and both
upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from
the Trig menu and then viewing the current transition settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:TYPe, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss,
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch, TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut, TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
SLOWERTHAN, indicating the current transition time trigger
settings.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime
Description
This command sets or queries the delta time used in calculating
the transition value for the transition trigger. This is equivalent to
selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the
Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
390
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DeltaTime <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DeltaTime?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the delta time, in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DeltaTime?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E09, indicating that the delta time of the transition trigger is set to
2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DeltaTime 15E-6
This command sets the delta time of the transition trigger to 15
µs.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for the transition
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition
Setup from the Trig menu and choosing from the Polarity pulldown list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity
{POSITIVe|NEGative|EITher}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity?
Arguments
•
POSITIVe
This indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower
(most negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition
triggering to occur.
391
•
NEGative
This indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper
(most positive) to lower (most negative) level for transition
triggering to occur.
•
EITher
This indicates either positive or negative polarity.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:POLARITY EITHER
indicating that the polarity can be either positive or negative.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DeltaTime NEGative
This command sets the transition polarity to negative.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
Description
This query-only command returns the upper and lower threshold
limits for the transition time trigger. This command is equivalent
to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and viewing
the Upper Level and Lower Level voltage settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3, indicating the upper and lower
threshold limits for the transition time trigger.
392
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh
Description
This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower
thresholds for the transition trigger. This command is equivalent
to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the
desired Upper Level and Lower Level voltages.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh
{TTL|ECL}
Arguments
•
TTL
This sets the upper threshold to 1.2 V and the lower
threshold to 800 mV, which represent the nominal TTL
voltage levels.
•
ECL
This sets the upper threshold to -1.1 V and the lower
threshold to -1.5 V, which represent the nominal ECL
voltage levels.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh TTL
This command sets the thresholds of the transition trigger to the
nominal TTL voltage levels.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the upper (most positive)
transition trigger threshold. This command is equivalent to
selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and then setting
the desired Upper Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>
393
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the upper threshold, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH
2.0000E+00, indicating that the upper limit of the pulse
transition trigger is 2 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH 120E-3
This command sets the upper limit of the pulse transition trigger
to 120 mV.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the lower (most negative)
transition trigger threshold. This command is equivalent to
selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the
desired Lower Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the lower threshold, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW
50.0000E-03, indicating that the lower limit of the transition
trigger is 50 mV.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW 20E-3
394
This command sets the lower limit of the transition trigger to 20
mV.
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries whether to check for a
transitioning signal that is faster or slower than the specified
delta time. This is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from
the Trig menu and choosing the Trigger When Transition Time
setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn
{FASTERthan|SLOWERthan}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn?
Arguments
•
FASTERthan
This sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is
faster than the set volts/second rate.
•
SLOWERthan
This sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is
slower than the set volts/second rate.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN FASTERTHAN,
indicating that the transition triggers when the transitioning
signal is faster than the set volts/second rate.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn SLOWERthan
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Description
This query-only command returns the width parameters for the A
pulse width trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Width Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current
395
pulse width trigger Lower Limit, Upper Limit, Trig When and
Polarity settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY
POSITIVE as the current A width trigger parameters.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
Description
This command sets or queries the upper limit for the width
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup
from the Trig menu and setting the Upper Limit.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the width trigger upper limit in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9,
indicating that the upper limit of the width trigger is set to 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit 5.0E-6
396
This command sets the upper limit of the width trigger to 5 µs.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
Description
This command sets or queries the lower limit for the width
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup
from the Trig menu and setting the pulse Lower Limit.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the A pulse width trigger lower limit, in
seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 1.0000E-9,
indicating that the lower limit of the width trigger is set to 1 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit 2.0E-6
This command sets the lower limit of the width trigger to 2 µs.
397
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for the width trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the
Trig menu and selecting the Polarity.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
{NEGAtive|POSITIVe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?
Arguments
•
NEGAtive
This specifies a negative pulse.
•
POSITIVe
This specifies a positive pulse.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE,
indicating a positive pulse.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity NEGAtive
This command sets the pulse polarity to negative.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries whether to trigger on a pulse
width that falls outside (or within) the specified range of limits.
You can define or query trigger pulse width upper and lower
limits using the TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands.
This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the
Trig menu and then choosing from the Trig When drop-down
list.
Group
Trigger
398
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn {OUTside|WIThin}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn?
Arguments
•
OUTside
This argument causes a trigger event the duration of the
pulse is greater than the high limit or less than the low limit
specified. The high and low limits are specified with the
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands
respectively.
•
WIThin
This argument causes a trigger event when the duration of
the pulse is within the high and low limits. The high and low
limits are specified with the
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit command
respectively.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN
OUTSIDE, indicating the conditions for generating a width
trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn WIThin
This command specifies that the duration of the A pulse will fall
within defined high and low limits.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow?
Description
This query-only command returns the current window trigger
parameters.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow?
399
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE
INSIDE;WHEN OCCURS;
WIDTH 2.0000e-9;LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH; CH2 X;
CH3 X; CH4 LOW;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;
CH3 1.2000;CH4
1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD
:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?
Description
This query-only command returns the current window trigger
logic parameters.
Note: This command is not available in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4
LOW;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut?
Description
This query-only command returns the current window trigger
logic input parameters.
Note: This command is not available in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIcINPut?
400
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A window logic input for the
channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is
equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu,
selecting Logic in the Trigger When box, and selecting a logic
(H, L, or X) for the channel. While all channels can be set or
queried, only channels 3 and 4 can be used if the window source
is channel 1 or 2. Similarly, only channels 1 and 2 can be used if
the window source is channel 3 or 4.
Note: This command is not available in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
{HIGH\LOW\X}
Syntax 2
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
•
HIGH
This argument specifies logic high.
•
LOW
This argument specifies logic low.
•
X
This argument specifies a Don't Care state.
Example 1
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut:CH2?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT CH2 LOW,
indicating that the window logic trigger input is set to logic low
for channel 2.
Example 2
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPut:CH3 HIGH
This command sets the window logic trigger input to logic high
for channel 3.
401
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh
Description
This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower
switching thresholds for the window trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and
then setting the Upper Level and Lower Level voltages.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh {TTL|ECL}
Arguments
•
TTL
This argument sets the upper threshold to 2.0 V and the
lower threshold to 800 mV, which are the nominal TTL
voltage levels.
•
ECL
This argument sets the upper threshold to -1.1 V and the
lower threshold to -1.5 V, which are the nominal ECL
voltage levels.
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh TTL
This command sets the threshold of the window trigger to the
nominal TTL voltage levels.
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the window logic trigger threshold
for the channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This
is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and
setting the window logic threshold in the Trigger When box.
While all channels can be set or queried, only channels 3 and 4
can be used if the window source is channel 1 or 2. Similarly,
only channels 1 and 2 can be used if the window source is
channel 3 or 4.
Note: This command is not available in two-channel
instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
<NR3>
402
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This argument specifies the window logic trigger threshold
in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH1?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
0.5000, indicating that the window logic trigger threshold is set
to 0.5 V for channel 1.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3 0.5.
This command sets the window logic trigger threshold to 0.5 V
for channel 3.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the upper limit for the pulse
window trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Window Setup from the Trig menu and setting the window
trigger Upper Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the threshold value in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.1000E+00, indicating that the upper limit of the window
trigger is set to 1.1 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH 2.0
403
This command sets the upper limit of the pulse window trigger
to 2 V.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the lower limit for the window
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup
from the Trig menu and setting the Lower Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This specifies the threshold value in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW 1.2000E01, indicating that the lower limit of the window trigger is
currently set to 120 mV.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW 0.8
This command sets the lower threshold of the window trigger to
0.8 V.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold?
Description
This query-only command returns the upper and lower
thresholds for the window trigger. This command query is
equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and
viewing the window trigger Upper Level and Lower Level
settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold?
404
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3, indicating that the upper
threshold is 1.2 V and that the lower threshold is 800 mV.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the window trigger type. This
command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig
menu and selecting Outside Limits or Inside Limits in the
Trigger When section.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe {INSide|OUTside}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe?
Arguments
•
INSide
This argument causes a trigger event to occur when a pulse
enters the window defined by the upper and lower
thresholds.
•
OUTside
This argument causes a trigger event to occur when a pulse
goes outside the window defined by the upper and lower
thresholds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE
INSIDE, indicating that the window type is set to inside, which
will cause a trigger event when a pulse enters the window
defined by the upper and lower thresholds.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe OUTside
This command sets the window type to outside.
405
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries the window trigger violation
qualification. This command is equivalent to selecting Window
Setup from the Trig menu and selecting Logic, Occurs, or Wider
than in the Trigger When box.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULseWINdow:WHEn
{LOGIc|OCCurs|WIDERthan}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn?
Arguments
•
LOGIc
This argument specifies a trigger event when a window
violation occurs on the AND of the logic channels.
•
OCCurs
This argument specifies a trigger event if any detectable
window violation occurs.
•
WIDERthan
This specifies a trigger event if a window violation greater
than the specified width occurs.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINdow:WHEN
OCCURS, indicating that a trigger will occur if the instrument
detects any window violation.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WHEn:WHEn OCCurs
This command sets the widow violation qualifier to OCCurs,
which causes a trigger to occur when the instrument detects any
window violation.
406
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow WIDth
Description
This command sets or queries the minimum width for a window
violation. This command is equivalent to selecting Window
Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Wider than in the Trigger
When box, and setting the Width.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDth?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This argument specifies the minimum width in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDth?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINdow:WIDTH
2.0000E-09, indicating that the minimum width of a valid
window violation is 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDth 15E-9
This command sets the minimum width of a valid window
violation to 15 ns.
TRIGger:A:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the type of A trigger. The four
types of triggers are of Edge, Logic, Pulse, and Video. Logic and
Pulse triggers contain classes. Logic triggers consist of State and
Pattern classes; Pulse triggers consist of Glitch, Runt, Width,
Transition, and Timeout classes. Once you have set the trigger
type, you may also need to identify the associated trigger class.
For details on selecting Logic and Pulse trigger classes, see
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss and TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
respectively. This command is similar to selecting A Event
(Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then selecting the
desired Trigger Type.
Group
Trigger
407
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss,
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:TYPe {EDGE|LOGIc|PULse|VIDeo}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:TYPe?
Arguments
•
EDGE
This is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a
signal passes through a specified voltage level in a specified
direction and is controlled by the TRIGger:A:EDGE
commands.
•
LOGIc
This specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions
are met and is controlled by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc
commands.
•
PULse
This specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is
found and is controlled by the TRIGger:A:PULse
commands.
•
VIDeo
This specifies that the trigger occurs when a video signal is
found.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:TYPe?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:TYPE PULSE, indicating
that the A trigger type is a pulse trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE
This command sets the A trigger type to EDGE.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
This query only command returns the video parameters for the A
trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
408
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT
INTERLACED;SCAN RATE1;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS;HOLDOFF:FIELD 1.0000;TIME 20.0000E3;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;SCAN RATE1;SOURCE
CH1;STANDARD NTSC.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
This query only command returns the custom video parameters
for the A trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
This query might return the parameters
:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED;SCAN
RATE1.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat
Description
This command sets or queries the video trigger format. Use this
command only when the video format is set to custom.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat
{INTERLAced|PROGressive}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat?
Arguments
•
INTERLAced
This argument sets the format for interlaced video lines.
•
PROGressive
This argument sets the format for progressive video lines.
409
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT
INTERLACED, indicating that interlaced is selected as the custom
format for the A video trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat PROGressive
This command sets the custom format for the A video trigger to
progressive lines.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal line scan rate of the
A video trigger. Use this command only when the video format
is set to custom. This is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from
the Trig menu, setting Custom for Format, and selecting the Scan
Rate from the drop-down menu.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
{RATE1|RATE2|RATE3|RATE4|RATE5}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN?
Arguments
•
RATE1
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
15 kHz through 20 kHz. This is the standard broadcast rate.
•
RATE2
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
20 kHz through 25 kHz.
•
RATE3
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
25 kHz through 35 kHz
•
RATE4
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
35 kHz through 50 kHz
•
RATE5
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
50 kHz through 65 kHz
410
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:SCAN
RATE2, indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger
custom video is set to Rate 2, which is 20 kHz to 23 kHz.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN RATE1
This command sets the scan rate of the A trigger custom video to
Rate 1, which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz (standard broadcast rate).
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
Description
This command sets or queries the video field or line that the
trigger detects.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
{ODD|EVEN|FIELD1|FIELD2|ALLFields|ALLLines|NUMER
ic}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD?
Arguments
•
ODD
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced
video odd fields.
•
EVEN
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced
video even fields.
•
FIELD1
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced
video odd fields (same as ODD).
•
FIELD2
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced
video even fields (same as EVEN).
•
ALLFields
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on all fields.
•
ALLLines
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on all video
lines.
411
•
NUMERic
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on the video
signal line specified by the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
command.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS, indicating that the A video will trigger on all video
fields.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD EVEN
This command sets the A video trigger so that it will trigger on
even fields.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD
Description
This command sets or queries the video trigger holdoff in terms
of video fields.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This argument is a real number from 0.0 to 8.5 in increments
of 0.5. The argument sets the number of fields that the
instrument waits before re-arming the video trigger.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD
5, indicating that the instrument is set to wait 5 video fields
before re-arming the trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD 4.5
This command sets the instrument to wait 4.5 video fields before
re-arming the trigger.
412
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
Description
This command sets or queries the video line number on which
the instrument triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting
Video Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Line # in the Trigger
on box, and setting the line number. Use the
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD command to actually trigger the
instrument on the line that you specify with this command.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This argument is an integer that sets the video line number
on which the instrument triggers. The following table lists
the valid choices, depending on the active video standard.
Video Line Numbering Ranges
Video Standard
Line Number Range
CUSTOM
4–3000
NTSC
1–263 (odd) and 264-525 (even)
PAL
1–625
SECAM
1–625
HD480P60
1–520
HD720P60
1–750
HD1080I50
1–11235
HD1080I60
1–1125
HD1080P24
1–1125
HD1080P25
1–1125
HD1080SF24
1–1125
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE?
This query might return :TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE 10,
indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on line 10.
413
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE 23
This command sets the instrument to trigger on the line 23.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity of the A video trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity {INVERTed|NORMAl}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity?
Argument
•
INVERTed
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on a positive
video sync pulse.
•
NORMAl
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on a negative
video sync pulse.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY
INVERTED, indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on a
positive video sync pulse.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity NORMAl
This command sets the instrument to trigger on a negative video
pulse.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN
Description
This command sets or queries the video trigger horizontal line
scan rate. This command is for compatibility with earlier
instruments in the TDS series. This command is the same as the
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN command.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN
{RATE1|RATE2|RATE3|RATE4|RATE5}
414
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN?
Arguments
•
RATE1
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
15 kHz through 20 kHz. This is the standard broadcast rate.
•
RATE2
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
20 kHz through 25 kHz.
•
RATE3
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
25 kHz through 35 kHz.
•
RATE4
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
35 kHz through 50 kHz.
•
RATE5
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to
50 kHz through 65 kHz.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SCAN RATE2,
indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger is set to Rate
2, which is 20 kHz to 23 kHz.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN RATE1
This command sets the scan rate of the A video trigger to Rate 1,
which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz (standard broadcast rate).
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the A video trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the
Trig menu and selecting a channel from the Source drop-down
menu.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce {CH<x>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
415
Arguments
•
CH<x>
This argument specifies one of the input channels of the
instrument as the A video trigger. The value of x ranges
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two-channel instruments.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE CH2,
indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to
Channel 2.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce CH1
This command sets the source for A video trigger to Channel 1.
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
Description
This command sets or queries the video standard.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
{CUStom|NTSc|PAL|SECAM|HD480P60|HD720P60
|HD1080I50|HD1080I60|HD1080P24|HD1080P25|HD1080S
F24}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
Arguments
•
CUStom
This argument sets the instrument to use custom video
horizontal scan rate parameters that you set with the
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN command.
•
NTSc
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals
that meet the NTSC 525/60/2:1 standard (a line rate of 525
lines per frame and a field rate of 60 Hz).
•
PAL
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals
that meet the NTSC 625/50/2:1 standard (a line rate of 625
lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz).
•
SECAM
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals
416
that meet the SECAM standard.
•
HD480P60
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on the HDTV
480/60 progressive format.
•
HD720P60
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on the HDTV
720/60 progressive format.
•
HD1080I50
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV
1080/50 interlaced format.
•
HD1080I60
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV
1080/60 interlaced format.
•
HD1080P24
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV
1080/24 progressive format.
•
HD1080P25
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV
1080/25 progressive format.
•
HD1080SF24
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV
1080/24 segmented frame format.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard?
This query might return :TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE CH2,
indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to
Channel 2.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard NTSC
This command sets the instrument to trigger on NTSC-standard
video signals.
TRIGger:B
Description
This command sets the B trigger level to 50% of minimum and
maximum. The query form of this command returns the B trigger
parameters. This command is similar to selecting B Event
(Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing
the current setups.
Group
Trigger
417
Related Commands
TRIGger:A
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B SETLevel
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B?
Argument
•
SETLevel
This sets the B trigger level to 50% of MIN and MAX.
Example 1
TRIGger:B?
This query might return the following B trigger parameters:
:TRIGGER:B:STATE 0;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL -220.0000E3;BY TIME;EDGE:SOURCE CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING
DC;:TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2
Example 2
TRIGger:B SETLevel
This command sets the B trigger level to 50% of MIN and MAX.
TRIGger:B:BY
Description
This command selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs
after a specified number of events or a specified period of time
after the A trigger. This is equivalent to selecting B Event
(Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B
Seq tab, and then choosing Trig After Time or Trig on nth event.
Note: The traditional Runs After functionality is now served by
the Horizontal Delay function. For details, see the
HORIZontal[:MAIN]:DELay:MODe and
HORIZontal[:MAIN]:DELay:TIMe commands.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, TRIGger:B:TIMe,
HORIZontal[:MAIN]:DELay:MODe,
HORIZontal[:MAIN]:DELay:TIMe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:BY {EVENTS|TIMe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:BY?
418
Arguments
•
EVENTS
This sets the B trigger to take place following a set number
of trigger events after the A trigger occurs. The number of
events is specified by TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt.
•
TIMe
This sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger
event. The time period is specified by TRIGger:B:TIMe.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:BY?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:BY EVENTS, indicating
that the B trigger takes place following a set number of trigger
events after the A trigger occurs.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:BY TIMe
This command sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A
trigger event.
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Description
This query-only command returns the source, slope, and
coupling for B trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and
viewing the current Source, Slope, and Coupling settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling, TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe,
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Example
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE
CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling
Description
This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the B
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event
(Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the
setting from the Coupling drop-down list.
419
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling {DC|ATRIGger|NOISErej}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling?
Arguments
•
ATRIGger
This sets the B trigger coupling to match the setting on the A
trigger.
•
DC
This selects DC trigger coupling.
•
NOISErej
This selects DC low sensitivity.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING
ATRIGGER for the B trigger coupling.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling DC
This command selects DC for the B trigger coupling.
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe
Description
This command sets or queries the slope for the B trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the Slope.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe?
Arguments
•
420
RISe
This argument specifies the trigger on the rising or positive
edge of a signal.
•
FALL
This argument specifies the trigger on the falling or negative
edge of a signal.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE RISE,
indicating that the B edge trigger occurs on the rising slope.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe FALL
This command sets the B edge trigger to occur on the falling
slope.
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the B trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired setting from
the Source drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce {AUXiliary|CH<x>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce?
Arguments
•
AUXiliary
This specifies an external trigger (using the Auxiliary
Trigger Input connector, located on the rear panel of the
instrument) as the B trigger source.
•
CH<x>
This specifies one of the input channels as the B trigger
source. Input channels are specified by x, which can range
from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two-channel instruments.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce?
421
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE CH1,
indicating that the current input source for the B trigger is
channel 1.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce CH4
This command sets channel 4 as the input source for the B
trigger.
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Description
This query-only command returns the current B trigger events
parameter. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event
(Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B
Seq tab, choosing Trig on nth event, and viewing the Trig Event
setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Example
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 2,
indicating that 2 events must occur before the B trigger occurs.
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
Description
This command sets or queries the number of events that must
occur before the B trigger (when TRIG:DELay:BY is set to
EVENTS). This command is equivalent to selecting B Event
(Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B
Seq tab, choosing Trig on nth event, and setting the desired Trig
Event value.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt <NR1>
422
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the number of B trigger events, which can range from
1 to 10,000,000.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 2,
indicating that two events must occur after the A trigger before
the B trigger can occur.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt 4
This command specifies that the B trigger will occur four trigger
events after the A trigger.
TRIGger:B:LEVel
Description
This command sets or queries the level for the B trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab and
setting the B Trig Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LEVEL, TRIGger:B, TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:LEVel {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:LEVel?
423
Arguments
•
ECL
This specifies a preset ECL level of -1.3 V.
•
TTL
This specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
•
<NR3>
This is the B trigger level, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:LEVel?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:LEVEL 173.0000E-03,
indicating that the B trigger level is currently set at 173 mV.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:LEVel ECL
This command sets the B trigger level to -1.3 V.
TRIGger:B:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries the state of B trigger activity. If
the B trigger state is on, the B trigger is part of the triggering
sequence. If the B trigger state is off, then only the A trigger
causes the trigger event.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:MODe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:STATE?
Arguments
•
ON
This argument indicates that the B trigger is active and in
causes trigger events conjunction with the A trigger.
•
OFF
This argument indicates that only the A trigger causes trigger
events.
•
<NR1>
A 0 turns off the B trigger; any other value activates the B
trigger.
424
Example 1
TRIGger:B:STATE?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:STATE 0, indicating that
the B trigger is inactive and that only the A trigger causes trigger
events.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:STATE ON
This command sets the B trigger to active, making it capable of
causing trigger events.
TRIGger:B:TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries B trigger delay time. The B
Trigger time applies only if TRIGger:B:BY is set to TIMe. This
command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu, choosing the A→B Seq tab, and
setting Trig Delay.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:BY, TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:TIMe?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the B trigger delay time in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:TIMe?
This query might return :TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E-9,
indicating that the B trigger time is set to 16 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:TIMe 4E-6
This command sets the B trigger delay time to 4 µs.
425
TRIGger:B:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the type of B trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu and choosing Edge.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:TYPe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:TYPe EDGE
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:TYPe?
Argument
•
EDGE
This sets the B trigger type to edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:TYPe?
This query will return :TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE
Example 2
TRIGger:B:TYPe EDGE
This command sets the B trigger type to edge.
TRIGger:STATE?
Description
This query-only command returns the current state of the
triggering system. This command is equivalent to viewing the
trigger status LEDs on the instrument front panel.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:MODe
Syntax
TRIGger:STATE?
426
Outputs
•
ARMed
This indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger
information. All triggers are ignored when TRIGger:STATE
is arming.
•
AUTO
This indicates that the instrument is in the automatic mode
and acquires data even in the absence of a trigger.
•
DPO
This indicates that the instrument is in DPO mode.
•
PARTial
This indicates that the A trigger has occurred and the
instrument is waiting for the B trigger to occur.
•
REAdy
This indicates that all pretrigger information has been
acquired and that the instrument is ready to accept a trigger.
•
SAVe
This indicates that the instrument is in save mode and is not
acquiring data.
•
TRIGger
This indicates that the instrument triggered and is acquiring
the posttrigger information.
Example
TRIGger:STATE?
This query might return :TRIGGER:STATE ARMED, indicating
that the pretrigger data is being acquired.
UNLock
Description
This command (no query form) unlocks the front panel. The
command is equivalent to LOCk NONe.
Note: If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State
(RWLS), the UNLock command has no effect. For more
information, see the ANSI-IEEE Std 488.1-1987 Standard
Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section
2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
LOCk
427
Syntax
UNLock ALL
Argument
•
ALL
This specifies that all front-panel buttons and knobs are
unlocked.
Example
UNLock ALL
This command unlocks all front-panel buttons and knobs.
VERBose
Description
This command sets or queries the Verbose state that controls the
length of keywords on query responses. Keywords can be both
headers and arguments.
Note: This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2-1987
Common Commands (those starting with an asterisk). However,
this command does make a corresponding change in the
Response Header Enable State of the opposite interface (physical
or virtual GPIB interface). Refer to Introduction for more
information.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
HEADer, *LRN?, SET?
Syntax
VERBose {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Arguments
•
OFF
This sets the Verbose state to true, which returns full-length
keywords for applicable setting queries.
•
ON
This sets the Verbose state to false, which returns minimumlength keywords for applicable setting queries.
•
<NR1>
A 0 returns minimum-length keywords for applicable setting
queries; any other value returns full-length keywords.
Example 1
VERBose ON
This command enables the Verbose state.
428
Example 2
VERBOSE?
This query might return :VERBOSE 0, indicating that the
Verbose state is disabled.
WAVFrm?
Description
This query-only command returns WFMOutpre? and CURVe?
data for the waveform as specified by the DATA:SOUrce
command. This command is equivalent to sending both
WFMOutpre? and CURVe?, with the additional provision that
the response to WAVFrm? is guaranteed to provide a
synchronized preamble and curve.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre?
Syntax
WAVFrm?
Example
WAVFrm?
This query might return the waveform data as:
:WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1;BYT_OR
MSB;ENCDG
ASC;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0
;XINCR 400.0000E-12;XZERO 0.0000;XUNIT
"s";YMULT
4.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0000;YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT
"V";WFID "Ch1,
DC coupling, 100.0mV/div, 200.0ns/div, 5000
points,
Sample mode";:CURVE
51,50,51,48,51,48,50,49,51,49,51,48,
51,48,51,49,50,49,50,48,49,49,52,49,49,50,50,48
,50,49,
49,49,49,49,50,47,49,47,50,48,49,48,50,48,49,47
,49,48,
51,48,49,47,50,48,50,47,51,47,49,48,48,48,50,46
,50,46,
48,45,48,47,49,47,49,48,49,48,49,45,49,47,48,46
,48,48,
49,45,49,45,47,46,46,46,49,47,48,46,48,46,48,47
,47,46,
47,47,48,46,48,45,48,46,47,46,47,47,46,45,46,45
,47,47,
47,46,46,44,47,45,45,45,46,43,46,45,46,44,46,45
,48,45,
45,44,46,45,46,45,45,45,45,43,45,44,46,44,47,44
,44,44,
429
45,43,44,44,45,44,46,43,46,43,45,44,45,44,45,41
,44,43,
45,42,44,43,44,43,44,42,43,42,44,41,44,41,44,42
,43,42,
43,42,45,42,43,41,42,41,43,42,44,42,43,42,43,40
,42,40,
42,40,42,41,43,41,42,41,42,39,41,41,42,42,43,41
,42,39,
41,39,41,40,41,40,41,39,41,38,41,39,41,38,42,39
,41,37,
40,38,40,38,39,38,39,38,41,39,39,38,40,37,38,37
,38,38,
39,38,40,36,39,37,39,37,39,37,39,36,40,38,38,35
,38,36,
38,37,39,37,38,37,38,37,37,36,38,35,38,36,37,36
,38,36,
38,35,39,34,36,36,36,35,38,35,36,34,37,34,37,35
,37,36,
37,35,37,35,36,34,36,33,36,35,36,34,36,33,34,33
,34,34,
34,34,36,33,36,34,36,33,34,33,34,32,34,32,34,33
,33,31,
33,32,34,32,33,32,32,31,33,31,31,32,33,31,32,31
,32,30,
32,30,32,31,31,30,31,30,31,29,31,29,32,31,31,30
,30,29,
30,29,30,30,31,29,30,28,30,29,31,28,30,28,30,29
,29,27,
29,28,29,27,30,27,30,26,28,28,29,27,28,27,28,27
,28,28,
28,27,28,27,28,26,28,26,28,26,26,25,27,25,28,27
,28,26,
25,25,26,25,25,25,25,25,26,25,27,25,25,24,25,25
,26,24,
26,24,24,23,25,24,24,22,25,23,24,23,24,22,24,22
,23,22,
25,24,24,21,23,22,22,21,24,22,22,22,22,21,22,20
,23,21,
21,20
WFMInpre?
Description
This query-only command returns the waveform formatting
specification to be applied to the next incoming CURVe
command data.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre?
Syntax
WFMInpre?
430
Example
WFMInpre?
This query might return the waveform formatting as
:WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1;BYT_OR
MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT Y;PT_OFF 0;XINCR
2.0000E-6;XZERO 1.7536E-6;XUNIT "s";YMULT
1.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0000;YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V"
WFMInpre:ENCdg
Description
This command sets or queries the type of encoding for incoming
waveform data.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:ENCdg {ASC|BIN}
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:ENCdg?
Arguments
•
ASC
This specifies that the incoming data is in ASCII format.
•
BIN
This specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format
whose further interpretation requires knowledge of
BYT_NR, BIT_NR, BN_FMT, and BYT_OR.
Example 1
WFMInpre:ENCdg?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:ENCDG BIN, indicating
that the incoming waveform data is in binary format.
Example 2
WFMInpre:ENCdg ASC
This command sets the format of incoming waveform data to
ASCII format.
431
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
Description
This command sets or queries the format of binary data for
incoming waveforms.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP}
Syntax 2
WFMInput:BN_Fmt?
Arguments
•
RI
This specifies signed integer data point representation.
•
RP
This specifies positive integer data point representation.
•
FP
This specifies single-precision binary floating point
representation.
Example 1
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:BN_FMT RI, indicating
that the incoming data is currently interpreted as signed integers.
Example 2
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt FP
This command specifies that incoming data will be interpreted as
single-precision binary floating point numbers.
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
Description
This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform
data is transmitted first for incoming waveform data when data
points require more than one byte. This specification only has
meaning when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is greater than 1.
Group
Waveform Transfer
432
Related Commands
WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:BYT_Or?
Arguments
•
LSB
This specifies that the least significant byte will be
transmitted first.
•
MSB
This specifies that the most significant byte will be
transmitted first.
Example 1
WFMInpre:BYT_Or?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:BYT_OR LSB, indicating
that the least significant incoming CURVe data byte will be
transmitted first.
Example 2
WFMInpre:BYT_Or MSB
This command sets the most significant incoming byte of
incoming waveform data to be transmitted first.
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
Description
This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the
first ordered waveform, as specified by the DATa:DESTination
command. This specification is only meaningful when
WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre:BN_Fmt is set
to either RI or RP.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, WFMInpre:ENCdg,
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr?
433
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1, 2
(RI, RP) or 4 (FP).
Example 1
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:BYT_NR 2, indicating that
there are 2 bytes per incoming waveform data point.
Example 2
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr 1
This command sets the number of bytes per incoming waveform
data point to 1, which is the default setting.
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
Description
This command sets or returns the number of bits per binary
waveform point for the waveform, as specified by the
DATa:DESTination command. This specification is only
meaningful when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This number of bits per data point can be 8, 16 ( RI, RP) or
32 (FP).
Example 1
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8, indicating that
incoming RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per waveform
point.
Example 2
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr 16
This command sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16,
for incoming RI and RP binary format data.
434
WFMInpre:NR_FR?
Description
This query-only command returns one frame, indicating the
number of frames in the transmitted waveform record.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Syntax
WFMInpre:NR_FR?
Example
WFMInpre:NR_FR?
This query will return :WFMINPRE:NR_FR 1, indicating that
there is 1 data frame in the transmitted waveform record.
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
Description
This command sets or returns the number of data points that are
in the transmitted waveform record.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat,
WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?,
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:NR_Pt <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:NR_Pt?
Argument
•
<NR1>
If WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to Y, this is the number of data
points; if WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to ENV, this is the
number of min-max pairs.
435
Example 1
WFMInpre:NR_Pt?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:NR_PT 8000, indicating
that there are 8000 data points in the transmitted waveform
record.
Example 2
WFMInpre:NR_Pt 5000
This command specifies that 5000 data points will be
transmitted.
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
Description
This command sets or queries the point format of the incoming
waveform data. Regardless of the argument used, the scale,
offset, and so on are interpreted similarly. When ENV is used,
waveform data is interpreted over the min-max pair; when Y is
used, it is interpreted over a single point.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt {ENV|Y}
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt?
Arguments
•
ENV
This specifies that the waveform is transmitted in envelope
mide as maximum and minimum point pairs. Only Y values
are explicitly transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (n-PT_Off)
Ynmax = YZEro + YMUlt (ynmax - YOFf)
Ynmin = YZEro + YMUlt (ynmin - YOFf)
•
Y
This specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or
binary data point is transmitted for each point in the
waveform record. Only Y values are explicitly transmitted.
Absolute coordinates are given by:
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (N-PT_Off)
Yn = YZEro + YMUlt (Yn - YOFf)
436
Example 1
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt ENV
This command sets the incoming waveform data point format to
enveloped.
Example 2
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:PT_FMT ENV, indicating
that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum
point pairs.
WFMInpre:PT_Off
Description
This command specifies or returns the trigger point within the
waveform record for the reference waveform specified by the
DATa:DESTination command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, DATa:STARt, WFMOutpre:PT_Off
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:PT_Off <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:PT_Off?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is (record length -1) to record length and is the position
of the data point immediately following the actual trigger.
<NR1> is expressed relative to DATa:STARt.
Example 1
WFMInpre:PT_Off 0
This command specifies that the trigger point is the first point in
the waveform record, which is the default.
Example 2
WFMInpre:PT_Off?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:PT_OFF 0, indicating that
the incoming waveform trigger point is the first point in the
waveform record.
437
WFMInpre:WFId
Description
This command (no query form) accepts but ignores the
argument. This command is provided only to allow a waveform
extracted from the instrument to be easily imported.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, WFMInpre:ENCdg,
WFMOutpre:WFid
Syntax
WFMInpre:WFId <String>
Argument
•
<String>
This must be a valid IEEE-488.2 string (but the contents are
ignored).
Example
WFMInpre:WFId "Ch1, DC coupling, 2.000V/div,
400.0ns/div, 500 points, Sample mode"
This is a syntactically correct command.
WFMInpre:XINcr
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal interval between
incoming waveform points in units specified by
WFMInpre:XUNit.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMInpre:XUNit, WFMOutpre:XINcr
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:XINcr <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:XINcr?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the horizontal interval representation.
438
Example 1
WFMInpre:XINcr?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:XINCR 1.0000E-3,
indicating that if WFMInpre:XUNit is set to "s", there is a 1 ms
interval between incoming waveform points.
Example 2
WFMInpre:XINcr 3E-3
This command sets the interval between Incoming waveform
points to 3 ms.
WFMInpre:XZEro
Description
This command sets or queries the subsample time between the
trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of
the actual trigger on the incoming waveform. This value is used
to compute TTOFF for the incoming waveform, and is expressed
in terms of WFMInpre:XUNit.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMInpre:PT_Off, WFMInpre:XINcr, WFMInpre:XUnit,
WFMOutpre:XZEro
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:XZEro <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:XZEro?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This argument is a floating point value that ranges from WFMInpre:XINcr to 0.
Example 1
WFMInpre:XZEro?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:XZEro 7.5000E-6,
indicating that the trigger occurs 7.5 µs before the sample
designated by WFMInpre:PT_Off.
Example 2
WFMInpre:XZEro 5.7E-6
This command specifies that the trigger actually occurred 5.7 µs
before the sample designated by WFMInpre:PT_Off.
439
WFMInpre:XUNit
Description
This command sets or returns the horizontal units of the
incoming waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:XUNit
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:XUNit <String>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:XUNit?
Argument
•
<String>
This contains a maximum of three alpha characters that
represent the horizontal unit of measure for the incoming
waveform.
Example 1
WFMInpre:XUNit?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:XUNIT "s", indicating
that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are seconds.
Example 2
WFMInpre:XUNit "Hz"
This command specifies that the horizontal units for the
incoming waveform are hertz.
WFMInpre:YMUlt
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical scale factor (in
units/digitizing level) for the reference waveform, specified by
DATa:DESTination, upon a CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YUNit
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:YMUlt <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:UMUlt?
440
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the
incoming waveform points.
Example 1
WFMInpre:YMUlt?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:YMULT 40.0000E-3,
indicating that the vertical scale is 40 mV/digitizing level
(1V/div).
Example 2
WFMInpre:YMUlt 20E-3
This command specifies that (if WFMInpre:YUNit is "V" and
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is 1), the vertical scale is 20 mV/digitizing
level (500 mV/div).
WFMInpre:YOFf
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the
incoming waveform in digitizing levels. Variations in this
number are analogous to changing the vertical position of the
waveform. For those formats in which WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is
important (all nonfloating point formats), this command must
take the location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into
consideration.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YMUlt, WFMOutpre:YOFf
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:YOFf <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:YOFf?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the vertical offset in digitizing levels.
Example 1
WFMInpre:YOFf?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:YOFF 25, indicating the
vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels.
441
Example 2
WFMInpre:YOFf 50
This command specifies that the zero reference point for the
incoming waveform is 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions) above
the center of the data range.
WFMInpre:YUNit
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical units of the incoming
waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:YUNit
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:YUNit <String>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:YUNit?
Argument
•
<String>
This contains a maximum of three alpha characters that
represent the vertical unit of measure for the incoming
waveform.
Example 1
WFMInpre:YUNit?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:YUNIT "s", indicating the
vertical units for the incoming waveform are seconds.
Example 2
WFMInpre:YUNit "Pa"
This command specifies that the vertical units for the incoming
waveform are pascal.
WFMInpre:YZEro
Description
This command sets or queries the offset of the incoming
waveform in units specified by WFMInpre:YUNit. Variations in
this number are analogous to changing the vertical offset of the
waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
442
Related Commands
WFMInpre:YUNit, WFMOutpre:YZEro
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:YZEro <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:YZEro?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the offset in YUNits.
Example 1
WFMInpre:YZEro?
This query might return :WFMINPRE:YZEro 7.5000E-6,
indicating that the zero reference for the incoming waveform is
7.5 µV below the center of the data range (given that
WFMInpre:YUNit is set to V).
Example 2
WFMInpre:YZEro 1.5E+0
This command specifies that the zero reference point for the
incoming waveform is 1.5 V below the center of the data range
(given that WFMInpre:YUNit is set to V).
WFMOutpre?
Description
This query-only command returns the waveform formatting data
for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The
preamble components are considered to be of two types;
formatting and interpretation. The formatting components are:
ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or, BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr. The
interpretation components are derived from the DATa:SOUrce
specified waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre?
Example
WFMOutpre:?
This query might return the waveform formatting datat as:
:WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI
;BYT_NR 1;BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT
Y
;PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0;XINCR 8.0000E-9
;XZERO 4.8794E-9;XUNIT "s";YMULT -2000.0000E-3
;YOFF -4999.9995E-3;YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT "V"
443
;WFID "Ch1, DC coupling, 2.000V/div,
400.0ns/div,
500 points, Sample mode"
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Description
This command sets and queries the type of encoding for
outgoing waveforms.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or,
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:ENCdg {ASC|BIN}
Syntax 2
WFMOutpre:ENCdg?
Argument
•
ASC
This specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII
format. Waveforms internally stored as integers will be sent
as <NR1> numbers, while those stored as floating point will
be sent as <NR3> numbers.
•
BIN
This specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binary format
whose further specification is determined by
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:ENCdg?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG BIN, indicating
that outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASC
This command specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be
sent in ASCII format.
444
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
Description
This command sets and returns the number of bits per waveform
point that outgoing waveforms contain, as specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. Note that values will be constrained
according to the underlying waveform data. This specification is
only meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This number of bits per data point can be 8, 16, 32 or 64.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8, indicating
that outgoing RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per
waveform point.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr 16
This command sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16
for incoming RI and RP binary format data.
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Description
This command sets or queries the format of binary data for
outgoing waveforms specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP}
445
Syntax 2
WFMOutput:BN_Fmt?
Arguments
•
RI
This specifies signed integer data point representation.
•
RP
This specifies positive integer data point representation.
•
FP
This specifies single-precision binary floating point data
point representation.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RI, indicating
that the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer
format.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt FP
This command specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in
single-precision binary floating point format.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Description
This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform
data is transmitted first, during a waveform data transfer, when
data points require more than one byte. This specification only
has meaning when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}
Syntax 2
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or?
Arguments
•
LSB
This specifies that the least significant byte will be
transmitted first.
446
•
MSB
This specifies that the most significant byte will be
transmitted first.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR LSB, indicating
that the least significant data byte will be transmitted first.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or MSB
This command sets the most significant outgoing byte of
waveform data to be transmitted first.
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Description
This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note that
values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform
data. This specification is only meaningful when
WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN, and WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is
set to either RI or RP.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr?
Argument
•
<NR1>
This is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1, 2, 4
or 8. A value of 1 or 2 bytes per waveform point indicates
channel data; 4 bytes per waveform point indicate math data;
8 bytes per waveform point indicate pixel map (DPO) data.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 2, indicating
that there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point.
447
Example 2
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 1
This command sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform
data point to 1, which is the default setting.
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of frames for the
DATa:SOUrce waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe?
query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat,
WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Syntax
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Example
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:NR_FR 500, indicating
that there are 500 data frames to be sent.
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of points for the
DATa:SOUrce waveform that will be transmitted in response to
a CURVe? query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat,
WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Syntax
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Example
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT 5000, indicating
that there are 5000 data points to be sent.
448
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Description
This query-only command returns the point format for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The format
specifies a set of equations describing how the scale factors in
the preamble are used to give meaning to the CURVe data
points.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Example
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
This query might return :WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt ENV, indicating
that the waveform data is a series of min-max pairs.
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Description
This query-only command returns the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command.
Note: This returned value is the point immediately following the
actual trigger.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, WFMOutpre:XZEro
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Example
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF 251, specifying
that the trigger actually occurred between points 250 and 251.
449
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
Description
This query-only command specifies whether the source
waveform is Fast Acquisition. A Fast Acquisition waveform is
stored as a 200 (vertical) by 500 (horizontal) point bitmap. Each
point represents display intensity for that screen location. Only
CURVe? query functions are allowed on Fast Acquisition
waveforms.
When the WFMOutpre:PT_OR query returns Column, this
indicates that the source is a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that
each of 500 possible horizontal columns being transmitted
contains 200 vertical points). When the WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
query returns Linear, this indicates that the source is not a Fast
Acquisition waveform (and that each horizontal column being
sent contains only one vertical point). Note that waveform points
are transmitted in the following order: top to bottom, then left to
right.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
Example 1
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:PT_OR COL,
specifying that the waveform designated by the DATa:SOUrce
waveform is a Fast Acquisition waveform.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:PT_OR LINEAR ,
specifying that the source waveform is a nonFast Acquisition
waveform.
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Description
This query-only command returns a string describing several
aspects of the acquisition parameters for the waveform specified
by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
450
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Outputs
<string> comprises the following comma-separated fields:
Field
Source
Coupling
Vert Scale
Horiz Scale
Record
Length
Acquisition
Mode
Primary
Reference
Offset
W a ve f o r m S u f f i x e s
Description
The source identification string as it
appears in the front panel scale factor
readouts.
A string describing the vertical coupling of
the waveform (the Source 1 waveform in
the case of Dual Waveform Math).
A string containing the vertical scale
factor of the unzoomed waveform. The
numeric portion will always be 4 digits.
The examples cover all known internal
units.
A string containing the horizontal scale
factor of the unzoomed waveform. The
numeric portion will always be four digits.
The examples cover all known internal
units.
A string containig the number of
waveform points available in the entire
record. The numeric portion is given as
an integer.
A string describing the mode used to
acquire the waveform.
A string specifying the delta between the
Primary Reference (typically, the A
trigger) and the CURVe? zero reference
location identified by a combination of
PT_Off and XZEro in units of XUNits. For
example, in Trigger After Delay, this
number would be the actual time between
the A and B trigger. In the event that this
number is not meaningful, the string will
be exactly "0".
Examples
"Ch1-4"
"Math1-3"
"Ref1-4"
"AC coupling"
"DC coupling"
"GND coupling"
"100.0 mV/div"
"20.00 dB/div"
"45.00 deg/div
"785.4 mrad/div"
"500.0 uVs/div"
"10.00 kV/s/div"
"200.0 mV/div"
"50.00 unk/div"
"100.0 ms/div"
"10.00 kHz/div"
"50.00 c/div"
"500 points"
"500000 points"
"Sample mode"
"Pk Detect mode"
"Hi Res mode"
"Envelope mode"
"Average mode"
"57.2345 ms"
"87.3 Hz"
"0"
Example
WFMOutpre:WFId?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:WFID "Ch1, DC
coupling, 100.0mVolts/div,500.0µs/div,500
points, Hi Res mode"
451
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Description
This query-only command returns the horizontal point spacing in
units of WFMOutpre:XUNit for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. This value corresponds to the
sampling interval.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit,
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Example
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:XINCR 10.0000E-6,
indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 µs/point
(500 µs/div).
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Description
This query-only command returns the subsample time between
the trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence
of the actual trigger for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. This value is in units of
WFMOutpre:XUNit.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Note: During stopped state operation (i.e., ACQuire:STATE
OFF), this is the only preamble that changes on each acquisition.
If a query is run during steady state operation (that is, all control
changes have settled and triggers are arriving on a regular basis),
the XZEro value of the last stopped state is returned.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
452
Example
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 5.6300E-9,
indicating that the trigger actually occurred 5.63 ns before the
trigger sample.
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Description
This query-only command returns the horizontal units for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Example
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT "Hz", indicating
that the horizontal units for the waveform are in hertz.
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical scale factor per
digitizing level in units specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. For those
formats in which WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr is important (all
nonfloating point formats), WFMOutpre:YMUlt? must take the
location of the binary point implied by BYT_NR into
consideration.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
453
Example
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:YMULT 4.0000E-3,
indicating that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform
is 100 mV/div.
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical offset in digitized
levels for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command. For those formats in which BYT_NR is important (all
non-floating point formats), this command must take the location
of the binary point implied by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr into
consideration.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
Example
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:YOFF -50.0000E+0,
indicating that the position indicator for the waveform was 50
digitizing levels (2 divisions) below center screen.
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical units for the
waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
454
Example
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT "dB", indicating
that the vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels.
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Description
This query-only command returns the vertical offset in units
specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform specified by
the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not
exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:YUNit
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Example
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:YZERO -100.0000E-3,
indicating that vertical offset is set to -100 mV.
WFMpre:NR_FR?
Description
This query-only command returns the number of frames for the
waveform transmitted in response to a CURVE? query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat,
WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?,
Syntax
WFMpre:NR_FR?
Example
WFMpre:NR_FR?
This query might return :WFMPRE:NR_FR:10, indicating that
you have acquired 10 frames.
455
ZOOm
Description
This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for
all traces or live traces. The ZOOm query returns the current
vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display.
This command is equivalent to selecting Zoom Setup from the
Vertical menu and selecting Reset.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm {RESET|RESETLive}
Syntax 2
ZOOm?
Arguments
•
RESET
This resets the zoom transforms to default values for all
traces.
•
RESETLive
This resets the zoom transforms to default values for live
traces.
Example 1
ZOOm?
This query might return :
:ZOOM:MODE 0;GRATICULE:SIZE
50;:ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK ALL;
:ZOOM:CH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 2;
:ZOOM:CH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:CH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 2;
:ZOOM:CH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:CH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 2;
:ZOOM:CH3:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:CH4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 2;
:ZOOM:CH4:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:MATH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE
2;
:ZOOM:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:MATH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE
2;
:ZOOM:MATH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:MATH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE
456
2;
:ZOOM:MATH3:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:MATH4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE
2;
:ZOOM:MATH4:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 2;
:ZOOM:REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:REF2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 2;
:ZOOM:REF2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:REF3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 2;
:ZOOM:REF3:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000;
:ZOOM:REF4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 2;
:ZOOM:REF4:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;SCALE
1.0000
Example 2
ZOOm RESET
This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for
all traces.
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT
Description
This command sets or returns the sizes of the acquisition and
zoom windows when Zoom is selected. You can use this
command to set the graticule to display the zoom and acquisition
windows in the following manner:
•
Use half of the available display for the zoomed graticule
and half of the available display for the acquisiiton graticule
•
Use 80% of the available display for the zoomed graticule
and 20% for the acquisition graticule
•
Use the entire display for the zoomed graticule
Note: For this command to have an effect on the display, you
must have the zoom mode turned on. Use the ZOOm:MODe
command to turn on the zoom mode.
The ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT command is equivalent to
selecting Zoom Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and selecting a
value for the Graticule Split in the control window.
Group
Zoom
Related Commands
ZOOm:MODe
457
Syntax 1
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT
{FIFtyfifty|EIGHtytwenty|FuLl}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT?
Arguments
•
FIFtyfifty
This argument sets half of the available display to the
zoomed graticule and half of the available display to the
acquisiiton graticule; this argument is the default value.
•
EIGHtytwenty
This argument sets 80% of the available display to the
zoomed graticule and 20% to the acquisition graticule.
•
FULl
This argument sets the entire display to the zoomed
graticule.
Example 1
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT?
This query might return :ZOOM:GRATICULE:SPLIT
FIFTYFIFTY, indicating that the display area is divided equally
between the zoomed graticule and the acquisition graticule.
Example 2
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT FULl
This command sets the full display area to the zoomed graticule.
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk
Description
This command sets or queries the waveforms that the horizontal
zoom parameter affects. This is equivalent to selecting Zoom
Setup from the Hoiz/Acq menu and selecting the Lock.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk {ALL|LIVe|NONe}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk?
Arguments
•
ALL
This argument specifies that all the (CH<x>, Ref<x>,
Math<x>) waveforms will be horizontally positioned and
scaled together.
458
•
LIVe
This argument specifies that all live (CH<x>) waveforms
will be horizontally positioned and scaled together.
•
NONe
This argument specifies that only the selected waveform is
positioned and scaled using the horizontal zoom parameters.
Example 1
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk?
This query might return :ZOOM:HORIZONTAL:LOCK ALL,
indicating that all waveforms are positioned and scaled together.
Example 2
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk LIVE
This command horizontally positions and scales all live
waveforms.
ZOOm:MODe
Description
This command turns Zoom mode on or off. The Zoom query
returns the current state of Zoom mode. This command is
equivalent to pressing the front-panel ZOOM button.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:MODe {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:MODe
Arguments
•
ON
This turns on Zoom mode.
•
OFF
This turns off Zoom mode.
•
<NR1>
A 0 turns off Zoom mode; any other value turns on Zoom
mode.
Example 1
ZOOm:MODe?
This query might return :WFMOUTPRE:ZOOM:MODE 1,
indicating that Zoom mode is currently turned on.
459
Example 2
ZOOm:MODe OFF
This command turns off Zoom mode.
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal position of the
specified waveform. The setting of the
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk command determines the waveforms
that are affected. For example, if ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk is
set to LIVe, then only live (as opposed to reference or math)
waveforms are affected.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is a value from 0 to 100 and is the percent of the
waveform that is to the left of screen center, when the zoom
factor is 1times or greater.
Example 1
ZOOm:CH1:HORizontal:POSition?
This query might return :ZOOM:CH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000, indicating that the Zoom position for channel 1 is
currently set at 50% of acquired waveform.
Example 2
ZOOm:CH1:HORizontal:POSition 50
This command sets the Zoom position for channel 1 at 50% of
acquired waveform.
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the zoom horizontal scale factor of
the specified waveform.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
460
Syntax 2
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction.
Example 1
ZOOm:CH2:HORizontal:SCAle?
This query might return :ZOOM:CH2:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 1,
indicating that the channel 2 waveform has a horizontal zoom
scale factor of 1.
Example 2
ZOOm:CH1:HORizontal:SCAle 5
This command sets the channel 1 horizontal scale factor to 5.
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the zoom vertical position of the
specified waveform.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the vertical zoom position expressed in divisions.
Example 1
ZOOm:CH1:VERTical:POSition?
This query might return :ZOOm:CH1:VERTical:POSition
0.0000, indicating that the zoomed trace is centered at division
0 of the acquisition trace.
Example 2
ZOOm:CH1:VERTical:POSition 2
This command sets the vertical position to 2, which centers the
zoom trace at the second division of the acquisition trace.
461
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the zoom vertical scale of the
specified waveform.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle?
Argument
•
<NR3>
This is the amount of vertical expansion or compression,
which operates on a 1 - 2 - 5 sequence (For example, 1, 2, 5,
10, 20, 50, 100…). Based on the value entered, this
command uses the nearest scale factor. Setting the vertical
scale to 1 indicates unity (no zoom).
Example 1
ZOOm:CH2:VERTical:SCAle?
This query might return :ZOOM:CH2:VERTICAL:SCALE
2.0000, indicating that the vertical scale is 2x.
Example 2
ZOOm:REF1:VERTical:SCAle 4
This command sets the vertical scale of REF1 to 5x (the nearest
scale factor).
462
Miscellaneous
Character Chart
463
Reserved Words
Overview
This is a list of reserved words for the TDS5000 series
instruments. Capital letters identify the required minimum
spelling. For the most robust code, use the full spelling, since
spelling rules may change over time and among instrument
models.
*CAL to DIAg
*CAL
*CLS
*DDT
*ESE
*ESR
*IDN
*LRN
*OPC
*OPT
*PSC
*PUD
*RCL
*RST
*SAV
*SDS
*SRE
*STB
*TRG
*TST
*WAI
A
ABSolute
ACQuire
ACTUal
ALIas
ALL
ALLev
AREA
AUTOBright
AUTOSet
AUXout
B
BANdwidth
BELl
BETWeen
BIT_Nr
BN_Fmt
BOTh
Box
BOXPcnt
BUSY
BY
BYT_Nr
BYT_Or
CALibrate
CENTER
CH<x>
CLAss
CLOCk
CMDBatch
COLOr
CONTROL
COPy
COUNt
COUPling
CURSor
CURVe
DATa
DATe
DEFIne
DELay
DELEte
DELTa
DELTATime
DESE
DESKew
DESTination
DIAg
DIR to MAXimum
DIR
DIREction
DISplay
DIVisions
EDGE
EDGE2
ENCdg
EVENT
EVENTS
EVMsg
EVQty
EXECUTE
EXTatten
EXTDBatten
EXTUnits
FACtory
FAILURES
464
FASTAcq
FILEName
FILESystem
FILTer
FIRST
FORMat
FRAME
FREQuency
FUNCtion
GAIN
GATEPOS
GATEWIDTH
GATING
GLItch
GPIB
GRATicule
HALT
HARDCopy
HBArs
HDELTA
HDR
HEADer
HIGH
HIGHLimit
HIStogram
HOLDoff
HOLDTime
HORizontal
HPOS<x>
ID
IMMed
INTENSITy
INPut
ITEM
LABEL
LAST
LENgth
LESSLimit
LEVEL
LOCk
LOGIc
LOOP
LOOPS
LOW
LOWLimit
MAG
MAIn
MATH<x>
MATHCOLOr
MAXimum
MEAN to SIZe
MEAN
MEAS<x>
MEASUrement
METHod
MID
MID2
MINimum
MKDir
MODe
MORELimit
NAMe
NEWpass
NEXT
NR_Pt
NUMACq
NUMAVg
NUMEnv
NUMITEMS
OFFSet
PAIred
PALETTE
PASSword
PATtern
PERCent
PERSistence
PHASE
POLarity
PORT
POSition
POSition<x>
PRInt
PRObe
PROBECal
PROBEFunc
PRObestate
PT_Fmt
PT_Off
PT_OR
PULse
PUMODE
READFile
RECAll
RECOrdlength
REF
REF<x>
REFCOLOr
REFLevel
REName
REPEt
RESBw
RESistance
SUPPress
TERminator
TEST
THReshold
TIMe
TIMEOut
TIMEStamp
TRACk
TRANsition
TRIGBar
TRIGger
TRIGIF
TRIGT
TYPe
UNIts
UNLock
UNWRap
VALue
VARPersist
VBArs
VDELTA
VERBose
VOLtage
<wfm>
WAVEform
WAVFrm
WEIghting
WFId
WFMInpre
WFMOutpre
WHEn
WIDth
WINdow
WRITEFile
RESULT
RESults
RMDir
RUNT
SAMPLERate
SAVe
SCAle
SCREENSAVER
SCREENSAVERDELAY
SELect
SELECTED
SERnumber
SET
SETHold
SETTime
SETUp
SIZe
SLOpe to ZOOm
SLOpe
SOURCE
SOURCE2
SPAN
SPC
SPECTral
SPLit
STARt
STATE
STATIstics
STDdev
STOP
STOPAfter
STRing
STYLe
SUBITEMS
SUBSYS
XINcr
XPOS
XUNit
XZEro
YMUlt
YOFf
YPOS
YUNit
YZEro
ZOOm
465
Factory Default Setup Values
Overview
These tables list the default setup values by command group.
These are the values that the instrument sets when you press the
DEFAULT SETUP front-panel button or send the FACtory
command. Only those commands that have values set by the
DEFAULT SETUP function are listed in these tables.
Acquisition
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
ACQuire:MODe
ACQuire:NUMAVg
ACQuire:NUMEnv
ACQuire:REPEt
ACQuire:STATE
ACQuire:STOPAfter
SAMple
16
10
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
RUNSTop
Cursor
Default Setup Values
Command
Default
CURSor:FUNCtion
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
CURSor:MODe
CURSor:PAIred:POSITION<x>
CURSor:SOUrce
CURSor:SPLit:POSITION<x>
CURSor:SPLit:SOURCE2
CURSor:SPLit:UNIts
CURSor:STATE
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
VBArs
±300.0000E-3
INDependent
±1.6000E-6
CH1
±1.6000E-6
CH1
BASE
0 (OFF)
±1.6000E-6
SECOnds
Display
Default Setup Values
466
Command
Default
DISplay:CLOCk
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr
DISplay:COLOr:PALETTE
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr
DISplay:FILTer
DISplay:FORMat
DISplay:GRAticule
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform
DISplay:PERSistence
DISplay:STYle
DISplay:TRIGBar
DISplay:TRIGT
DISplay:VARPersist
1
DEFAULT
NORMal
DEFAULT
SINX
YT
FULl
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
28800
75.0000
OFF
VECtors
SHORt
1 (ON)
500.0000E-3
Hardcopy
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
HARDCopy:FILEName
HARDCopy:PORT
""
FILE
Histogram
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
30.0000, 25.1000,
70.0000, 75.2000
LINEAr
HORizontal
2.0000
CH1
0 (OFF)
HIStogram:DISplay
HIStogram:FUNCTION
HIStogram:SIZe
HIStogram:SOUrce
HIStogram:STATE
Horizontal
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
HORizontal:RESOlution
HORizontal:ROLL
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SAMPLERate
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle
5000
5000
AUTO
0 (OFF)
50.0000
0.0000
50.0000
1.2500E+9
400.0000E-9
467
Math
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
MATH<x>:DEFine
MATH<x>:LABEL:NAMe
MATH<x>:LABEL:XPOS
MATH<x>:LABEL:YPOS
""
""
5
MATH1 65
MATH2 80
MATH3 95
MATH4 110
2
0.0000
1.0000
325.0000E+06
0.0000
2.0000E-06
0 (OFF)
DB
DEGREES
20.0000
223.6000E-03
1.0000E+06
600.0000E+06
-35.0000
0 (OFF)
GAUSSIAN
MATH<x>:NUMavg
MATH<x>:POSition
MATH<x>:SCAle
MATH<X>:SPECTral:CENTER
MATH<X>:SPECTral:GATEPOS
MATH<X>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH
MATH<X>:SPECTral:LOCk
MATH<X>:SPECTral:MAG
MATH<X>:SPECTral:PHASE
MATH<X>:SPECTral:REFLEVEL
MATH<X>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset
MATH<X>:SPECTral:RESBw
MATH<X>:SPECTral:SPAN
MATH<X>:SPECTral:SUPPress
MATH<X>:SPECTral:UNWRap
MATH<X>:SPECTral:WINdow
Measurement
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
468
Command
Default
MEASUrement:GATING
MEASUrement:METHod
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1]
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
MEASUrement: MEAS<x>:STATE
MEASUrement: MEAS<x>:TYPe
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1]
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
0 (OFF)
HIStogram
UNDEFINED
CH1
CH1
RISe
RISe
FORWards
0 (OFF)
UNDEFINED
CH1
CH1
RISe
RISe
FORWards
PERCent
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
90.0000
10.0000
50.0000
50.0000
OFF
32
Miscellaneous
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
AUXout:EDGe
AUXout:SOUrce
CMDBatch
HEADer
LOCk
ROSc:SOUrce
VERBose
FALling
ATRIGger
1 (ON)
1 (ON)
NONe
INTERNAL
1 (ON)
469
Trigger
470
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
TRIGger:A:MODe
TRIGger:A:TYPe
TRIGger:A:LEVel
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
AUTO
EDGE
0.0000
DEFAult
1.5000E-06
CH1
DC
RISe
PATtern
AND
CH1 1.2000
CH2 1.2000
CH3 1.2000
CH4 1.2000
CH1 HIGH
CH2 X
CH3 X
X
TRUE
5.0000E-09
5.0000E-09
RISe
1.2000
CH2
1.2000
CH1
2.0000E-09
3.0000E-09
RISe
TRUe
GLItch
CH1
2.0000E-09
ACCept
POSITIVe
CH1
HIGH
1.2000E-00
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOURce
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold
:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGic:INPut:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGic:THReshold
:CH<x>
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDth
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUStom:FORMat
POSITIVe
1.2000E-00
800.0000E-03
OCCurs
2.0000E-09
2.0000E-09
POSITIVe
1.2000E-00
800.0000E-03
FASTERthan
2.0000E-09
2.0000E-09
WITHIN
POSITIVe
HIGH
1.20000-E00
1.2000-E00
800.0000-E3
INSide
OCCurs
2.0000E-9
STAYSHigh
2.0000E-09
INTERLAced
471
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUStom:SCAN
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOURce
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
TRIGger:B:STATE
TRIGger:B:TYPe
TRIGger:B:LEVel
TRIGger:B:BY
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling
TRIGger:B:TIMe
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
RATE1
ALLFields
0.0000
1
NORMAl
RATE1
CH1
NTSC
0 (OFF)
EDGe
0.0000
EVENTS
CH1
RISe
DC
16.0000E-09
2
Vertical
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
CH<x>:BANdwidth
CH<x>:COUPling
CH<x>:DESKew
CH<x>:OFFSet
CH<x>:INVert
CH<x>:POSition
CH<x>:SCAle
CH<x>:TERmination
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTatten
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
CH<x>:LABEL:NAMe
CH<x>:LABEL:XPOS
CH<x>:LABEL:YPOS
CH1-4
1.0000E+09
CH1-4
DC
CH1-4
0.0000
CH1-4
0.0000
0
CH1-4
0.0000
CH1-4
100.0000E-03
CH1-4
1.0000E-06
CH1-4
1.0000
CH1-4
"None"
CH1-4
""
CH1-4
5
CH1
5
CH2
20
CH3
35
CH4
50
"None"
REF1
RIBinary
CH1
1
500
50.0
""
REF1-4 5
REF1 125
REF2 140
REF3 155
REF4 170
0.0000
1.0000E-3
CH1
1
CH2
0
CH3
0
CH4
0
CH1
MATH1-4 0
REF1-4 0
CH<x>PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
DATa:DESTination
DATa:ENCdg
DATa:SOUrce
DATa:STARt
DATa:STOP
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
SELect:CH<x>
SELect:CONTROl
SELect:MATH<x>
SELect:REF<x>
472
Waveform
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Command
Default
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
WFMInpre:ENCdg
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
WFMInpre:PT_Off
WFMInpre:XINcr
WFMInpre:XUNit
WFMInpre:XZEro
WFMInpre:YMUlt
WFMInpre:YOff
WFMInpre:YUNit
WFMInpre:YZEro
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt
WFMOutpre:PT_Off
WFMOutpre:XINcr
WFMOutpre:XUNit
WFMOutpre:XZEro
WFMOutpre:YMUlt
WFMOutpre:YOff
WFMOutpre:YUNit
WFMOutpre:YZEro
WFMOutpre:WFid
8
RI
1
MSB
BIN
500
Y
0
2.0000E-06
"s"
0.000
1.0000E-03
0.0000
"V"
0.0000
8
RI
1
MSB
BIN
500
Y
2500
800.0000E-12
"s"
0.000
4.0000E-03
0.0000
"V"
0.0000
"Ch1, DC coupling,
100.0mV/div,
400.0ns/div, 5000 points,
Sample mode"
Zoom
D ef au lt S et u p V al u e s
Com ma nd
Def au lt
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition
FIFtyfifty
CH1-4
MATH1-4
REF1-4
CH1-4
MATH1-4
REF1-4
ALL
0 (OFF)
CH1-4
MATH1-4
REF1-4
CH1-4
MATH1-4
REF1-4
ZOOm:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle
ZOOm:HORizontal:LOCk
ZOOm:MODe
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition
ZOOm:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle
50.0000
50.0000
50.0000
2
2
2
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
473
GPIB Interface Specifications
Overview
This topic describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the
instrument. Normally, you will not need this information to use
the instrument, but this information may be useful if you are
connecting to controllers with unusual configurations.
GPIB Functions
The following table lists the GPIB interface functions and
electrical function subsets supported by this instrument and a
brief description of each function.
474
GPI
Functions
Interface
Function
Subset
Description
Acceptor
Handshake
AH1
Controller
C0
Device Clear
DC1
Device
Trigger
DT1
Electrical
E2
Listener
L4
Parallel Poll
PP0
Remote/
Local
RL1
Service
Request
SR1
Source
Handshake
SH1
Talker
T5
The instrument can receive multiline
messages across the GPIB from other
devices.
No Controller capability; the
instrument cannot control other
devices.
The instrument can respond to both
the DCL (Device Clear) interface
message and to the Selected Device
Clear (SDC) interface message when
the instrument is listen-addressed.
Device Trigger capability; the
Instrument does respond to the
GET (Group Execute Trigger)
interface message.
The instrument uses tri-state buffers,
which are optimal for high-speed data
transfer.
The instrument becomes a listener
when it detects the listen address
being sent over the bus with the ATN
line asserted. The instrument ceases
to be a listener and becomes a talker
when it detects the talk address being
sent over the bus with the ATN line
asserted.
No Parallel Poll capability; the
instrument does not respond to PPC
(Parallel Poll Configure), PPD (Parallel
Poll Disable), PPE (Parallel Poll
Enable), or PPU (Parallel Poll
Unconfigure) interface messages, nor
does it send a status message when
the ATN and EOI lines are asserted
simultaneously.
The instrument can respond to both
the GTL (Go To Local) and LLO (Local
Lock Out) interface messages.
The instrument can assert the SRQ
line to notify the controller in charge
that it requires service.
The instrument can initiate multiline
messages to send across the GPIB to
other devices.
The instrument becomes a talker
when it detects the talk address being
sent over the bus with the ATN line
asserted. The instrument ceases to be
a talker and becomes a listener when
it detects the listen address being sent
over the bus with the ATN line
asserted. The instrument also ceases
to be a talker when it detects the talk
address of another device being sent
over the data lines with ATN asserted.
475
Interface Messages
The following table shows the standard interface messages that
the instrument supports.
Standard Interface Messages
476
Message
GPIB
DCL
Yes
GET
Yes
GTL
Yes
LLO
Yes
PPC
No
PPD
No
PPE
No
PPU
No
SDC
Yes
SPD
Yes
SPE
Yes
TCT
No
UNL
Yes
UNT
Yes
Listen Addresses
Yes
Talk Addresses
Yes
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement